Home

eta/VPG version 3.0 User Manual

1. 2 VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART After parts are selected VPG automatically generates 4 10 nodes tetra mesh 6 3 22 TRANSFORM Description This function allows the user to transform selected elements by move rotate mapping LCS and normal offset The normal offset option only applies to plate elements It should be noted that the normal of the plate elements should be consistent for a proper normal offset Usage 1 VPG first prompts the user to select the desired elements 2 MPG then prompts the user to select the desired transformation MOVE moves the selected elements to a new location according to the distance entered along the selected axis ROTATE rotates the selected elements to an angle increment right hand rule 6 72 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR NORMAL OFFSET moves the selected plate elements in the normal direction by the specified thickness 3 VPG prompts for a desired coordinate system local or global this step is not required for NORMAL OFFSET A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 15 4 VPG prompts for the transformation value 5 The elements are transformed 6 VPG prompts the user to select one of the following options BGRIM HEW TRAHSFDRH REVERSE EXIT AGAIN performs the same transformation again with the same specifications NEW TRANSFORM begins
2. L5 kj SE van EE Iri Baik st i m Hibs NE ntl Feu Sees ied T Ombi amp ET mr mcm mst ain T mua ud Z rema malia C umen mien mri Figure 9 67 The eta Post Processor Interface Window 9 12 6 CURVE OPERATION TOOLBAR Description Below each curve window there isa button The user can click this button and the button will be replaced by the Curve Operation Toolbar that is shown in Figure 9 68 Print Clipboard Export Attribute Operation gave al 9 64 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Figure 9 68 The Curve operation toolbar In the Curve operation toolbar there are six buttons can be used and the detailed functional description is given in the following section 9 65 e PRINT This function enables the user to print or save the content of the current curve window Please refer to the section 3 5 PRINT for more information e CLIPBOARD This function enables the user to copy the content of the current curve window to the clipboard and can be used for other text edit tool such as MS Word Copy to Clipboard is the standard Windows method of transferring data between a source and a destination Copy to Clipboard is a system service shared by the entire Windows session Using this function the user can copy a graph image directly to other Microsoft programs as a bitmapped image provided that the destination program supports a bitmapped image paste A demonstratio
3. ENTER OUTPUT FILE NAME OR CR FOR DEFAULT OR STOP FOR QUIT 2 Once the file name is entered VPG prompts gt ENTER COMMAND ALL PARTS SELECT PART EXIT 3 VPG displays the SUMMARY OF MASCAL window with the part s properties and displays in the dialogue window the part s density 10 3 13 ON OFF Description This function toggles selected parts ON and OFF The following options are given as a submenu See Figure 10 3 3 LIRE 0 alg x PID PART NAME CURSOR AT ELEHEHT CURSUR AT LORE CURSOR RT SURFACE IHUERSE OHS OFF KEV IH PART RAHLE OM ALL PARTS OFF ALL FARTS PART SETS H OFF HILTI PFT HREGIUH eT ee SELECT ELEMEHT TYPE UHD EXIT Figure 10 3 3 Part On Off Menu Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART PART NAME Clicking on the listed parts will turn them on off CURSOR AT ELEMENT select part by element DEFAULT CURSOR AT LINE select part by line CURSOR AT SURFACE select part by surface 10 17 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY INVERSE ON OFF all on parts off and all off parts on KEY IN PART RANGE select by assign a part number range ON ALL PARTS all parts are turned on OFF ALL PARTS all parts are turned off PART SETS ON OFF turns parts on off by their assigned set MULTI PT REGION select part by user defined multi point region WINDOW select part by drag window SELECT ELEMENT TYPE select element type UNDO rejects last 10 3 14
4. INTERNAL ENERGY KINETIC ENERGY X MOMENT Y MOMENT Z MOMENT X RIGID BODY VELOCITY Y RIGID BODY VELOCITY Z RIGID BODY VELOCITY CONTACT INTERFACE FORCES NCFORC Description The user can plot the contact interface force data from the ncforc file The following types are available 9 59 X FORCE Y FOECE Z FORCE PRESSURE eta VPG3 0 Chapter 9 X COORDINATE Y COORDINATE Z COORDINATE NODAL FORCE NODFOR POST PROCESSING Description The user can plot the nodal force data from the nodfor file NODAL POINT DATA NODOUT Description The user can plot the nodal point data from the nodout file The following types are available X DISPLACEMENT Y DISPLACEMENT Z DISPLACEMENT X VELOCITY Y VELOCITY Z VELOCITY X ACCELERATION Y ACCELERATION Z ACCELERATION RIGID BODY DATA RBDOUT Description The user can plot the rigid body time history data from the rbdout file The following types are available 9 60 GLOBAL X COORDINATE GLOBAL Y COORDINATE GLOBAL Z COORDINATE GLOBAL X DISPLACEMENT GLOBAL Y DISPLACEMENT GLOBAL Z DISPLACEMENT GLOBAL X ROT DISPLACEMENT GLOBAL Y ROT DISPLACEMENT GLOBAL Z ROT DISPLACEMENT GLOBAL X VELOCITY GLOBAL Y VELOCITY GLOBAL Z VELOCITY DVECTOR ROW 2 A DVECTOR ROW 2 B DVECTOR ROW 2 C DVECTOR ROW 3 A DVECTOR ROW 3 B DVECTOR ROW 3 C LOCAL A DISPLACEMENT LOCAL B DISPLACEMENT LOCAL C DISPLACEMENT LOCAL A ROT DISPLACEMENT LOCAL B ROT DISPLACEMEN
5. SETXIS SELECTED gt ENTER NEW type SET ID OLD X TYPE 0 TO EXIT 6 6 11 REVIEW LIST Description This function displays the defined sets in the MENU WINDOW When a set is selected the elements nodes parts of that set are displayed in the CONTENTS OF SET window 6 6 12 SHOW SET Description This function allows the user to display all or some of the defined sets VPG displays an ID number next to each element node part Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM type SET LIST List of all sets CURSOR AT element node part ALL type SETS EXIT e VPG displays all node sets and returns the user to the set submenu Note Because more than one set ID number may be assigned to each element node part viewing all of the ID numbers at once may be confusing The user may clarify the screen by displaying one specific set 6 112 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR at a time 6 6 13 SET ON OFF PART Description This function allows the user to turn on and off parts included in a selected part set It allows for convenient organization of parts in a complicated model and manipulation of large numbers of parts in a sub assembly level 6 113 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 7 SET MENU NASTRAN The functions in the SET MENU create sets that facilitate the organization of output control data The following options are available in the SET menu when the analysis code is set to NASTRAN in the SETUP MENU
6. i e 0 0 1000 This will transform the selected surface s 1000 units along the W axis ROTATE e If ROTATE is entered enter angle increment right hand rule about the W axis The remaining commands are the same as the MOVE option ABORT e User will now be prompted to select the surface to be transformed 3 VPG prompts the user to select surfaces to transform The user also has the option to select AGAIN or REVERSE to repeat the rotation or movement Once the desired surfaces are selected enter DONE to continue 6 2 21 TRIM SURFACE Description This function defines curves for trimming edges and or cutting holes on the selected surface The defined curves may be poly lines b spline lines circles piecewise linear segments or intersecting lines of two surfaces 6 29 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG prompts for a surface SELECT SURFACE FOR TRIM OPERATION 2 Upon selection of the surface VPG prompts gt SELECT POINT ON SURFACE FOR TRIM LINE ABORT CIRCLE IHTERSECTIBH LIME OPEN CURUE POINT SPLIME CURIE REJECT LAST PT DIME CLOSED EXIT 6 30 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR TRIM SURFACE CIRCLE Description This function cuts circles on a selected surface The user defines the location of the circle via mouse pick Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT THE CENTER OF THE CIRCLE The user defines the center of the circle anywhere on the surface gt SELECT A POINT ON THE
7. ELEMENT HONE PART SEGHEHT set EXIT Note If the analysis code is set to LS DYNA see section 6 6 Each option contains a similar submenu with the following options for manipulating the output control of their respective set groups ANNOTATE CREATE CURRENT DELETE REMOVE EMPTY SETS REMOVE UNREF SETS INCLUDE ELEMENTS NODES PARTS LIST REMOVE ELEMENTS NODES PARTS RENUMBER SET REVIEW LIST SHOW SET SET ON OFF PART VIEW EXIT A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 6 7 1 ANNOTATE NODE Description This function allows the user to add notes to a selected set Usage 6 114 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM NODE SET LIST List of all sets CURSOR AT NODE EXIT 2 After selecting a set VPG prompts gt SETXIS SELECTED gt ENTER CARD DESCRIPTION 70 CHAR MAX e Once the note is entered the user is returned to step 1 6 7 2 CREATE NODE Description This function allows the user to generate sets with unique node and element ID numbers The nodes may be included in multiple sets Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW NODE SET NUMBER X OR E TO EXIT e Any integer greater than zero 0 is valid If the user enters a node set ID number already assigned VPG returns the prompt gt NODE SET xxxx ALREADY EXISTS 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES e The user may press the left most mouse
8. EXIT CONSTRAINT CARDS ADAPTIVITY Description This function defines adaptivity Usage 1 When CREATE is selected the CONSTRAINED ADAPTIVITY DEFINITION window pops up e The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS EXTRA NODES Description This function defines extra nodes for a rigid body Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION NODE SET e The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 4 2 for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS GENERALIZED WELD Description This function defines spot and fillet welds Coincident nodes are permitted if the local coordinate ID is defined For the SPOTWELD a local coordinate ID is not required if the nodes are offset Failures can include both the plastic and brittle failures These can be used either independently or together Failure occurs when either criterion is met The welds may undergo large rotations since the equations of rigid body mechanics are used to update their motion Usage 6 134 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION BUTT WELD CUHBIMED WELD CROSS FILLET WELD FILLET WELB SPOT WELD EXIT The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 4 4 for further description CONSTRAINT
9. LIHE DRAR 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT DRAG MESH OPTION ONE LINE DRAG Allows user to drag 1D elements into 2D elements beam to plate or 2D elements into 3D elements plate to solid along a selected line NORMAL DRAG Extrudes plate elements into solid elements normal to the selected plate elements ROTATIONAL DRAG e Extrudes beam elements to plate elements or plate elements to solid elements along the axis of rotation TRANSLATIONAL DRAG e Extrudes beam elements to plate elements or plate elements to solid elements along W axis 3 OR 4 LINE DRAG Extrudes beam elements to plate elements or plate elements to solid elements along 3 or 4 selected lines EXIT The following sections cover the details for each command DRAG MESH ONE LINE DRAG Description This section covers the options for the ONE LINE DRAG subsection of DRAG MESH This function extrudes the selected elements along the selected line to form the higher order elements i e 1D elements PLOTEL beams are extruded to form plates and plate elements are extruded to form solid elements Usage 6 55 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS 2 Then VPG prompts gt SELECT CONTROL LINE FOR DRAG MESH e Number of points on the selected drag line dictates the number of sections created e Line direction must point in the direction of the intended mesh 3 Once the line is selected the mesh is created VPG p
10. ROAD DEFINITION ROAD MENU DELETE HOUE ROAD SHOW ROAD COMBINE EXPORT ROAD SELECT FROM LIBRARY SUMMARY EXIT A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 7 2 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 1 1 SHOW ROAD Description This option allows the user to look at the 11 types of roads and find which road s the user would want to create 7 CHATTERSTRIP 3 TYY __ 3 ALTERNATE b i f H COSRLES TONE 11 ASHAARI ee E EIN SS t a foerat Fu fag Emx pee et ed 5 RIPPLE 1 amp RIPPLE 7 16 PAVE 1 B y luis so EON 4 PUTHDLE Z TP Gla Lalas O audio EE WLEBHBELEBITCCUINSDIS IEE te be a FH amp he eetidet E liek iat ETAs PG E ES E I M m mem a i TM J i EM M I I Usage Select SHOW ROAD from the VPG Road Menu The road surface models contained in the VPG Road Library will be displayed 7 1 2 SELECT FROM LIBRARY Description This option allows the user to read a Road Surface from the library into the VPG database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ROAD SURFACE FROM LIBRARY gt ENTER COMMAND e USER DEFINED e Prompts the user for a previously defined road surface library name and allows the user to select saved road surfaces from that library 7 3 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES e When one type of road surface library is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT C S TYPE e The
11. TEXT This function allows the user to add a text Dee label in the graphic display area Enter a Exit string of characters in the field above the TEXT button Press the TEXT button then click a location on the screen The program Als S Label and Arrow Control will add the text label at the clicked location peL a DELETE Delete an arrow or a text label The program will highlight the arrow or text label on the screen as the user selects an arrow or text label in the list Click DELETE button to delete the highlighted arrow or text label The user may combine the Shift or Cntrl key and mouse click for multiple selections EXIT Exit the function eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 9 8 5 ROTATE LIGHT POST PROCESSING Description eta Post uses two light sources directed from the specific locations from the model This function allows the user to rotate the light sources along the screen X Y axes The function only works when the SHADE option is turned on The program displays the light source 1 and 2 and their lighting directions when the function starts The user uses the mouse to move the light sources on the screen The lighting effect is updated as the user moves the mouse Press the left mouse button to exit the function The user may activate this function by pressing the SHIFT and LEFT mouse button simultaneously Release the mouse button to exit the function 9 8 6 LIGHT PROPERTY Description The light property allows th
12. gt MOVE OR ROTATE M R MOVE ROTATE ABORT e If MOVE is entered gt ENTER U V W INCREMENTS i e 0 0 1000 will copy the selected line s 1000 units along the W axis gt INCLUDE COPIED LINE IN ITS ORIGINAL PART Y N e Allow the user to specify the desired part e If ROTATE is entered gt ENTER ANGLE INCREMENT degrees i e 200 degrees gt INCLUDE COPIED LINE IN ITS ORIGINAL PART Y N e Allow the user to specify the desired part e If ABORT is entered then the function is terminated 6 1 6 COMBINE LINES Description This function allows the user to combine multiple lines into a new single line with a new line number The original lines will be deleted after they are combined The combined line should be selected in a logical sequence to form the new line Usage 1 VPQG prompts gt PICK LINES TO COMBINE 2 Once all the lines are selected DONE or EXIT combines the lines and exits the command 6 7 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 1 7 SPLINE CURVE Description This function allows the user to draw a spline curve line through multiple points or nodes or any combination of points or nodes A minimum of 3 Points or Nodes is required for use of this function Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NEXT POINT OR NODE ABORT DONE EXIT KEY IN XYZ The user may enter up to 3 points globally to define a point or node INCREMENTAL XYZ e The user may enter DX DY DZ from the previous po
13. 3 If the user selects ONE BY ONE VPG prompts for a new ID for each material The following prompt will be repeated for each material in the database gt ENTER MID number FOR MAT name OR E TO EXIT If the user enters nothing VPG defaults to the original values 4 Ifthe user enters SELECT ONE VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEM C OR MATERIAL NAME M OF A MATERIAL e After the user selects the material VPG prompts for a new ID gt MATERIAL name IS SELECTED gt ENTER MID number FOR MATERIAL name 6 168 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 12 ELEMENT PROPERTY The functions in the ELEMENT PROPERTY menu are designed to define and modify the element properties physical in the database When using these commands parts with property definition are displayed according to their property colors Parts without property definition are shown in white The functions in the ELEMENT PROPERTY menu are organized as follows ELEMEHT PROPERTY AS SIGH FROFERTY CHANGE COLON cory CRENTE DELETE DEFIHE PROPERTY ERASE UMREF PROPERTY LIST DH DFF PROPERTY PART COLOR REHUHEER UIEN EXIT By toggling the solver code settings in the ANALYSIS PROGRAM command in the SETUP window the user can assign and create properties that are solver code specific However the element property menu and its functions will change slightly between NASTRAN and LS DYNA analysis For example NASTRAN refers to element properties where LS
14. ALE CUMP HENMT GEROD CUHTHUL CARDS DAMPING CARDS DAT RHA SE EF LHE DEFDHHRHLE TB RICIB EQUATION OF STATE ROURDCLASS INTERFACE CARDS SERTHELT TERHIMATIOH Note The DYNA MISCELLANEOUS option does not appear in the PRE PROCESSING MENU when the analysis software is NASTRAN Note All of these options share this standard submenu except CONTROL CARDS Only the CREATE command differs with respect to each function and will be explained in the following pages CREATE e Defines a new card DELETE e Deletes a selected card or cards from those displayed in a pop up window LIST e Lists the cards in the option s database via pop up window MODIFY e Similar to the CREATE command this command lists the defined cards in a pop up window and allows the user to select and modify them EXIT 6 14 1 AIRBAGS Description This function provides various cards for defining the thermodynamic behavior of gas flow into an airbag as well as a reference configuration for the fully inflated bag 6 181 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 Usage 6 14 2 ALE Description This function sets the default control When CREATE is selected VPG prompts SELECT OPTION AIRBAG TYPES Ab Label iC WDE LD MYBRID CHEMKIM MWYBRID JETTIHG LINEAR FLUTO LOAB CURUE SIMPLE ATRAAG SIMPLE PRESS U0L WS HG HEF SHE MAHC MEFSKE JET W H WELTI JET WaRG HEFSHE FOF EME HEFSHE JET POP WE A HILTI JET FOP MAHC HEFSZSHE JET CH WE A HIL
15. The Graphic User Interface GUI is designed for easy access to all the functions for post processing DYNA and Nastran results This GUI is unified for both Windows and UNIX LINUX platforms The user activates the functions via mouse click 9 3 MENU BAR The menu bar contains the FILE EDIT TOOL and OPTION menus All the menus are designed in a logical and efficient way to minimize number of mouse clicks and operations The FILE menu contains functions that control the input and output of data files the EDIT menu contains functions that allow the user to alter the model graph and the VIEW menu contains functions that alter the display Each of these menus branches into various submenus and functions File Edit Tool Option Help FILE MANAGER Imports and exports data from eta Post see Section 9 7 EDIT Organizes the functions for model operation TOOLS eta Post s tool kit OPTION Provide options in the graphics display window HELP Displays the program information and phone number for technical support The menus and functions will be described in the related sections 9 4 ICON BAR The icon bar is designed to give the user easy access to the most commonly used functions in eta Post Some of the functions represented in the icon bar are also located in the different menus The user may simply click these icons to activate the functions instead of navigating through the menus 9 8 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING
16. This manual is designed to reduce the amount of reading material on the page and maintain text clarity Several fonts and symbols are implemented throughout the manual An example is given at the bottom of the page 2 13 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features FIXED FONT This font indicates text found within VPG e g menu ALL CAPS BOLD Names subsections commands and options within commands etc Proportional Font This font indicates explanatory text e g command descriptions notes and section titles ALL CAPITALS This font indicates a function menu name card command etc found in explanatory text gt The greater than symbol directs the user to read the text displayed in VPG s DIALOGUE WINDOW The question mark directs the user to select an option that is listed in VPG s MENU WINDOW e The bullet signals a description of the previous command or situation CREATE 4 PLATE ELEMENT This section covers the options for the PLATE ELEMENT subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS 1 VPG prompts PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT NODE POINT To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three An element will be created after three or four nodes points are selected EXIT or ABORT will exit this function 2 13 VPG OPEN FILE WINDOW The VPG OPEN FILE WINDOW allows users to access files and directories The DIRECTORIES and FILES windows
17. defined MINIMUM and is less than the user defined MAXIMUM then VPG echoes the message ALL ELEMENTS PASS CHECK e Ifthe length of the of the edges of the elements is less than the user defined MINIMUM or is greater than the user defined MAXIMUM then VPG echoes one of the following messages ELEMENT xxxx FAILED CHECK or gt XXXX ELEMENTS FAILED CHECK 2 If failed elements exist then VPG prompts the user to place them into a part INCLUDE FAILED ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N e YES The PART DEFINITION window pops up The failed elements are removed from the original parts and added to the NEW PART he new part is ON and CURRENT NO SELECT ELEMENT FOR ELEMENT SIZE e The user can cursor check individual elements for their size e DONE or EXIT returns the user to the MODEL CHECKER menu 6 96 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Highlighted elements failed the element size check 6 5 11 CHECK SKEW Description This function allows the user to check any skew in the plate or solid elements Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER SKEW CRITERIA DEGREE e A valid response is any real number greater than zero e If the skew of the elements is less than the user defined criteria then VPG echoes the message gt ALL ELEMENTS PASS CHECK The user returns to the MODEL CHECKER menu e If the skew of some elements is greater than the user defined criteria then VPG echoes one of the following messages gt
18. 2 Once the user selects the desired lines the prompt will read gt SELECT 3 LINES AT TOP e Select the second set of three lines in the same order as the first set of three lines 3 VPG prompts 6 69 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt ENTER MESH TYPE 1 OR 2 1 TRIA AT CURHER 2 TRIA amp LUNG EDGE 3 1 ENTER NO OF ELEMENTS N1 X N2 X N3 2 gt ENTER NO OF ELEMENTS ON ALONG THE FACE EDGE ENTER NO OF ELEMENTS BETWEEN THE FACES 4 Once N1 N2 and N3 have been entered the prompt will read gt ACCEPT MESH YES NO REMESH e YES will accept mesh and prompt for more lines e NO will not accept mesh and prompt for more lines e REMESH will not accept mesh and prompt for new N1 N2 N3 SOLID MESH 8 LINE SOLID MESH Description This function is intended for automatic 8 node solid element generation in a volume The volume is defined by a top and bottom surface enclosed by 4 lines Each line must be defined beforehand line direction is not important The lines defining the area do not have to intersect an open area is possible A row of N2 elements will be generated from the starting end of line 1 along line 4 on the bottom surface The pattern will be repeated N1 times along line 1 on the bottom surface The element pattern on the bottom surface will be repeated N3 times toward the top surface The node sequence starts at the beginning of line 1 and follows the direction of line 1 using the right hand rule
19. 6 25 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 2 15 SURF NORMAL ON OFF toggle Description This function controls the on and off display of normal vectors on a surface The normal vector below is shown at the center of the surface 6 2 16 SPLIT Description This function allows the user to split selected surfaces in several different ways All the options for splitting surfaces are addressed below Usage 1 VPG prompts to select surface 2 Upon selection of the surface VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION TO SPLIT DEFAULT IS SECTION LINE e User selects a displayed section line to split a surface LINEAR SEGMENTS gt SELECT NEXT POINT FOR LINEAR SEGMENT e The user may pick up to 500 locations on the surface to complete a piecewise linear curve RESPACE UV LINES gt ENTER THE NUMBERS OF UV LINES N1 N2 N1 and N2 cannot be greater than 199 e The user may choose a desired section line once the user selects the section lines for N1 and N2 SPLINE CURVE gt SELECT NEXT POINT FOR SPLINE CURVE e The user may pick up to 500 locations on the surface in order to complete a spline curve SURFACE INTERSECTION gt SELECT THE SECOND SURFACE 6 26 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e Once the user selects the second surface the first surface splits at the intersection of the two surfaces The user may split the second surface at the same intersection TWO POINTS ON BOUNDARY gt SELECT FIRST POINT ON BOUNDARY gt SELECT SEC
20. CURSOR AT ELEMENT CURSOR AT LINE CURSOR AT SURFACE CURRENT PART UNDO EXIT 2 After selecting the desired part VPG prompts gt PART XXXXX IS SELECTED gt XXXX ELEMENTS FROM XXX PARTS CONNECTED TO XXXX gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME TO TURN ON connected part list gt 10 13 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY ALL CONNECTED PARTS SELECT BY ELEMENT UNDO LAST EXIT The connecting elements are highlighted 3 Once the part is selected VPG prompts gt PART XXXX IS TURNED ON gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME TO TURN ON This step is repeated until the user selects exit 10 3 5 CONNECTING NODES Description This function is used to determine node connectivity from one part in the model to another Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT PART FOR CONNECTING ELEMENTS gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR A PART NAME OF A PART lt part list gt CURSOR AT ELEMENT CURSOR AT LINE CURSOR AT SURFACE CURRENT PART UNDO EXIT 2 After selecting the desired part VPG prompts gt PART XXXXX IS SELECTED XXXX ELEMENTS FROM XXX PARTS CONNECTED TO XXXX gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME TO TURN ON connected part list ALL CONNECTED PARTS SELECT BY ELEMENT UNDO LAST EXIT The connecting nodes are highlighted V 3 Once the part is selected VPG prompts gt PART XXXX IS TURNED ON gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME TO TURN ON This step is repeated until the user selects exit 10 3 6 CHANGE PART COLORS Description This function allows the
21. Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 4 VPG displays the following pop up window with suspension stiffness data and VPG prompts gt MODIFY BUSHING STIFFNESS DATA gt SELECT AN ITEM TO EDIT e When the user has finished altering the data and has selected OK VPG prompts ACCEPT STIFFNESS DATA Y N e YES forwards the user to the next suspension table step 5 e NOreturns the user to the SUSPENSION BUSHING STIFFNESS table Note If the user selects cancel at any time during the suspension creation process the process is ended and the suspension is not defined 5 VPG displays the following pop up window with spring damper rebound initial offset data and VPG prompts MODIFY INITIAL OFFSET SELECT AN ITEM TO EDIT 7 12 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES e When the user has finished altering the data and has selected OK VPG prompts gt ACCEPT INITIAL OFFSET Y N e YES forwards the user to the next suspension table step 6 e NO returns the user to the BUSHING STIFFNESS table WHL METAL Cee ITEMS DATA SPRANG DIRECTION AMAL NITE OFFSET OF SPRING lfe uusbM E Rud NITAL CIFFSET OF JORIMCE fe auoneee oua PTAL OFFSET OF RESOUN u ununest raun nk l reviaus Rancel 6 VPG displays the following pop up window with damping coefficient data and VPG prompts MODIFY DAMPING COEFFICIENT DATA SELECT AN ITEM TO EDIT e When the user has finished altering the da
22. DISCRETE CARD for user input Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT This step is repeated once When the second node point is defined VPG displays the SPRING DAMPER element CREATE SEATBELT LS DYNA Description This function defines a seatbelt element between two nodes points Other seatbelt functions such as ACCELEROMETER RETRACTOR SENSOR etc are located in the DYNA MISCELLANEOUS menu 6 51 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT This step is repeated once e When the second node point is defined VPG displays the SEATBELT element 2 Once the seatbelt elements have been created it is recommended that the user enter the DYNA MISC menu in the PRE PROCESSOR menu and select SEATBELT to define the accelerometer pretensioner retractor sensor and slipring CREATE JOINT LS DYNA Description This function allows the user to create joints for DYNA analysis All types of joints are supported The procedure to create joints has been simplified to create the coincident nodes for the second rigid body The program first prompts for the Relative Penalty Stiffness default 1 0 The program next prompts the user to select the first part rigid body with material type 20 for the joint If no material is defined for the selected part the program prompts a warning message NO MATERIAL ASSIGNED TO SELECTED PART The program then prompts the use
23. DRIBER DEF ALT PASSENGER DEFAULT DRISER CUHTR L LEHGTE PASE REE CONTA LEME TH DALPEAC PROF ELE PASSEMIER PROFILE ABOET The user can choose a seatbelt type in this menu 4 VPG prompts gt PICK A NODE ON OUTBOARD UPPER ANCHOR 5 VPG prompts gt PICK A NODE ON INBOARD LOWER ANCHOR 6 VPG prompts gt PICK A NODE ON OUTBOARD LOWER ANCHOR 7 VPG prompts gt PICK A NODE ON OUTBOARD LAP BELT ANCHOR 8 VPG prompts gt DEFINE A VECTOR TO MOVE SEATBELTS TRANSFORM ABORT MOVE BOTH SEATRELTS MOVE UPPER SEATBELT HOVE LOWER SEATBELT REVERSE OPERATION HEY IH VECTOR ON OFF PART PREVIOUS HEHU EXIT Use KEY IN VECTOR to define a vector then move the upper or lower seatbelt to the right place 7 69 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES oe fo me LIE IL et MIO pire rasa 1 a TI adina eu te al L oon B I S gu m nu ep ee E E AT 94 e ri ES p Ed oa LL TEE RN a E L u gp 9 VPG prompts gt PICK A SEATBELT ELEMENT TO START PULL PUSH Cp Lu m O a gt T pu ee ee p L re E LIP ERE LR T T T ot Ae am a im Fe 4 a s z n Er E an NH un rtl s d i e jf m AE ESSA ici f F A zimmer eee NR cll Ec ec LE NU UN n LEE i TT Hen io ee es setitik T ae i CEEI bh na bs hiiri aa m on E 7 70 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 DELETE MODEL Description This option allows the user to dele
24. Description The user can plot the temperature output data from the tprint file The following types are available HEAT GENERATION TOTAL HEAT GENERATION CHANGE INTERNAL ENERGY INTERNAL ENERGY NOTE The available data type depends on the data file We can select a file for the Select File dialog box and click Open to load the desired database to the Post Processor There are many different kinds of result files from LS DYNA analysis that can be read in and the numbers of files which are depend on the type of analysis and the setting in preprocessor are not the same every time Moreover the user can load several files in the current database though repeating the operation above The Graph control windows will pop up as Figure 9 66 window in the Figure14 3 The number of List Boxes is not the same every time and depends on the result file type The detailed description about those functions is given in the following section 12 2 RESULT FILE LIST BOX Description The Result File list box displays the name of result files which have been loaded in the current database The user can select the desired name listing in the result file list box and from which to retrieve the intend data 9 12 3 TYPE LIST BOX Description The items list the Type list box depends upon the result file selected on the Result file list box and only the actual 9 63 Graph Result File ES Type VWall 1 Component Kinetic En
25. Hibil IHTEHFACE TES i H pF H MERA PORGE Goes Hu ERIT 2 The user then selects the type of ASCII card to define VPG displays the definition card to be edited The time interval once entered will be used as the default value for future cards defined To edit the time interval for subsequently defined cards the user must click once on the card to turn it on and again to have it displayed 6 185 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e A YES in the right column of the DATABASE ASCII indicates that this type of card has been defined e ANO in the right column indicates that this type of card has not been defined e Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 8 4 for further description of the DATABASE ASCII definition cards DATABASE BINARY Description The definition cards in the BINARY subsection specify the BINARY database output files Usage 1 When DEFINE is selected VPG displays the DATABASE BINARY CARD and prompts gt SELECT CARD TO DEFINE 2 The user then selects the type of BINARY card to define VPG displays the definition card to be edited The time interval once entered will be used as the default value for future cards defined To edit the time interval for subsequently defined cards the user must click once on the card to turn it on and again to have it displayed A YES in the right column of the DATABASE BINARY CARD indicates that this type of card has been defined e A NO inthe right column
26. Light Property Ambient B Diffuse Specular i Reset Light Material Property Aluminium Material Diffuse Specular IEEE i NN Shininess Reset Material Exit Figure 9 16 Light Property Control Option Window Diffuse clor Figure 9 17 Light Adjustment Control Window eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING The user may click and drag the marker in the color map window to change the color of the selected material The program updates the model display with the new material color in the graphic display window It also shows the new material color in the color box on the low left side of the control window The user can compare the new material color with the original color on the right The user may also click and drag the slider in the vertical bar to adjust the brightness of the selected material The RBG values of the material color are shown in the column on the right side of the control window The user may change these values to change the material color The user may choose any of the four scales to show the RGB values Byte RGB Hex or HSV When the desirable color is obtained click OK to accept the color and exit the control window Otherwise click CANCEL to reject the color and exit the control window SHININESS The user may click and drag the slider to adjust the shininess of the selected material e RESET MATERIAL Resets the material color to the default s
27. List of all element sets CURSOR AT ELEMENT 6 122 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR ALL ELEMENT SETS UNDO EXIT e VPG displays all element sets and returns the user to the ELEMENT SET submenu Note Because more than one ID number may be assigned to each element viewing all of the ID numbers at once may be confusing The user may clarify the screen by displaying one specific element set at a time 6 7 22 ANNOTATE PART Description This function allows the user to add notes to a selected set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM PART SET LIST List of all sets CURSOR AT ELEMENT EXIT 2 After selecting a set VPG prompts gt SETXIS SELECTED gt ENTER CARD DESCRIPTION 70 CHAR MAX e Once the note is entered the user is returned to step 1 6 7 23 CREATE PART Description This function allows the user to generate part sets with unique element and node ID numbers The parts may be included in multiple sets Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW PART SET NUMBER X OR E TO EXIT e Any integer greater than zero 0 is valid 2 VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART list of all parts e The user may press the left mouse button or type C to select the element nearest to the cursor 6 123 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 3 VPG prompts gt PART XXXX IS SELECTED gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART list of all parts 4 When the user finishes and select
28. Programs 5 16 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 5 File Manager 5 7 10 WRITE RADIOSS FILE This function allows the user to output a RADIOSS rad data file directly from the VPG database When writing a RADIOSS input file VPG creates default materials and element properties for some elements For specific translation properties see the RADIOSS conversion tables Appendix D H 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER FILE NAME OR STOP TO EXIT e Enter a file name up to 24 characters 2 If the file name already exists the program will prompt the following message gt FILENAME ALREADY EXISTS O K TO OVERWRITE Y N e YES will overwrite the existing file e N will prompt for a file name 3 VPG prompts SELECT RADIOSS VERSION 1 VERSION 22 2 VERSION 2 3 4 VPG prompts gt ENTER TITLE e he user enters an alphanumeric title containing a maximum of 48 characters e VPG returns the user to the FILE MANAGER menu 5 VPG prompts gt OUTPUT ONLY ACTIVE PARTS Y N e YES outputs only the elements displayed on the screen e NO outputs all of the existing elements in the database e After entering the appropriate selection the user returns to the FILE MANAGER menu Note If the properties materials are not assigned to the parts in the database VPG prompts the user to define the properties materials by default by global default or by part Supported properties are listed in Appendix A VPG Capabilities for F E A Programs 5 8 PRI
29. The MDB and dummies will be positioned in the desired locations Proper contacts and velocities will also be defined in the model eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES Figure 2 An Example of a Generated Dynamic Side Impact Model 7 4 5 3 FMVSS208 RIGID WALL 0 30 DEG Cp Lu m O a gt Description This function allows users to create rigid walls to simulate the FMVSS208 0 Degree or 30 Degree Frontal Impact Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER RIGID WALL CRASH INFORMATION RIGID WALL DATA 2 VPG prompts gt PICK VEHICLE FRONT BUMPER TO LOCATE RIGID WALL 7 38 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES CURSOR AT ELEMEHT HEY IH X V 2 HOFF PART HEEP FART HO LAST 3 Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the bumper part as the target position The Frontal rigid wall and rigid road surface will be positioned in the desired locations Proper contacts and velocities will also be defined in the model Barrier and Ground Planes positioned with vehicle Figure 3 An Example of a Generated FMVSS208 Frontal Impact Model 7 4 5 4 FMVSS 216 ROOF CRUSH Description This function allows users to create and position a rigid plate used to simulate the FMVSS216 roof crush test Usage 1 VPG prompts ENTER ROOF CRASH INFORMATION ROOF CRUSH DATA ITEMS pa TA ROOF BOUNDARY VELOCITY mmis zamere ROOF VERTICAL ANGLE degl FR
30. VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE FILE NAME gt ENTER DATABASE FILE NAME The files with the suffix xml will be listed in the window The user would select the name of a previously saved file or cancel to exit 2 If the file does not exist the prompt reads gt CANNOT OPEN THE INPUT FILE 3 VPG reads in the file and returns the user to the AUTO ASSEMBLY menu 6 19 2 WRITE TO FILE Description The function allows the user to output connection information to a file The functions in this menu are organized as follows 6 215 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR The user selects one kind of connection Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE FILE NAME gt ENTER DATABASE FILE NAME Enter a file name up to 24 characters 2 If the file name is a new one VPG will create it VPG writes the chosen connection information to the file and returns the user to the WRITE CONNECTION menu 3 If the file name is old VPG prompts gt WARNING FILE ALREADY EXISTS OVERWRITE Y N gt YES Overwrite the file with new data gt NO Exit and do nothing 6 19 3 CREATE CONNECTION Description This function allows the user to create connections of five types The details of this function refer to section 6 16 3 6 19 4 DELETE CONNECTION Description This function allows the user to delete connections of the five types Choose one ype of them and select a connection Usage DONE The selecte
31. XX XX TOP XX XX SIDE XX XX REAR XX XX 4 DONE or EXIT returns the user to the UTILITY menu 10 4 2 COORDINATE SYSTEM Description The functions in this menu create and modify local coordinate systems Note The COORDINATE SYSTEM command requires several submenus To help guide the user each submenu is described in the following subsections Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER COMMAND 10 22 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY LIAL SYSTEM CREATE DELETE ERASE UHREF LOCAL MODIFY CURRENT DISPLAY BH FF REHUHBER TRAHSF RH EXIT 10 4 2 Coordinate System Menu 2 After the user enters the appropriate system VPG lists the options specific to that system CREATE Description This function creates local coordinate systems The CS command is used in conjunction with the ASSIGN COORDINATE SYSTEM TO NODE command Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT LOCAL SYSTEM TYPE NODES SYSTEM VECTOR 2 VPG prompts the user to create a local system A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 15 3 After the user enters one of the options above the local coordinate system appears on screen with its C S number DELETE Description This function deletes local coordinate system sets from the database Usage 1 VPG displays the DEFINE COORDINATE CARD LIST and prompts SELECT CARD TO DELETE 2 EXIT deletes the selected coordinate system from the database
32. ad TY ad a e The user may modify any of the model checking parameters in the table and selects OK A MESH CHECK REPORT window is displayed summarizing the model mesh quality by parts d F am fom om am fum jum am fim fom um jum om aw fum jum um form fom az ow fom am jum foo am fum jum m forme fom am jum om um jum om ape gone Jom i TPE tilii DD fo orme fom orm for Oms Co om fome ow fom ore fos om fom 6 107 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 6 6 SET MENU LS DYNA PRE PROCESSOR The functions in the SET MENU create sets that facilitate the organization of data specification and output control data The following options are available in the SET MENU when the analysis code is set to LS DYNA SET MEMU Hit RM DISCRETE MODE PRRT SIECHEHT SHELL SOLID THICK SHELL Note When the analysis code is set to NASTRAN see section 6 7 Each option contains a similar submenu with the following options for manipulating the output control of their respective set groups ANNOTATE CREATE CURRENT DELETE REMOVE EMPTY SETS REMOVE UNREF SETS INCLUDE ELEMENTS NODES PARTS LIST REMOVE ELEMENTS NODES PARTS RENUMBER SET REVIEW LIST SHOW SET SET ON OFF PART VIEW EXIT A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 6 6 1 ANNOTATE Description This function allows the use
33. e The user may enter up to 3 points globally to define a point or node NODE POINT REJECT LAST eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e DONE completes the creation of the line and starts the generation of a new line e EXIT will terminate this function 6 1 11 IDENTIFY Description This function allows the user to identify any node or point and its corresponding global location in X Y Z coordinates Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS ALL NODES KEY IN NODE NUMBER NODE POINT EXIT lf ALL NODES is selected the numbers of the displayed nodes will appear on screen at their node locations the first clear button in the DISPLAY PARAMETER OPTIONS WINDOW will remove the numbers lf NODE is selected the number of the node nearest the cursor location will appear on screen The following message will echo on the command line gt NODE xxxx X x xxx Y y yyy Zz z zzz If POINT is selected the number of the point nearest the cursor location will appear on screen The following message will echo on the command line gt POINT xxxx X x xxx Y y yyy Zz z zzz e EXIT will send the user to the LINE menu 6 1 12 MIRROR Description This function allows the user to reflect a copy of desired lines across a local or 6 10 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR global coordinate plane Usage 1 VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN e VPG is now asking for a coordinate system to mi
34. for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS POINTS Description This function defines constrained points Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS RIGID BODIES Description This function merges two rigid bodies One rigid body the slave rigid body is merged to the other one called the master rigid body Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 4 46 for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS RIGID BODY STOPPERS Description This function defines constrained rigid body stoppers Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the 6 136 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR LS DYNA User s Manual for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS RIVET Description This function defines constrained rivets Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS SHELL TO SOLID Description This function defines a tie between a shell edge and solid elements Nodal rigid bodies can perform the same function and may also be used Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 4 53 for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS TIE BREAK Description This function defin
35. gives the message that the location has already been assigned and returns the user to the beginning of this step gt RENUMBER SUMMARY IS WRITTEN ON FILE ntb Zero 0 will assign MAX NODE NO 1 ENTER STARTING NODE NUMBER 1 TO EXIT Once a number has been entered the prompt will read ENTER NODE NUMBER INC BETWEEN PARTS 0 DEFAULT TO 1000 1 NO GAP BETWEEN PARTS Any integer may be entered RENUMBER SUMMARY IS WRITTEN ON FILE ntb 5 VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART e After parts are selected VPG prompts gt ENTER STARTING NODE NUMBER FOR CHOSEN PART e Any integer may be entered 6 4 16 SCALE Description This section applies a scale factor to any or all X Y and Z components for some or all nodes in a global or local direction The scale factor may be positive or negative change the sign on any or all of the X Y Z components The parts will be magnified if the scale factor is greater than 1 and reduced if the scale factor is less than 1 The user may reflect and or enlarge or reduce a part without retaining a copy of the original grids elements Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES e Once the user selects the desired nodes and clicks DONE VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN e VPG prompts the user to create a local coordinate system A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate S
36. 0 013583 Frame Number 1 a FramesiSecond zy Figure 9 64 Vector Operation control window 9 11 11 SELECT COMPONENT Description There are four types of component DISPLACEMENT VELOCITY ACCELERATION STRESS and STRAIN in the function When select DISPLACEMENT VELOCITY or ACCELERATION the CURRENT LAYER is disabled and the CURREN COMPONENT is enabled used The user can select any of them or any combination of them When select STRESS or STRAIN the CURRENT LAYER is enabled and the CURRENT COMPONENT is disabled There are MIDDL TOP and BOTTOM available in the CURRENT LAYER 9 11 12 BY ELEMENT SIZE AND SCALE FACTOR Description This function is used to alter the size of the vector BY ELEMENT SIZE means the vector size is based on the element size SCALE FACTOR allows the user to enter a percentage of the maximum magnitude contained t 9 54 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING he model Note When BY ELEMENT SIZE is toggled on the SCAL FACTOR is disabled Note Reset Contour Range is in the VECTOR The value more than the maximum the vector is displayed in red and the value less than the minimum the vector is displayed in blue 9 12 GRAPH gt The GRAPH function is a more independent comparatively module than other functions of eta Post Processor listed above This function enables the user to visualize time history result from LS DYNA analysis with graph format Moreover the GRAPH function offers a wide range o
37. 2 Whena SPC set has been selected for deletion VPG prompts gt ONE SPC SET IS SELECTED e EXIT deletes the SPC set and the user exits the function DELETE 6 153 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR SPC INCLUDE NODES IN SET Description This function adds additional nodes into the selected boundary SPC set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK A BOUNDARY SPC SET TO ADD NODES 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES e DONE will add nodes into the SPC set and the user exits the function INCLUDE NODES IN SET e ABORT will exit the function INCLUDE NODES IN SET without adding any of the selected grids SPC LIST SET Description This function lists the defined sets in a pop up window Usage 1 VPG prompts gt LIST SET ONLY EXIT TO CONTINUE SPC MODIFY Description This function allows the user to simultaneously delete and recreate any boundary SPC set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK SPC TO MODIFY 2 After the user selects a boundary SPC set the BOUNDARY SPC DEFINITION window pops up and the user may modify parameters in the window SPC REMOVE NODES IN SET Description This function deletes nodes from the selected boundary SPC set Usage 6 154 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 1 VPG prompts gt PICK A BOUNDARY SPC SET TO REMOVE NODES 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES e DONE will release nodes from the SPC set and the user exits the function REMOVE NODES IN SET e ABORT will exit the
38. 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 2 SURFACE Commands in this menu are used to create and modify CAD surface data in VPG VPG imports surface data and line data and converts it into VPG format The CAD Import function in the FILE Menu is used to import externally created CAD data SURFACE OPTIONS B NHDARY LIME cory CREATE S LIMES DELETE 2 LIME SURFACE 2 LIKE SURFACE LIME SURFACE HIRRIUE REMDUE HOLES REVERSE HIRAI RESPACE B U LIME SURFACE IHTERSEET U LINE OM DFF SCALE SURF HORMAL OH OFF SPLIT SECTION REVOLUTION z Hau SHEEP SURFACE TRAHSFDRM TRIM SURFACE MHTRIM SURFACE SURFACE SEPARATION SECTION CUT VIEW EXIT A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections The following are working definitions used throughout this section of VPG e Domain The trimmed surface of the common region of the interior of the outer boundary and the exterior of the inner boundaries as well as the boundary curves e Outer Boundary One boundary that is situated within the domain the surface that is to be trimmed In particular it describes the boundary curve of the domain e inner Boundary Any number of inner boundaries including zero The set of inner boundaries satisfies two criteria 6 19 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR a The curves as well as their interiors are mutually disjointed b Each curve lies in the interior of the outer boundary 6 2 1 BOUNDARY LINE Description
39. 7 14 13 shown The user may enter the appropriate coefficient parameters in the DATA CONTROL windows which displays the default values for Data CONTROL Has Rippia o IEH kin terion i 5p Figure 9 76 DATA CONTROL window for Butterworth Filter 9 73 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 12 6 26 PASSBAND FREQUENCY Description The maximum passband frequency is determined through the equation Passbanduser Total Number of Points on Graph Time Duration The default value is 10 of the passband frequency 9 12 6 27 STOPBAND FREQUENCY Description Stopband frequency is formulated Stopband Passbandyser Passbanmax Passbandyser The default value depends on the Passbandyser 9 12 6 28 MAXIMUM PASSBAND RIPPLE MAX PASSBRIPP Description Passband ripple value is between 0 0 and 1 0 dB 9 12 6 29 MINIMUM STOPBAND ATTENUATION MIN ATT 1 0 DB Description Stopband attenuation must be greater than 1 0 dB The stopband frequency and maximum passband ripple should not be too close to either the given low or high end limits Attenuation factors commonly range between 10 and 50 It is recommended that the user choose a passhand frequency that is approximately 5 to 2096 of the number Too small a number will cause a computational error and too large a number will cause the program to stall After the user enters the appropriate parameters clicks the OK and accept the input parameters and exit the DATA CONTROL window P
40. 7 41 eta VPG 3 0 Cp Lu m O a gt Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 4 5 6 FMVSS301 70 REAR IMPACT Description This function will generate a Moving Deformable Barrier and a rigid road surface to simulate FMVSS301 70 rear impact Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER REAR MDB INFORMATION T0 ODB REAR IMPACT DATA ITEMS r DATA OORSTRUCTURE CLEARANCE mmi e ONE MDB VELOCITY mmis 2 295 086 00k VEHICLE WIDTH imen KOC Z OF VEHICLE GROUND mm 2 00000 One Cancel On Input values and press OK 2 VPG prompts gt PICK ATARGET CENTER TO LOCATE REAR MDB CONTROL KEYS ABORT CURSOR RT ELEMENT KEY IN X Y Z H OFF PART KEEP PART UHE LAST 3 Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the rear bumper part as target position The MDB and a rigid road surface will be positioned in the desired locations Proper contacts and velocities will also be defined in the model 7 42 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES ETAPE Figure 6 An Example of a Generated FMVSS301 70 Rear MDB Model 7 4 6 ECE REGULATIONS 7 4 6 1 ECE 94 40 OFFSET FRONTAL IMPACT Description This function will create 40 ODB and a rigid road surface to simulate an ECE 94 Frontal Impact Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER ECE 40 ODB CRASH INFORMATION ECE 40 O08 CRASH DATA ITEMS 1 DATA EHUCLEICDS CLEARANCE imm n pani t
41. 9 POST PROCESSING following types are available X FORCE MOMENT X FORCE MOMENT X FORCE MOMENT RESULTANT FORCE MOMENT ELEMENT DATA ELOUT Description The user can plot element force data from the elout file CONTACT ELEMENT RESULTANTS GCEOUT Description The user can plot contact element resultant data from the gceout file The following types are available XFORCE YFORCE ZFORCE FORCE MAGITUDE X MOMENT Y MOMENT Z MOMENT MOMENT MAGNITUDE GLOBAL DATA GLSTAT Description The user can plot the global time history data from the glstat file The following types are available TIME STEP TOTAL ENERGY TOTAL INITIAL ENERGY ENERGY RATIO KINETIC ENERGY ERODED KINETIC ENERGY INTERNAL ENERGY ERODED INTERNAL ENERGY SPRING amp DAMPER EMERGY HOURGLASS ENERGY SYSTEM DAMPING ENERGY SLIDING INTERFACE ENERGY EXTERNAL WORK 9 58 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING TIME PER ZONE CYCLE NUMBER OF SHELL ELEMENT STEP SIZE GLOBAL X VELOCITY GLOBAL Y VELOCITY GLOBAL Z VELOCITY JOINT FORCE FILE JNTFORC Description The user can plot the joint force data from the jntforc file The following types are available X FORCE Y FORCE Z FORCE X MOMENT Y MOMENT Z MOMENT RESULTANT FORCE RESULATANT MOMENT MATERIAL ENERGIES MATSUM Description The user can plot the material energy time history data from the matsum file The following types are available
42. ALL D OF Y Symmein ud 9e Ant Symmetry _ Brmmelm _ 2 Ant Symmetmy aJ 2 Sigmmenm i HE Ame dymmetmy Select Arv Combination From Fot wei Transiatinn Xe Rotator Transtation _ Aotaton j 2 Transtation j Antaten Ce Cancel The options in the top and bottom of the SPC DEGREE OF FREEDOM box represent alternate methods for defining the degree of freedom Only the top or the bottom can be selected not both X Y SYMMETRY Y Z SYMMETRY X Z SYMMETRY X Y ANTI SYMMETRY Y Z ANTI SYMMETRY X Z ANTI SYMMETRY X TRANSLATION Y TRANSLATION Z TRANSLATION X ROTATION Y ROTATION Z ROTATION 6 132 Assigns symmetric boundary conditions to the XY plane Assigns symmetric boundary conditions to the YZ plane Assigns symmetric boundary conditions to the XZ plane Assigns asymmetric boundary conditions to the XY plane e Assigns asymmetric boundary conditions to the YZ plane Assigns asymmetric boundary conditions to the XZ plane e X translation will be constrained Y translation will be constrained e Z translation will be constrained e X rotation will be constrained Y rotation will be constrained e Z rotation will be constrained eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR BOUNDARY CARDS SYMMETRY FAILURE Description This function defines a symmetry plane with a failure criterion This option applies to continuum domains modeled with solid elements Refer to the L
43. ATTRIBUTE TABLE ON OFF Description This function available only in LS DYNA mode allows the user to add additional properties to elements that VPG does not prompt for when the elements are created thickness additional nodes etc The ATTRIBUTE TABLE supports BEAM DISCRETE MASS SEATBELT SHELL TSHELL and solid elements It does not support JOINT NODAL RIGID BODY PLOTEL and SPOTWELD elements 6 74 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 4 NODE OPTIONS The functions in the NODE OPTIONS menu relate to the two types of nodes that are defined in the VPG program The first type is the referenced node connected to elements The second type the unreferenced node not connected to any element is represented with an asterisk Useful applications in this section include moving nodes node to node or node to point checking for and merging common or coincident nodes and transforming or rotating nodes KODE OPTIONS RLIGH HODES MODE BETWEEN PT MDDE EHEEH DUFLIDLATE 10 DHIHEE ID COCHEIBEHT CHEEK COPY CREATE DELETE UMREF HODES DISTAHCE IDEHTIFV HODE POTHT LABEL HOWE HOE TO PT H DE PART CORMECT ION PROJECT REMUMBER HODES SCALE TRRHSEDRH UM FF UMREF HODES WIEW EXIT A detailed description of each function is given in the following section 6 4 1 ALIGN NODES Description This function allows users to align the selected nodes along the selected lines Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ALINE T
44. After determining the surface type of curve and points this function connects the points leaving the curve open with the first and last point selected as the starting and ending points of the curve TRIM SURFACE POINT Description POINT is the default option in the trim surface menu Users may pick locations on the surface defining piecewise linear segments for trim operations TRIM SURFACE SPLINE CURVE Description This function cuts spline curves on a selected surface The user defines the location of the spline via mouse pick Usage 1 VPQG prompts SELECT NEXT POINT FOR SPLINE CURVE 6 33 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Once the user has selected the points for the curve then enters DONE CLOSED or enters OPEN CURVE to complete the spline e DONE CLOSED defines a closed spline curve passing through all the points selected e OPEN CURVE defines a spline curve passing through all the points selected with the first and last point selected as the starting and ending points of the curve The user then selects exit twice 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT A CLOSED CURVE AS OUTER BOUNDARY e ABORT DONE EXIT SURFACE BOUNDARY e Selects the outer closed surface boundary CURVE ON SURFACE e The user may select an existing curve on the surface open or closed as the outer boundary of the trim operation REJECT LAST CURVE 3 VPG prompts gt SELECT CLOSED CURVE AS INNER BOUNDARY e The surface between t
45. BOUMDARY CDHDITIDHS C HSTRRINT PTE RT A ELEMENT PROPERTY CONTACT IHTERFRCE DENA MISC MASS HEHU ASSEMBLY EXIT The Pre Processor submenus are described in their own individual sections that follow Note DYNA MISC only appears when the analysis code is set to LS DYNA SUPERELEMENT only appears when the analysis code is set to NASTRAN 6 1 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 1 LINE The functions of the LINE MENU are intended to create a new set of line data or to modify existing line data VPG currently has a limitation of 150 000 lines or 200 000 points per database The following options are available in the LINE MENU LINE ed ADD POTHTS GEMERATE ARCS ARE TAHGEHT 7 LIHES 3 PUIHT RARE puev CUMBIME LIMES SPLIHE ClRUE DELETE EXTEHD LIHE GEMERATE LINES IDENTIFY MIRROR OFFSET PROJECT RESPACE LIME REBERSE DIRECTION SCALE FACTOR SECTION LIHE SHOW SPLIT TREKS FORM UIEU ERIT Each option is selectable by using the left mouse button to select the menu item or by typing the first two letters of each command in the prompt in the VPG Message Window A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 6 1 1 ADD POINTS Description This function allows the user to add points to an existing line either randomly or between two selected points Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT LINE FOR ADDED POINTS 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT POINT LOCATION ON LINE 6 2 eta
46. CARDS VEHICLE KINEMATICS Description This card defines initial vehicle kinematics Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description INIT COND CARDS VELOCITY Description This card defines initial nodal point translational velocities using nodal set ID s This may also be used for sets in which some nodes have other velocities Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 15 15 15 17 15 18 for further description INIT COND CARDS VOID Description This card defines initial voided part set ID s or part numbers Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 15 20 for further description 6 139 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR INIT COND CARDS VOLUME FRACTION Description This card defines initial volume fraction Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 8 4 LOAD CARDS Description The LOAD CARD submenu contains cards that define applied forces Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION Note All of these options share this standard submenu LOAD CARPE BEAK BLAST Bnp BRODE explosive DEHE ITY HEAT GEHERATIOM HASE HODE RIGID mhiy ECKERT FRESSURE FLATE PRESSURE SuPEHPLASTIC FORH Z B S3EAR THER PL Only the CREATE command differs with respect to each function and will be explained in the following pages CREATE DELETE LIST MODIFY EXIT LOAD CARDS BEAM 6 140 Defines a new card Deletes a selected card or
47. CHECKING FOR FREE SURFACES gt XXXX SURFACES CHECKED gt CONTRUCTING FREE SURFACES gt XXXX FREE SURFACES FOUND e The user is now placed in a FREE SURFACE sub menu 2 FREE SURFACE e The following are brief descriptions of the options for the FREE SURFACE sub menu DISTAHCE IDEHTIFY ELEHEHT IDENTIFY HODE CREATE EL FROM SURF 6 101 EXIT eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR DISTANCE e This measures the distance between the points and nodes IDENTIFY ELEMENT e This identifies the element numbers of the plate elements that represent the free surfaces in the FREE SURFACE sub menu Each plate element ID is identical to the solid element ID i e one solid element with the ID xyz will have the plate elements that correspond with ID xyz IDENTIFY NODE e Identifies the nodes in the solid elements and acquires the node numbers and the X Y Z global coordinates CREATE EL FROM SURF Creates plate elements on the free surfaces of the displayed solids The plate elements will reside on the screen in the current part at the time of creation n order to for the user to identify any unwanted free surfaces VPG creates plate elements that carry element node numbers from a parent solid element If these plate elements are used in a model they should be renumbered with the RENUMBER ELEMENT and RENUMBER NODE commands in the ELEMENT OPTIONS and NODE OPTIONS menus respectively EXIT Returns the user to the MODEL CHECKER menu 6
48. CIRCLE The user may select a second point on the surface to define the radius of the circle VPG proceeds to draw the circle 2 The user should then select exit VPG prompts gt SELECT A CLOSED CURVE AS OUTER BOUNDARY ABORT SURFACE BOUNDARY e Selects the outer closed surface boundary CURVE ON SURFACE e The user may select an existing curve on the surface open or closed as the outer boundary of the trim operation REJECT LAST CURVE e Deselects the curve selected for the trim operation DONE EXIT 3 VPG prompts gt SELECT CLOSED CURVE AS INNER BOUNDARY ABORT CURVE ON SURFACE The user may select an existing curve on the surface open or closed as the inner boundary of the trim circle operation NO INNER BOUNDARY e VPG trims the surface of the outer boundary REJECT LAST CURVE DONE EXIT 4 VPG then prompts gt DELETE THE ORIGINAL SURFACE Y N e YES generates a trimmed surface NO generates a trimmed surface and retains a copy of the original surface 6 31 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 5 The user is returned to step 1 of TRIM SURFACE command TRIM SURFACE INTERSECTION LINE Description This function allows the user to trim away the intersection of two surfaces Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SURFACE FOR TRIM OPERATION Note This surface is referred to as a primary surface in this section gt SELECT THE SECOND SURFACE Once the user selects the second surface VPG draws a boundary line
49. DYNA refers to element sections The user may assign and create properties at the beginning or at the end of a VPG session A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 6 12 1 ASSIGN PROPERTY Description This function assigns element properties physical to selected parts Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a section SELECT A SECTION e The user may select a property by picking an element on the screen that contains a desired property default or by selecting a property name 6 169 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e If no properties are present in the database the user will be prompted with the message NO PROPERTIES DEFINED IN DATABASE and the command prompt will return 2 VPG prompts the user to designate a part s to accept the selected property gt SECTION ID X IS SELECTED gt SELECT PARTS TO ASSIGN SECTION gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART 3 The property will be assigned to the elements in the selected parts After the user exits the selected parts will be shown in the property color 6 12 2 CHANGE COLOR Description This function changes the color of a selected property Usage 1 The color bar is displayed at the right edge of the graphic area 2 VPG prompts the user to select a section gt SELECT SECTION TO CHANGE COLOR e The user may select a property by picking an element on the screen that contains a desired property default or by selecting a pro
50. DYNA solver to the post processor for quick easy interpretation of analysis results Once entered VPG s full complement of post processing functions allow the user to graphically display and manipulate simulation result files with contour and deformation animation contour plots and fills and geometry deformation VPG s post processing functions allow the user numerous ways of animating and viewing the analysis results The user has the options of animating select frames viewing single frames altering the time step rotating the model or viewing only select parts of the model The post processing function automatically prompts the user for the result file when activated VPG post processes the following types of result data D3PLOT d3plot01 etc DYNA DEFORMED GEOMETRY defgeo HISTORY his NASTRAN PUNCH pch NASTRAN OUTPUT op2 NASTRAN PACKED PUNCH pac VPG provides an option to create a more compact post processing file This binary file called a op file due to its extension pp is created after reading the result file into eta VPG Once the pp file is created the user may read this file to save both disk storage space and time when reloading the analysis results The pp file requires less space than the analysis result file used to create it and can be used for all subsequent post processing functions It also requires significantly less time to load the pp file Fatigue VPG allows the user to gene
51. Diisplay mi ome secte only a Define Cut Plane Clear Section Cut Mormal View Section Cut Options Export Cut Section Cut Plane Operation Rotate amp Translate Move Section By Mouse Apply Exit Figure 9 31 Section Cut Operation Control Option Select by Cursor WW along A Axis WW along Z Axis Reject Last Figure 9 30 Define Cut Plane ONE POINT oelect a node by cursor to define the origin of the LCS then select a global direction as the local W axis and click EXIT The global direction may be either or X Y or Z axis as listed in Figure 9 31 The local coordinate system will be defined at the first node with the local W axes follow the selected direction and U V axes parallel to the other two global axes TWO POINTS select the first node to define the origin of the LCS and select second node to define the local W axis and click EXIT to define the LCS The local coordinate system will be defined at the first node with local w axis aligned with the vector connecting the first and the second node THREE POINTS select the first node to define the origin of the LCS select the second node to define the local U axis and the third node to define the U V plane The local V and W axis will be computed according to the right hand rule Once the local system is defined and accepted the program will display the section lines in part color that represent the section cut of the
52. ELEMENT xxxx FAILED CHECK or gt xxxx ELEMENTS FAILED CHECK 2 If failed elements exist then VPG prompts the user to place them into a part INCLUDE FAILED ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N e YES The PART DEFINITION window pops up e The failed elements are removed from the original parts and added to the NEW PART e The new part is ON and CURRENT NO e The user returns to the MODEL CHECKER menu 6 5 12 CHECK TAPER Description This function allows the user to check the length to width ratio of elements Usage 1 VPG prompts ENTER THE CRITERION FOR TAPER DEFAULT 0 5 6 97 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 2 VPG prompts gt XXXX ELEMENTS FAILED CHECK gt INCLUDE FAILED ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N e If yes VPG prompts the user to define a new part 3 VPG allows the user to check individual elements for taper value via cursor pick 6 5 13 CHECK VOLUME SKEW Description This function checks the shape of tetrahedral elements with respect to the deviation from a perfect pyramid shape Volume Skew is defined as the percentage of the volume of a tetrahedral element contains versus a sphere containing the 4 nodes of that element Volume Skew Volume of Sphere Volume of Tetrahedron Volume of Sphere A perfect pyramid would have a volume skew value of 6 5 14 CHECK WARPAGE Description This function highlights any warpage in the plate or solid elements The user has the option to split the plate ele
53. Edge displays the element outline in a shaded display TRANSPARENCY FACTOR Description This function sets a degree of transparency for the shading option Factors closer to 0 0 zero increase opacity while factors closer to 1 0 one decrease opacity AUTOMATIC BACKUP toggle Description VPG will automatically create a backup database for the current VPG database This parameter controls the frequency of this back up process The default for this parameter is OFF The back up database is stored in the file named bak where is the name of the current database In the event of a software failure or database corruption this file may be renamed or copied and then reopened in VPG FILL HIDE METHOD Description VPG provides two methods of FILLHIDE a hidden surface plot for all of the displayed elements STENCIL BUFFER and POLYGON OFFSET Various graphics cards may provide an improved display appearance by using either method It is known that on SGI IRIX workstations specifying the STENCIL BUFFER option may result in improved graphic display performance ELEMENT TYPE DISPLAY Description The toggle switches in the ELEMENT TYPE DISPLAY determine what element types will be shown in the drawing window The default setting for all the switches is ON TYPE IDENTIFIER Description This toggle switch controls the display of element type identifiers If the option is turned on a symbol for the 1 D element types will
54. FIR type from the pop up list window via clicking the down triangular button below the FILTER Clicking the Select button the DATA CONTROL windows will pop up and prompt the user to input the corresponding parameters as Figure 7 14 11 shown The user may enter the appropriate coefficient parameters in the DATA CONTROL windows which displays the default values for DATA CONTROL Passband 100 000000 Stopband 190 000000 Max Ripple 0 100000 Min Attenuation 10 000000 Reset OK Cancel Figure 9 74 DATA CONTROL of FIR filter 9 12 6 20 PASSBAND FREQUENCY Description The maximum passband frequency is determined through the equation Passbanduser Total Number of Points on Graph Time Duration The default value is 10 of the passband frequency 9 12 6 21 STOPBAND FREQUENCY Description Stopband frequency is formulated Stopband Passbandyser Passbanmax Passbandyser The default value depends on the Passband cer 9 12 6 22 MAXIMUM PASSBAND RIPPLE MAX PASSBRIPP Description Passband ripple value is between 0 0 and 1 0 dB 9 12 6 23 MINIMUM STOPBAND ATTENUATION MIN ATT 1 0 DB Description Stopband attenuation must be greater than 1 0 dB The stopband frequency and maximum passband ripple should not be too close to either the given low or high end limits Attenuation factors commonly range between 10 and 50 It is recommended that the user choose a passhand frequency that is approximately 5 to 2096 of the number
55. PART COLORS ON OFF toggle Description This function changes each element type into a separate and uniform color i e quadrilateral elements turn blue triangular elements turn red 8 node cube elements turn green 6 node wedge elements turn magenta and 4 node tetrahedron elements turn light magenta This function activates the color changes when selected once and restores the original colors when selected again 10 3 15 PART SUMMARY Description This function displays statistics regarding the geometry model material and interface information of the selected parts The figures are displayed in the options area Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT PART FOR SUMMARY gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART Note DRAG WINDOW and MULTI POINT REGION are not valid selections for this command 2 The following figure is an example of the statistics display for selected parts inl MBER OF ELEHEHTS g HIPEER OF BHESAGHS Eg H ELEHEHT HUPEER 217657 n ELEHEHT HIUFHETR Tirah OF HODES 198 A HOWE HUHBER ZT0250 n HODE H UHHER THAT 75 MATERIAL IB zh LEHEHT PRIRFERT ID 1 ERIT Figure 10 3 3 Part Summary Window 10 3 16 SEPARATE PART S Description This function allows the user to separate part s from a structure For example two parts that are connected by common nodes may be quickly separated or disconnected using SEPARATE PART This function also provides the user with the option to create zero 1
56. Prompts gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN e VPG prompts the user to create a local coordinate system to define the projection vector A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 15 VPG displays the desired coordinate system and prompts gt ACCEPT Y N A If the user selects YES VPG prompts gt SELECT NODE FOR PROJECTION e DONE or EXIT completes the operation and exits the PROJECT NODE menu eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Surface with projection of elements Elements to be projected onto the surface using PROJECT NODE 6 4 15 RENUMBER NODES Description Renumbers all nodes in the existing database There is also an option of creating a summary table report of the node ranges between each part The user may renumber nodes by sequence or parts Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER RENUMBERING OPTION EXIT ALL PARTS MULTIPLE PARTS 2 ALL PARTS go to step 4 3 MULTIPLE PARTS go to step 5 4 VPG prompts for a starting node number gt ASSIGN STARTING NODE NUMBER FOR EACH PART Y N e YES 6 85 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR ENTER STARTING NODE NUMBER FOR PART xxxx Once a number has been entered the prompt will read NODE x TO xx ASSIGNED NEXT NODE NO xxxx ENTER STARTING NODE NUMBER FOR PART xxxx These prompts will continue for every part in the database If the user enters a STARTING NUMBER that already exists VPG
57. SURFACE 2 After selecting the first surface VPG prompts the user for the second surface 6 24 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt SELECT THE SECOND SURFACE 3 After selecting the second surface VPG automatically creates a line at the intersection of the two surfaces The newly created line is included in the current part a r LRL ae n np 2 ok A di ae I k r mu T 7 Memes 1m Ed Xs pF P a T x t tog P 6 2 13 UV LINE ON OFF toggle Description This function controls the on and off display of UV lines on a surface Note Toggling the UV lines off has no effect on the outcome of meshing trimming or splitting of surfaces 6 2 14 SCALE Description This function allows the user to scale selected surfaces with respect to any axis global or local using magnification factors in the X Y or Z U V or W directions A scale factor greater than 1 will magnify the surface whereas a scale factor less than 1 will reduce the surface Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select the surfaces 2 Once the surfaces have been selected VPG prompts the user to create a local coordinate system The user also has the option to select the global coordinate system Refer to Local Coordinate System Section 2 15 for a thorough explanation of this procedure 3 Once the desired coordinate system has been defined VPG prompts gt ENTER X Y Z SCALE FACTOR OR E TO EXIT This scales the surface
58. The created elements will be included in the CURRENT PART The CURRENT PART should be verified before proceeding with this function Usage 1 VPG prompts SELECT LINES FOR BOTTOM LINE SEGMENT allows the user to combine a broken line while selecting lines for the 8 LINE SOLID function as in the COMBINE LINE function in the LINE menu The user must select this option before selecting the desired lines for 8 LINE SOLID e The user may check the line s prior to executing this function by using SHOW LINE in the LINE menu 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT LINES FOR TOP 3 Once the user selects the desired lines the prompt will read gt ENTER NO OF ELEM N1 N2 N3 N1 any positive integer greater than one for the number of elements along the selected lines 6 70 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR N2 any positive integer for the number of elements between the 2 lines N3 any positive integer for the number of elements between the bottom and top surface 4 Once N1 N2 and N3 have been entered the prompt will read gt ACCEPT MESH YES NO REMESH e YES will accept mesh and prompt for more lines e NO will not accept mesh and prompt for more lines e REMESH rejects the mesh and prompts for new N1 N2 N3 SOLID MESH 9 LINE SOLID MESH Description This function allows the user to generate 6 or 8 node solid elements automatically in a volume The volume is defined by 9 lines 3 lines for the top surface 3 lines for t
59. The user may select a view to overwrite and repeat step 1 10 1 7 VIEW PORTS ON OFF Description This function allows the user to view an object using the four predefined views available in the split screen display mode 1 corresponds to the default view 2 corresponds to the TOP VIEW X Y PLANE and the SIDE VIEW X Z PLANE and 4 corresponds to the TOP VIEW X YPLANE the SIDE VIEW X ZPLANE the ISOMETRIC VIEW and the REAR VIEW Y Z PLANE Once the user executes the above option the displayed model will automatically rescale itself to fill the split screen display 10 1 8 SCREEN AXES ROTATION Description This function allows the user to rotate an object in the display area according to an angle specified via the keyboard The screen axes are fixed at all times and are defined as follows 1 Screen X axis is the direction from the left to right of the terminal screen 2 Screen Y axis is the direction from the bottom to the top of the terminal screen 3 Screen Z axis is the direction from the screen to the user Usage The user defines the rotation by entering the angle of a particular axis The angle is defined as positive if the rotation corresponds to a counterclockwise direction i e follows the right hand rule 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER 3 ANGLES TO ROTATE The user may now enter the desired X Y Z angles of rotation Note The functions REPEAT ROTATION and REVERSE ROTATION are especially useful after executi
60. This function creates a line on the boundary of a selected surface Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a surface on the screen SELECT SURFACE FOR BOUNDARY LINE 2 VPG creates a boundary line around the selected surface and includes it in the current part Note The boundary line should be split if it is intended for use with line meshing 6 2 2 COPY Description This function copies selected surface s to a new location Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select surfaces to copy 2 VPG prompts the user to create a local coordinate system The user also has the option to select the global coordinate system Refer to Local Coordinate System Section 2 15 for a thorough explanation of this procedure 3 Once the desired coordinate system has been defined VPG prompts for the number of copies 4 Once the number of copies has been entered VPG prompts for the method of copy MOVE OR ROTATE M R e MOVE ENTERU V W INCREMENTS e i e 0 0 1000 This copies the surface s 1000 units along the W axis or global Z ROTATE e If ROTATE is selected enter the angle increment right hand rule about the W axis The remaining commands are the same as the MOVE option ABORT 6 20 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 5 VPG prompts gt INCLUDE COPIED SURFACE IN ITS ORIGINAL PART Y N YES NO 6 2 3 CREATE S LINES Description This function creates sectional line data on the selected surface Usage 1 VPG prompts the us
61. This function duplicates the properties from one material onto another material Usage 1 VPG displays the material card list and prompts gt SELECT MATERIAL TO COPY 2 Once the user selects a material to copy VPG copies the material and prompts gt MATERIAL ID xx DUPLICATED FROM MATERIAL ID x 6 160 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 10 5 CREATE Description This function creates a new material Usage 1 After selecting create VPG offers the following material categories STRUCTURAL TAMPER SS PRG E EH UNO END EEE RE a ERE eee ee 2 Selecting either category yields an LS DYNA material card list When the desired material is selected from the list VPG displays its definition card s The user can then edit the material card for the desired properties 6 10 6 DELETE Description This function deletes the user selected materials from the database VPG displays the material card list Selected materials are marked with an asterisk When the user exits the material card list the selected materials are deleted 6 10 7 DEFINE PROPERTIES Description This function defines or modifies the properties of a selected material Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a material Users may select an existing material by picking an element or material name of a material 2 After the user selects a material its MATERIAL DEFINITION window appears 3 The user may modify the properties manually in the MATERIAL DEFINI
62. Too small a number will cause a computational error and too large a number will cause the program to stall After the user enters the appropriate parameters clicks the OK and accept the input parameters and exit the DATA CONTROL window Select Apply to display the filter result 9 72 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 12 6 24 SAE FILTER Description This function allows the user to smooth curves according to the Society of Automotive SAE filter specification Select the SAE type from the pop up list window via clicking the down triangular button below the FILTER Clicking the Select button the DATA CONTROL windows will pop up and prompt the user to input the Cutoff value as Figure 7 14 12 shown The user may enter the appropriate value in the DATA CONTROL windows which displays the default values for Figure 9 75 DATA CONTROL window for SAE Filter After the user enters the appropriate value clicks the OK and accept the input parameters and exit the DATA CONTROL window Select Apply to display the filter result 9 12 6 25 BUTTERWORTH FILTER Description This function allows the user to smooth the curves according to the Butterworth filter specifications Select the Butterworth type from the pop up list window via clicking the down triangular button below the FILTER Clicking the Select button the DATA CONTROL windows will pop up and prompt the user to input the corresponding parameters as Figure
63. VEHICLE VELOCITY mma Fei nans EHLE wt TH mii 1 8 TAUPE HIE LOr vEHK LE CAO reri Cancel ak Input values and press OK 1 VPG prompts PICK VEHICLE FRONT BUMPER AGAINST ODB RIGHT UP CORNER 7 43 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES COMTROL KEYS RHET CURSOR amp T ELEHEHT WEY IH X V Z ON OFF PART KEEF PART URDA LAST 2 Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the front bumper part as target position The ODB and a rigid road surface will be positioned in the desired locations Proper contacts and velocities will also be defined in the model Figure 7 An Example of a Generated ECE 94 40 Front ODB Model 7 4 6 2 ECE 33 34 REAR IMPACT Description This function will create and position rigid walls that are used to simulate an ECE 33 34 Rear Impact test Usage 1 VPG prompts ENTER REAR IMPACT INFORMATION REAR IMPACT DATA TEEMA Bata RIGID WALLS TRUC TURE CLEARANCE eee em RIGID WALL VELOCITY mess fl e655 000 ee 2 OF VEHICLE GROUND m Amen 4 nu RIGID WALL MASS ton cancel 7 44 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES Input values and press OK 2 VPG prompts gt PICK VEHICLE REAR BUMPER TO LOCATE RIGID WALL COMTROL KEYS RHUET 3 Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as target position The rear rigid wall and a rigid road surface
64. VPG prompts gt ENTER APPLICABLE DOF 1 TO 7 TYPE 0 TO EXIT 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT THE FIRST NODE FOR CONST NODE SET 3 VPG prompts 6 53 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt SELECT NODES CREATE CONST INTERPOLATION LS DYNA Description This section covers the options for the CONST INTERPOLATION subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER COMPONENT NUMBERS DEFAULT 123456 OR 1 TO EXIT e Defines the degrees of freedom 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT REFERENCE NODE FOR CONST INTERPOLATION 3 VPG prompts gt ENTER WEIGHTING FACTOR WT 1 REAL OR 0 TO END gt ENTER COMPONENT WITH WEIGHTING FACTOR DEFAULT 123 gt SELECT INDEPENDENT NODES FOR CONST INTERPOLATION 4 Step 3 is repeated until the user selects DONE or ABORT CREATE ALDS LS DYNA Description This section covers the options for the ALDS subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS CREATE MAT100 SPOTWELD LS DYNA Description This section covers the options for the MAT100 SPOTWELD subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS 6 3 5 DELETE Description This function allows the user to delete elements using several different functions 6 54 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 3 6 DRAG MESH Description This function offers five methods to extrude elements from a cross section of pattern elements See the following figure for the five methods Usage DHE LIKE DEI H RHAL BRAG ROTATIONAL DRAG THERSLATIORRL DAAL OR
65. VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e The user may create new points by placing the cursor anywhere on the line and pressing the left mouse button or the user may select one the following options BETWEEN 2 POINTS e This option allows the user to select 2 end points of a line segment and create a specified number of new points between the them see step 3 CURSOR LOCATION POINT REJECT LAST 9 VPG prompts gt BETWEEN 2 POINTS gt SELECT POINT 1 ON LINE gt SELECT POINT 2 ON LINE gt ENTER NUMBER OF POINTS TO BE ADDED The user enters the desired number of points 4 EXIT or DONE returns the user to the LINE menu Circles indicate the locations where points have been added 6 1 2 GENERATE ARCS Description This function allows the user to generate arcs and circles either globally locally or about a selected node or point The created arc will be included in the CURRENT PART see PART CONTROL MENU Usage Th VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN 6 3 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e VPG is asking for a desired coordinate system local or global about which to create the arc VPG prompts the user to create a local system A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in the Local Coordinate System Section 2 15 Note Arcs and circles are generated about the local W axis or global Z axis 2 Once the desired coordinate system is acquired it
66. allows the user to output a binary model file from current model data The binary model file may be used to combine finite element models from different VPG data files This function will output elements and nodes only 5 9 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 5 File Manager 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER FILE NAME OR STOP TO EXIT e Enter a file name up to 24 characters Using the bin convention for BINARY files is suggested 2 If the file name already exists the program will prompt the following message gt FILENAME ALREADY EXISTS O K TO OVERWRITE Y N e YES will overwrite the existing file e NO will prompt for a file name 3 VPG prompts gt OUTPUT ONLY ACTIVE PARTS Y N e YES will only output the elements displayed on the screen e NO will output all elements existing in the database 4 VPG returns the user to the FILE MANAGER menu 5 7 3 WRITE C MOLD FILE This function allows the user to output a C MOLD fem file from current model data 1 VPG prompts gt WRITING C MOLD INPUT FILE SELECT UNIT CURRENTLY USED IN DATABASE e MM CM METER IN EXIT 2 VPG echoes the user s unit selection and prompts for the new file s name gt SI UNIT WILL BE USED IN THE FEM FILE SCALE FACTOR X XXXXXX gt ENTER FILE NAME OR STOP TO EXIT 3 If there are no materials or properties defined in the database VPG prompts gt NO PROPERTIES DEFINED IN DATABASE SELECT OPTION 1 SELECT GLOBAL DEFAULT e Defines one global material
67. and resets the nodes to the global system Note To remove the local systems definitions from individual nodes the user must reassign the nodes to the global coordinate system refer to ASSIGN COORDINATE SYSTEM on page 3 of this section ERASE UNREF LOCAL Description This function allows the user to delete any local coordinate systems not referenced by any entity in the model MODIF Y 10 23 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY Description This function modifies the definition of an existing local coordinate system Usage 1 VPG displays the define coordinate card list and prompts gt EXIT TO CONTINUE 2 After selecting the coordinate system VPG displays the CSYS DEFINITION CARD which allows the user to select and edit the coordinate systems data 3 Once the user accepts the modified card the new local system appears on the screen All local systems belonging to the modified coordinate system automatically adjust to match the labeled coordinate system CURRENT Description This function switches the current coordinate system from local to global DISPLAY ON OFF Description This function toggles the display of local coordinate systems on or off RENUMBER Description This function changes the ID of selected local coordinate systems The user may select individual local coordinates or may renumber all or a portion of the local coordinate systems in the model database TRANSFORM Description This fun
68. another transformation operation REVERSE rejects the previous transformation EXIT exits the function 6 3 23 COMPLETE MESH Description The COMPLETE MESH function allows users to fill in a hole gap or similar void in a mesh by selecting the surrounding elements and a node on the hole s boundary VPG will then complete the mesh by creating shell elements in the hole Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PLEASE SELECT ELEMENTS FOR FILL INNER BOUNDARY 2 VPG prompts gt PLEASE SELECT A BOUNDARY NODE ON THE CLOSED CURVE 6 3 24 BALL MESH Description The BALL MESH function creates a spherical mesh using either solid elements or shell elements The solid element option creates a hexahedron and tetrahedron mesh of a sphere using the diameter and mesh size values input into the BALL MESH table The sphere will be centered at the X Y and Z location specified in the table 6 73 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR If the Surface Mesh option is selected a shell mesh will be created using the center diameter and mesh size parameters specified Usage 1 The following window pops up The user defines parameters in the window and clicks Mesh Salid Mesh Surface Mesh ilenler ea Y lon zs Duerire Cerise Diamatensize Dismater lo ooo Element Size o nnm Mesh Cancel 6 3 25 MIDDLE ELEMENT Description This function Usage 1 VPG prompts to select middle element options 6 3 26
69. appropriate file name This practice makes the file name selection convenient and organizes the user s work directory eta VPG3 0 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features 2 15 LS DYNA CARDS eta VPG supports all LS DYNA input data from versions 970 and earlier As a result models generated using eta VPG require no external editing to complete the file for execution The input cards are arranged as they are in the LS DYNA manual eta VPG displays the necessary input parameters in windows as shown in Figure 2 14 1 and as described below CARD SELECT BUTTON The CARD SELECT BUTTON displays the number of definition cards and allows the user to jump conveniently to the desired card The card button is not an option when only one card is needed to define the selected property or the number of cards is dependent on user defined values CARD DESCRIPTION FIELD The CARD DESCRIPTION FIELD allows the user to enter a name for the defined properties EDITING FIELDS VPG s smart editing field only allows values within the specified range to be entered If the value entered is beyond the LS DYNA defined range VPG prompts the user when the user tries to move to another field or card Card Select Button U amp TFELAIL rF MATERIAL DEFINITION CARDI i m Card ITEMS D TA a Description CARD DESCRIPTION ira WHEY C ETRAIN RATE PARAMETERS a NONE mau Field P STRAIN RATE PARAMETER LLL c Editing Field LESA LOAD CURVE STRA
70. are organized as follows ELEMENT OPTIONS COARSE ELEHEHT LHAMEE 1D COPY CREATE DELETE WRAL HESH ELEHEHT TYPE IPEHTIFY ELEHEHT LARFL MODIFY LINE MESH REHUHBER REUERSE HOAMAL SPLIT n ATO REPAIR 2 LIWE HESH d LINE HESH k LIKE HESH SULID HESH TEAHSE ORM COMPLETE MESH HALL HESH HIDBLE ELEHEHT ATTRIBUTE TABLE H BFF VIEW EXIT VPG supports a wide range of element types for LS DYNA and NASTRAN refer to Appendix A VPG Capabilities for F E A Programs 6 3 1 COARSE ELEMENT Description This function coarsens 2 CQUAD4 elements or 2 TRIA elements or a combination of a TRIA and a CQUADA into one element Usage 6 37 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 1 VPG prompts the user to select 2 3 or 4 elements 2 Once desired elements have been selected e DONE coarsens the selected elements and prompts for more e ABORT or EXIT will exit this function The larger elements were created from groupings of four smaller elements 6 3 2 CHANGE ID Description This function allows the user to change an existing element number Parts do not need to be ON or CURRENT Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select elements gt SELECT ELEMENT FOR NEW ELEMENT NUMBER 2 Once the user selects a desired element VPG prompts the user to enter the new element number gt ENTER NEW EL NO FOR xxxx OR CR TO IGNORE xxxx is the original element number 3 Ifthe user enters a number that a
71. be highlighted in white in the MENU WINDOW All entities in the part will be selected REJECT LAST This option negates the last selection whether from single cursor pick or a group of entities selected by any of the above options EXCLUDE ON OFF This option works like a toggle switch lf turned on all the subsequent selected entities will be removed from the previously selected list The user may toggle this option on and off during the course of the selection TYPE This option is used to control the type of elements to be selected If DONE is selected immediately after selecting TYPE all elements of this type will be selected Otherwise other options may be used to limit the selection of elements Note The TYPE function is specific to the selection of elements SURFACE This function is used to select elements created from a surface by the SURFACE MESH command Note The SURFACE function is specific to the selection of elements 2 20 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 3 Getting Started Chapter Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 1 OPENING CREATING AN eta VPG DATABASE FILE To start the VPG software the user must execute the VPG executable file using the method appropriate for their operating system In Windows this may be accomplished by double clicking the shortcut to the VPG executable file Once the VPG software is activated the VPG Open File window is displayed for the user to OPEN or CREATE a new VPG database 1 See the Open File w
72. cards from those displayed in a pop up window Lists the cards in the option s database via pop up window e Similar to the CREATE command this command lists the defined cards in a pop up window and allows the user to select and modify them eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Description This card defines a distributed traction load along any local axis beam or set of beams Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 18 2 for further description LOAD CARDS BLAST Description This card defines a blast load Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS BODY Description This card defines body force loads due to a prescribed base acceleration or angular velocity using global axes directions Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 18 4 18 8 for further description LOAD CARDS BRODE Description This card defines pressure loads due to explosion Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 18 11 for further description LOAD CARDS DENSITY Description This card defines density versus depth for gravity loading Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 18 13 for further description LOAD CARDS HEAT GENERATION Description This card defines solid elements or solid element sets with heat generation Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 18 14 for further description LOAD CARDS MASK Description This card defines mask load Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for f
73. column indicates that this type of control card has been defined A NO in the right column indicates that this type of control card has not been defined 6 14 5 DAMPING CARDS Description Damping cards define mass weighted nodal damping that applies globally to the nodes of deformable bodies Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION DLO BL PART H gg PART STIFFHESS RELRT TUE EXIT e The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 7 for further description 6 14 6 DATABASE Description Database definition cards are used to obtain output result files Usage 6 184 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT DATABASE TYPE ASCII Th CROSS SECTIAH EXTENT OUTPUT FORMAT HISTOR DAL FORCE CROWF SPRING FORWARD SUPER PLASTIC FORMING DATABASE ASCII Description The definition cards in the ASCII subsection specify the ASCII database output files Usage 1 When DEFINE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO DEFINE Tues algi xj ABSTAT SIRBAC STHTISTICS HE RuXFLF US PORMAT DH HO DRDO Eb HbARHY CORDITIGN HU DEFRED MEPDRHED HEUMETRY un bEF HE BIZCHETE ELEPRENI HE ELINT ELEHEHT DATA TE HEEMI GOH CORTAGT ENT H GESTAT CLoBRL DATA YES HATTIE J3O H FORCE DATA un WTS HATERIRL EBEHGLES ES MUTE HEUTE FORMAT DH un Wes necs Fonit pa n HnF HC
74. curve window will display Please see the Figure 5 1 6 In the curve window the Section plus curve abscissa is the arc length and the ordinate Apply T Ex is the corresponding contour value EXPORT SECTION CUT Figure 9 32 Section Cut Operations This function allows the user to export the section cut as the PLOTEL elements to a NASTRAN file The program displays a Select File dialog window as shown in Figure 9 33 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING select File Lookin JF OQA ModehResultiNumisheet2002 EN Numisheet2002 nas File Name Save File Type Nastran Data nas Cancel Figure 9 33 Export Nastran File MOVE SECTION BY MOUSE This function allows the user to move the section cut location by using the mouse The movement may be translation along the local W axis or rotation about the local w axis TRANSLATE First select MOVE SECTION BY MOUSE button eta Post allows the user to select a node on the current section as the reference node The program draws a line along the local W axis as the directional line Drag the mouse along the directional line to obtain the new section cut nearest the cursor Click the left mouse button to exit the function ROTATE First select MOVE SECTION BY MOUSE button eta Post allows the user to select two nodes on the current section as the U Axis Exit the Control Option to accept the U Axis at this time the user is allowed to drag mouse the section
75. e YESrenumbers the new data at the lowest available unused node element number e NO compares the node element numbers and ignores the duplicates VPG retains only the original nodes and elements i e if the MOLDFLOW file contains all duplicate node and element numbers the new part will read in with out the presence of elements or nodes 4 VPG reads in the file and returns the user to the FILE MANAGER menu 5 6 1 6 READ NASTRAN BULK VPG uses NASTRAN as a file translator so that the user may import and export models and mesh This function allows the user to read a NASTRAN bulk data file dat directly into VPG All existing properties materials and subcases are retained 1 VPG displays the VPG FILE MENU and prompts gt DEFINE NASTRAN BULK DATA FILE 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT PART CONTROL OPTION FOR CBARS The files with the suffix nas will be listed for you in the options area MAT1 ID e CBARS will be grouped by common MAT 1 ID PBAR ID 5 6 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 5 File Manager e CBARS will be grouped by common PBAR ID PART NAME e CBARS will be grouped by their individual part names 3 If the user is reading data into an existing model VPG prompts OFFSET NODE AND ELEMENT NUMBERS Y N e YES renumbers the new data at the lowest available unused node element number e NOcompares the node element numbers and ignores the duplicates VPG retains the only original nodes and elements i e if the NASTRAN file c
76. entering AUTOMATIC ALL VPG prompts gt ENTER FIRST NODE ID amp INC TYPE 0 TO EXIT 3 If entering ONE BY ONE VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW NODE SET ID OLD X TYPE 0 TO EXIT e his prompt is repeated until all sets are given a new set ID 4 If entering SELECT ONE VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM NODE SET LIST e Once setis selected VPG prompts gt SETXIS SELECTED gt ENTER NEW NODE SET ID OLD X TYPE 0 TO EXIT 6 7 11 REVIEW LIST Description This function displays the defined sets in the MENU WINDOW When a set is selected the nodes of that set are displayed in the CONTENTS OF SET window 6 7 12 SHOW SET NODE Description This function allows the user to display all or some of the defined node sets VPG displays an ID number next to each node Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM NODE SET LIST List of all node sets CURSOR AT NODE ALL NODE SETS UNDO EXIT e VPG displays all node sets and returns the user to the NODE SET sub menu Note Because more than one node set ID number may be assigned to each node viewing all of the ID numbers at once may be confusing The user may clarify the screen by displaying one specific node 6 118 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR set at a time 6 7 13 ANNOTATE ELEMENT Description This function allows the user to add notes to a selected set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM ELEMENT SET LIST List of all sets CURSOR AT ELEMENT EXIT
77. eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Select File EA Mode n nes nN inEnet A002 BINDER LIN BLANK LIN File Name Open File Type Femb Line Data lin Figure 9 10 Import File window User can select a DYNAFORM VPG FEMB Line Data file then click OPEN button or double click the desired file icon from the file name list to import it Note IMPORT function is disabled until a d3plot file or NASTRAN punch output2 file is read in 9 7 3 EXPORT Description This function allows user to export the current model as NASTRAN file or DYNAFORM VPG FEMB line data file The Export File dialog is shown in Figure 9 11 Select File TVDA Mage DAEs NEST eE a2 EN Numisheet2002 nas File Name l o Sawe FileType Nastran Data nas 9 20 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Figure 9 11 Export file dialog box User can export the model turned on in the current database as the NASTRAN FILE Give a file name then click SAVE button to export the model in the selected file format Note EXPORT function is disabled until a d3plot file or NASTRAN punch output2 file is read in 9 7 4 COPY TO CLIPBOARD Description This function allows the user to save the model displayed in the GRAPHICS DISPLAY window to the clipboard in the Windows environment The image in the clipboard can be pasted to the document files 9 7 5 PRINT Description The PRINT function prints the contents of the grap
78. eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Turns all parts off from the GRAPHICS DISPLAY REVERSE This function reverses the current on and off status of the parts in the model The program updates the model display accordingly UNDO Undo the last operation or part selection in Part ON OFF function REDO Redo the last operation in the part ON OFF function EXIT Closes the PART ON OFF dialog window and exits the function VIRTUAL X ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the global X axis when the cursor is moved up or oun RC VIRTUAL Y ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the global Y axis when the cursor is moved up or down E Ws VIRTUAL Z ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the global Z axis when the cursor is moved up or down p SCREEN X ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the screen X axis when the cursor is moved up or down The screen X axis is the horizontal axis located at the center of the graphics display window a F SCREEN Y ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the screen Y axis when the cursor is moved up or down The screen Y axis is the vertical axis located at the center of the graphics display window fg sy SCREEN Z ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the screen Z axis when the cursor is moved up or down The screen Z axis is the normal direction of the screen located at
79. from a specific direction It flows uniformly and maintains a consistent intensity It has a directional vector that determines the face on which an object receives light The MOVE LIGHT SOURCE command positions a directional vector at two points that are perpendicular to an object The right and left arrow keys move the light source in the positive and negative X direction while the up and down arrow keys move the light source in the positive and negative Y direction 10 1 16 ACTIVE WINDOW Description This command allows the user to isolate a portion of the displayed geometry model for more detailed viewing or editing The user defines the region by dragging a window over the desired area or by specifying the volume of space via the keyboard with X Y Z coordinates or two diagonal points nodes VPG displays the elements lines and surfaces within the window volume in space as active Other objects on screen remain masked and inactive See Figure 10 1 16 ACTIVE WUIHDIM DIBIDHAL H DF PTS KEY IH XVZ RANGE FF SEALE ACTIVE WINDOW DRAG WINDOW EXIT Figure 10 1 16 Active Window Menu Note An ACTIVE WINDOW may be defined at any time within any menu of VPG by clicking the right mouse button Usage 1 VPG prompts SELECT OPTION FOR ACTIVE WINDOW DIAGONAL NODE PTS KEY IN XYZ RANGE ACTIVE WINDOW OFF SCALE ACTIVE WINDOW DRAG WINDOW EXIT 10 7 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY DIA
80. gt YES Overwrite the file with new data gt NO Exit and do nothing 6 16 3 CREATE MASS Description This function allows the user add a new mass element to the database Usage 1 VPG prompts ENTER LUMPED MASS VALUE Enter a mass value that the user wants to create 2 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT To create a mass element the user may select a node point or keyboard entry EXIT or ABORT will exit this function 6 16 4 MODIFY MASS Description The functions of this menu allow the user change the mass value and position The functions in this menu are organized as follows MODIFY MASS OPTION a CHAHCE VALUE CHANGE PUSITIGH ATTACH HASE 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT MASS ELEMENT FOR MODIFY 6 202 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR User should select a mass element for modification CHANGE VALUE VPG prompts gt ENTER ELEMENT VALUE OR 0 TO EXIT Enter a new value for the selected mass element The value of the selected mass will be replaced with the new input value and VPG returns the user to the MODIFY MASS OPTION menu CHANGE POSITION VPG prompts gt SELECT NEW POSITION NODE POINT oelects a new node point for the mass element The position of the selected mass will be moved to the new position and returns the user to the MODIFY MASS OPTION menu ATTACH MASS VPG prompts gt ATTACH ALL MASS TO NEAREST NODES Y N A gt YES Attach all mass to th
81. in the width and height field e Enter a number in the field next to MARGIN to define the margin of the shorter edge of the paper The program automatically determines the margin of the longer edge in order to maintain the original aspect ratio of the picture This feature can also be used to scale the picture e Select the drop down option next to UNIT to choose the unit inch or mm used for paper size and margin 9 7 5 3 ORIENTATION Description This function defines the image orientation as landscape or portrait on the printed copy 9 7 5 4 OPTION Description These options are for defining printer output and layout on the paper PRINT BACKGROUND If this function is toggled on the background color of the screen will be included in the print out If this function is toggled off there will be no background color on the print out BOUNDING BOX This function draws a line frame around the picture s border PRINT TIME STAMP This function prints the current time at the lower right corner of the picture PRINT FILE NAME This function prints the file name at the lower left corner of the picture PRINT ETA LOGO This function prints eta VPG at the lower right corner of the picture PRINT GRAPHIC DESCRIPTION 9 22 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING If the function is toggled on the field below the toggle switch is enabled to use User can enter a string of characters to describe the current image to be printed on the p
82. material density specified Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER OUTPUT FILE NAME OR CR FOR DEFAULT OR STOP FOR QUIT User inputs a file name 2 VPG prompts gt ENTER COMMAND ALL FRATS SELECT FART ERIT ALL PARTS Output all mass information of all parts to the input file SELECT PART Output the mass information of the selected part to the input file EXIT Returns the user to MASS MENU 6 18 8 ATTACH MASS Description This function creates RBE ALL DOFs elements in the current part and attaches them from the selected CONM2 elements to the nearest nodes in the surrounding parts Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ATTACH ALL MASS TO NEAREST NODES Y N A YES Attach all mass to the nearest nodes NO and ABORT do nothing and return the user to the CONM2 MENU 6 213 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 214 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 19 ASSEMBLY NASTRAN The functions of the AUTO ASSEMBLY MENU are designed to add and modify connections in the database It also includes functions for replacing parts and part sets The functions in this menu are organized as follows READ FROH FILE WRITE TO FILE CREATE COMHECTION DELETE COMMECTION REPLACE PART REPLACE PART SET REMOUEREPLACK PART REMBUEREPLACE FART SET EXIT 6 19 1 READ FROM FILE Description This option allows the user to add connections to the database from a file that stores the connection information Usage 1
83. models These tire models are described in Chapter 7 This menu is available only in LS DYNA mode see UTILITIES menu 4 7 SAFETY This menu accesses the VPG Safety Module Access to this menu is available only in LS DYNA mode see UTILITIES menu 4 8 ANALYSIS The ANALYSIS menu allows users to define all parameters necessary to execute an analysis Many non graphical parameters are required to carry out an analysis For instance LS DYNA models require a termination time and require a definition of output frequency for the model results VPG allows users to access all CONTROL CARDS and DATABASE parameters available in LS DYNA Similar capabilities are available for NASTRAN RADIOSS and PAMCRASH model databases 4 9 FATIGUE The FATIGUE menu allows users to post process stress data calculate fatigue damage for LS DYNA or NASTRAN data This menu allows users to calculate and display the results of 4 2 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 4 Main Menu this fatigue calculation Additional information may be found in Chapter 7 4 10 POST The POST menu launches the ETA Postprocessor application By selecting this menu option the current database is stored in a temporary location and closed The Post Processor application is then opened Once the Postprocessor application is closed the temporary database is then restored 4 11 GRAPH Certain analysis result data may be displayed in a graphical format using curves The plotting and control of these grap
84. models parts or selected elements The mesh quality parameters that can be repaired automatically using ENHANCE MESH are e Warpage e Taper e Aspect Ratio e Interior Angles e Jacobian The user may specify the criteria that will be used to evaluate the model and will subsequently be used to attempt to improve the mesh quality The ENHANCE MESH function uses an iterative approach to satisfy as many of the mesh quality parameters as possible The convergence is controlled by the TOLERANCE value and the number of iterations used to attempt to improve the mesh quality is the ITERATIONS parameter When the ENHANCE MESH function is executed VPG will display a number at each element centroid identifying the parameter s that have failed for that element For instance a value of 1 2 4 displayed at the element would indicate that the element has failed the warpage taper and interior angle criteria By selecting the FIXED BOUNDARY option the outer boundaries of the model will not be modified during the mesh repair operations Usage 1 VPG prompts SEARCHING FEATURE LINES CHECK AHD REPAIR SELECT MESH SET DYHAHIC REPAIR EXIT e EXIT returns the user to the model checker menu Enter CHECK AND REPAIR 2 The MESH QUALITY PARAMETERS window appears 6 105 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 3 1 age hom E 2 Taper LING I 3 Aspect Ratio Cr Jp Trange MainteriGr Anges Hi T ang Mrreener
85. of all of these quantities simultaneously using a single analysis run 1 3 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 1 Introduction While VPG methodology was initially developed for full vehicle simulations based on a proving ground durability cycle the concept can also be applied to other dynamic mechanical systems 1 4 eta VPG Software Package eta Virtual Proving Ground eta VPG is a fully integrated dynamic nonlinear finite element software package used to create analyze edit and visualize dynamic nonlinear engineering problems The software includes an integrated preprocessor post processor and solver VPG is a complete CAE software toolset for applying theory and engineering principles common in areas of mechanical and structural engineering eta VPG provides a single package for use in analysis of multi body dynamics problems linear static nonlinear static and dynamic nonlinear finite element analysis eta VPG s strength lies in its ability to integrate problems that are treated as multidisciplinary by other software packages eta VPG allows the user to combine multi body dynamics problems with structural finite element analysis problems providing real time kinematics or dynamics as well as the stress or strain response of the structure in real time eta VPG consists of three primary modules the VPG PrePost module the VPG Structure Module and the VPG Safety Module Each module may operate independently and usage is controlled via licensing
86. open save import export and print related files See Figure 9 8 Open Import Export Copy To Clipboard Print MI Alt g 9 18 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Figure 9 8 The File Menu A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 9 7 1 OPEN Description This function displays the Open File dialog and allows the user to read result file or model file into eta Post The open file dialog is shown in Figure 9 9 Select File Look in FA AQA M odehRes U Nu misheet2002 ne d3plot EN dynain File Name d3plot Open FileType LS DYNA Post d3plot d3drif dynain v Cancel Figure 9 9 Select File window To open result file or model data select File Type that will be read in Locate the desired file using the browser and click OPEN The model win be displayed in the Graphic Display Window and will be ready for post processing Eta Post 1 0 supports LS DYNA d3plot d3eigv and d3drif NASTRAN punch and output2 result files for post processing The program will display the Select File window again for the user to select a Nastran model file after the Nastran result file is loaded It is necessary to select a matching Nastran model in order to post processing the result correctly 9 7 2 IMPORT Description This function allows the user to import DYNAFORM VPG FEMB Line Data file for SKID MARK and BLANK OUTLINE functions The Import File dialog is shown in Figure 9 10 9 19
87. options VPG PrePost is a general purpose full featured modeling software for the construction and results display of finite element models This module allows users to import CAD data construct CAD data import existing FE models and construct the geometry and mesh required for finite element analysis All boundary conditions and material properties may also be created in this module Output of the model in various finite element solver formats is available VPG Structure contains many special features designed specifically for system level or full vehicle analysis These features allow for easy modeling of joints and bushings finite element meshes boundary conditions materials properties suspension system components tire models and road surface models VPG Safety was introduced in release 2 0 of eta VPG This module is targeted at LS DYNA users who wish to construct vehicle impact and occupant safety simulations This module is based on two integral sub components a crash tool library and the test procedures associated with a specific governmental regulation The Crash Tool Library contains the dummy or barrier needed to perform a specific analysis For instance a European Side Impact test requires an EEC Side Impact Barrier and a EUROSID dummy model These are combined with the testing 1 4 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 1 Introduction procedure vehicle velocity etc and measurement criteria to establish a process VPG Safety follows that
88. selected load set Usage 6 147 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO MODIFY e Available load sets are displayed in the STATIC LOAD CARD LIST window LOAD STATIC LOAD REMOVE FORCE Description This function removes nodal forces from selected grids in the current load set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO LIST 2 VPG prompts gt REMOVE NODAL FORCE SELECT NODES e The left mouse button may be used to remove selected nodal forces one at a time e When a nodal force is removed the node is highlighted by a small circle e If anode is selected twice the following message appears gt NODE xxxx ALREADY PICKED e DONE removes the selected nodal forces and exits the function REMOVE FORCE e ABORT exits the function REMOVE FORCE without deleting the selected nodal forces LOAD STATIC LOAD REMOVE PRESSURE Description This function removes pressure loads from selected elements in the current load set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO LIST 2 VPG prompts gt REMOVE PRESSURE LOAD SELECT ELEMENTS e When a pressure load is removed the element is highlighted and the arrow is removed e Ifan element is selected more than once the following message appears gt ELEMENT xxxx ALREADY PICKED 6 148 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt SELECT ELEMENTS DONE will exit the user to the LOADING OPTIONS submenu ABORT will exit the user to the LOADI
89. specific type by connecting selected nodes or points The element type refers to the analysis program defined at the creation of the database Depending on the analysis program NASTRAN or LS DYNA VPG offers a list of element types and prompts the user to select one Because the NASTRAN element types are more comprehensive they are documented first in the following pages with the LS DYNA elements following 6 41 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR ELEMENT EQUIVALENCY TABLE NASTRAN ABACQUS SLS D YMA nonlinear codes CMOLIVMOLDFLOW BEAM ELEMENT CBAR BEAM PART ELEMENT RIGID LINK HBEZ NODAL RIGID BODY CHANN EL PLOTEL ELEMENT THICK SHELL HOT RUNS ER PLATE ELEMENT PLATE COLD RUNNER SOLID ELEMENT SOLD CONNECTOR SPRING CELAS SPRING DAMPER SPRING CE LAST LASS RIGID BAR REAR SEATBELT MASS CCOOSNTZA SPOTWELD BEAM JODST RUSS ELEMEN I INERTIA HOLLOW TUBE ISOPARANMIETRIC SHELL RIGID BODY RBE SPOTWELD CREATE BEAM ELEMENT CBAR NASTRAN Description This section covers the options for the BEAM ELEMENT subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER CBAR OFFSET VALUE 2 Once offset value has been entered the prompt will read gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR CBAR ELEMENT e Tocreate the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three 3 Once the desired nodes points have been selected VPG prompts gt PICK NODE PT OR VECTOR FOR CB
90. that is not connected via rigid elements or a node to node connection Usage 1 VPG prompts SELECT OPTION CHECK PART CHECK ASSEMBLY ERIT 6 103 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e EXIT returns the user to the model checker menu e CHECK PART or CHECK ASSEMBLY prompts the following 2 VPG prompts gt XXXX PARTS UNCONNECTED UNCONNECTED PARTS TURN ON CONNECTED PARTS TURN OFF The user returns to the MODEL CHECKER menu 6 5 23 NORMAL ALIGNMENT Description This function allows the user to check normal alignment Usage 1 VPG prompts SELECT THE TYPE OF ELEMENTS RIEIB LIHE SPRING ELEMEHT e EXIT returns the user to the model checker menu e RIGID LINK or SPRING ELEMENT prompts the following 2 VPG prompts ENTER TOLERANCE ANGLE DEFAULT IS 8 0 DEGREES e Any real number is a valid entry e If there are no failed elements VPG prompts ALL ELEMENTS PASS CHECK e lf there are failed elements VPG prompts gt XXXX ELEMENTS FAILED CHECK gt ADJUST THE NORMAL FOR RIGID LINK SPRING ELEMENTS AUTOMATICALLY Y N YES NO f NO is selected VPG prompts INCLUDE FAILED ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N YES NO 6 5 24 ENHANCE MESH Description The ENHANCE MESH function allows the user to correct modeling errors by evaluating and repairing several quality parameters simultaneously The ENHANCE 6 104 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR MESH function may be applied to complete
91. the DUMMY MENU It should be noted that the FTSS Dummy models require an additional license obtained from First Technology Safety Systems in order to access the FTSS Dummy models 7 6 1 FTSS DUMMIES FTSS HYBRID 50 Dummy Model 7 65 m E F Faj E x Q4 T 4 i FTSS HYBRID 5 Dummy Model eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 FTSS HYBRID 95 Dummy Model FTSS 3 Year old Child Dummy Model 7 6 2 LSTC DUMMIES LSTC Deformable 50 Dummy Model 7 66 VPG MODULES FTSS SID II Model FTSS 6 Year old Child Dummy Model LSTC Deformable 95 Dummy Model eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 LSTC Deformable 5 Dummy Model LSTC Deformable 50 Dummy Model 7 6 3 ETA DUMMIES ETA ECE SIDE Model 7 6 4 CREATE DUMMY MODELS 7 67 VPG MODULES LSTC Rigid 5 Dummy Model LSTC Rigid 95 Dummy Model ETA US SIDE Model eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES Description This command imports and positions a finite element dummy model into the current model database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK TEST POINT H POINT FOR THE FTSS50 DUMMY 2 DUMMY ASSEMBY wr er Windies o DUMMY ABSEMBY RHOHE ROTATION AWELE ROTATE RiMIHD Ur rp RIEHT LEFT REJECT ASSEMBLY urb LAST PART BH UFF EXIT The user may adjust part altitude in the dummy then press exit to end the adjustment procedure 3 VPG prompts gt DO YOU NEED A SEATBELT 7 68 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES HECE SEATHELTT
92. the File being directly sent to 5 18 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 5 File Manager the printer 5 9 3 ORIENTATION This function sets the page orientation as landscape or portrait 5 9 4 COLOR TYPE Select the drop list beside Color Type to select a color type 5 9 5 POSTSCRIPT There are two levels Level 2 is the default setting Level 1 should be selected when using an older model PostScript printer 5 9 6 RUN LENGTH ENCODE This option reduces the Postscript file size Usually the reductions are dramatic for PS Level 1 this is automatically turned off 5 9 7 ASCII85 ENCODE This option reduces the Postscript file size Usually the reductions are dramatic for PS Level 1 this is automatically turned off 5 9 8 BINDING OPTION This function leaves binding space along the top or left margins of the print and selects non Binding space 5 9 9 REVERSE VIDEO This function reverses the black and white colors image in some cases This feature affects only the background of the image 5 9 10 BOUNDING BOX This function draws a line frame around picture s border 5 9 11 TIME STAMP This function prints the current time at the lower right corner of the picture file 5 19 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 5 File Manager 5 9 12 FILE NAME This function prints the file name at the lower right corner of the picture 5 9 13 eta VPG This function prints eta VPG logo at the lower left corner of the picture 5 9 14 SELECT REGION This function allows the u
93. the body stop condition works on the relative global translation Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION e The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the L S DYNA User s Manual Section 25 for further description 6 197 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 15 SUPERELEMENT NASTRAN The functions in the SUPERELEMENT S E menu allow the user to assign and modify SUPERELEMENT I D numbers within a VPG database field 9 of a NASTRAN bulk data GRID card The following options are available in the SUPERELEMENT menu SUPER ELEMEHT ASSIGH RESIDUAL ASSIGN E ID CHA CE 5 E IB IDENTIFY HODE POIHT IDENTIFY S E ID VIEW EXIT A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections Note The SUPERELEMENT option does not appear in the PRE PROCESSING MENU when the analysis software is LS DYNA 6 15 1 ASSIGN RESIDUAL Description This function allows the user to assign a residual I D number to selected nodes displayed in the VPG database SUPERELEMENT I D 0 Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT AN OPTION FOR RESIDUAL gt E EXIT INDEPENDENT D DEPENDENT S SELECT HBEPEHBEHT HODES DEPEHDEMT HODES SELECT HODES e f the user selects INDEPENDENT NODES VPG automatically assigns a residual I D number to the independent nodes of all the displayed RBE2 and HBAR elements e Ifthe user enters SELECT NODES VPG assigns a residua
94. the opposite of the window automatically to continue the operation WINDOW ZOOM The user defines the corners of the zoom window by positioning the cursor on the display screen The user presses and holds the left mouse button and drags the cursor diagonally until the desired window size is reached Releases the left button the area included in the window will be displayed in full screen 6 FREE HAND ZOOM The user defines a free region by pressing the left mouse button and dragging the cursor on the display screen to define the region Releases the left button the area included the region will be displayed in full screen nc X CD FILL Rescale the model to include all entities that are currently displayed FILL automatically zooms in or out until the model fits the viewing area of the screen o TOP VIEW Automatically displays the model from the TOP or in the XY plane KL Y Z VIEW Automatically displays the model from the RIGHT or in the YZ plane a X Z VIEW Automatically displays the model from the LEFT or in the XZ plane 9 12 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING fr Q ISOMETRIC VIEW Automatically displays the model from the isometric plane 60 degree isometric E CLEAR Remove the highlighted entities from the screen zt IDENTIFY NODE This function enables the user to identify any node by cursor selection default or key in node number The program labels the node number of the selected node
95. the plate elements 6 3 7 ELEMENT TYPE Description Defines element type prior to utilizing the 2 3 4 LINE MESH or SURFACE MESH Element types are as following QUADRILATERAL TRIANGULAR THELL SOLID 6 3 8 IDENTIFY ELEMENT Description This function allows the user to identify an element and its nodes by cursor selection Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENT BY CURSOR e VPG identifies the element s respective type number part and nodes The selected element will be highlighted and element and node numbers will be displayed in the dialogue window e The user also has the option to key in the number of a desired element to identify its location and characteristics e t will also identify 6 58 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR CONNECTOR CELAS2 SPRING Eus frome me we mm m mm pe me 00 qua 0 00 6 3 9 LABEL Description This function toggles the element label on or off When LABEL is executed and parts are turned ON the screen displays the elements and the element ID numbers in the database Usage 1 Depending on the current state of the toggle VPG prompts either ELEMENT NUMBER WILL BE LABELED or ELEMENT NUMBER WILL NOT BE LABELED When ON the element labels are superimposed on their respective elements The elements displayed with their element numbers 6 59 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 3 10 MIRROR Description This function allows the user to reflect a c
96. the top ply side wall and the wheel hub and T is a temperature assumed to be constant during the simulated testing process The finished VPG Tire model contains a total of 2441 nodes and 2264 elements including 1304 shell elements and 960 solid elements The TIRE MENU allows the user to generate tire models with user defined characteristics TIRE H DBEL OLEATE UPE TIRE CREATE COMPOSITE CELA DIREET HATHIX BELETE TIRE MODEL DIFF TIRE MODEL EXIT A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 7 24 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 3 1 CREATE VPG TIRE Description This option allows the user to generate VPG tire models based on user defined parameters Usage 1 VPG displays a pop up window with tire parameter data and prompts SELECT AN ITEM TO EDIT z qum ug D aani THE PRESBURE TEE HUBER i TRE Pll OTH OI e aE 2 When the user has exited the tire parameter window VPG displays the tire cross section along with mass and pressure values and prompts gt PROCESSING ELEMENT AND NODAL DATA gt DO YOU ACCEPT THIS TIRE PROFILE Y N ABORT a YES returns the user to the tire parameter window 3 If the user accepts the tire profile VPG prompts gt DEFINE WHEEL CENTER LOCATION FOR TIRES 7 25 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES i LI rmm 4 Once the tire location is defined VPG displays the tire material density and tire model gt TH
97. then the user selects three points on the line to define the plane A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 15 3 Once the desired coordinate system is acquired it will be displayed on the screen and the prompt will read gt ACCEPT YES NO 4 Ifthe user selects YES then VPG prompts gt ENTER OFFSET DISTANCE IN UV PLANE OR 1 TO EXIT The user enters a positive distance and an arrow appears at the beginning of the line 5 VPG prompts gt ACCEPT OFFSET DIRECTION YES NO e YES creates a line in the displayed direction at the specified distance e NOcreates a line opposite the displayed direction at the specified distance 6 12 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 1 14 PROJECT Description This function projects lines and or points onto selected surfaces Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SURFACE 2 Once the desired surfaces are selected click on DONE VPG prompts the user to create choose a coordinate system gt DEFINE PROJECTION VECTOR gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN 3 After accepting the coordinate system VPG prompts gt SELECT ENTITY FOR PROJECTION 4 Based on the selected entity lines points are projected onto the surface Ifthe point or points on the line do not intersect the surface along the global Z or W vector VPG displays a message gt NO PROJECTION FOUND FOR XXXX POINT 6 1 15 RESPACE LINE Description This fu
98. to create a VPG model in an automated procedure A detailed description of each of these processes is available in the VPG Structure Tutorial 1 Generating a Front Suspension Model The user begins by selecting a front suspension model from the SUSPENSION MENU The user determines the desired optional components such as stabilizers and steering system types and enters the node coordinates for suspension geometry Next the user will be prompted to edit the default spring stiffness damping coefficients extra node coordinates default mass center of gravity and inertia moment Once the user has edited the default suspension values the suspension will be displayed on screen Details on generation of Suspension models and the types of suspensions available for generation through the VPG template system may be found in Chapter 7 Section 2 2 Generating a Rear Suspension Model 3 8 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 3 Getting Started The rear Suspension is generated in the same manner as a front Suspension 3 Generating Tire Models After entering the TIRE MENU the user selects GENERATE and is offered the TIRE PARAMETER dialogue box Default values for tire geometry mass and inflation pressure are edited to the user s parameters Once the tire geometry is defined VPG prompts the user for the location of the tire The spindle of one of the suspensions is selected and the tire is attached The user then selects the other three spindles in clockwis
99. vehicle system NVH analysis and ride and handling analysis For more information on suspension definition see the eta VPG Applications Manual Section 1 3 Currently two Front and six Rear Suspension types can be auto generated SU SPEHSIDH LIH HEHU CRERTE DELETE TRANSLATE MODIFY BUSHING MEHI READ ADAMS PRE REPLACE PART MODIFY HARBP IHT H DIFY BUSHING VISUALIZE SUSPENSION LOADING BMALYSIS ERIT A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 7 2 1 CREATE Description This option allows the user to define and auto generate suspension models Usage 1 VPG prompts gt GENERATE SUSPENSION MODEL gt ENTER COMMAND 7 10 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 2 Depending on the suspension type VPG will display one or both of the following two tables The first table displays suspension specific options such as stabilizers springs and attachments and is only necessary for some suspension types VPG prompts gt MODIFY SUSPENSION OPTIONS e When the user has finished altering the data and has selected OK VPG forwards the user to the next suspension table on the following page 3 VPG prompts MODIFY GEOMETRY DATA e When the user has finished altering the data and has selected OK VPG prompts gt ACCEPT THESE GEOMETRY DATA Y N e YES forwards the user to the next suspension table step 4 e NO returns the user to the SUSPENSION GEOMETRY table 7 11 eta VPG 3 0
100. which the user may insert the values for the element properties 6 12 6 CREATE LS DYNA Description This function allows the user to create define a property Once a type is selected its definition property VPG first displays a list of section types 44 PLSIL 1 PEREK 2 PEREL d PELBOHE amp PEERH 5 PEERHL PEEHD 7 P BUSH H P RUSH IO 9 POMP 10 PDRHP Ti PELA3 q2 PGAP 13 PLFLAHE 15 PRBD 16 PSHERR 17 FSHELIL 18 F5BLID 19 PTBHBE To create a card is displayed and the user can edit the card for the desired properties 6 171 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e The SELECT SECTION TYPE menu is as following BEAMS DAMPERS SPRINGS SEATBELTS SHELLS SHELLS MLE OLID SOLID FLUID SPH THICK SHELL e Ifthe user enters BEAMS the BEAM SECTION OPTIONS a menu pops up as follows IHTECRATEB POE SUL TAHT DISCRETE TRUSS SPOTWELD 6 12 7 DELETE NASTRAN Description This function deletes selected element properties from the database Usage 1 VPG prompts the user for the target property name gt SELECT SECTION LIST OF PROPERTIES WINDOW MULTI PT REGION SELECT ALL UNDO ALL UNDO EXIT 2 After the part is selected VPG displays the part in gray The following message is issued gt SECTION ID X IS SELECTED e fthe user enters EXIT VPG deletes the property and changes the color of the part from gray to white White indicates that the part does not have prope
101. will be displayed on the screen and the prompt will read gt ACCEPT Y N A 3 If accepted VPG prompts gt ENTER RAD TH1 TH2 INC e RAD radius of arc e TH1 beginning point of arc or circle e TH2 ending point of arc or circle INC angle increment between points default is 5 degrees e Any real value greater than zero is valid i e 100 0 360 10 is a circle with a radius of 100 units with an increment of 10 degrees between points An arc and a circle have been generated with the same center 4 VPG prompts gt SAME CENTER AND PLANE YES NO EXIT e Do you want to create another circle arc using the same center and plane e YES returns the user to step 3 NO returns the user to step 1 EXIT exits the function 6 1 3 ARC TANGENT 2 LINES 6 4 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Description This command allows the user to create an arc tangent to 2 lines The arc will be included in the CURRENT PART see PART CONTROL MENU The tangent arc will trim the two intersecting lines Usage Arc tangent to two lines 1 VPG prompts for a line gt SELECT LINE 1 2 VPG prompts for a second line gt SELECT INTERSECTING LINE 3 VPG prompts gt ENTER RADIUS OF ARC OR 1 TO EXIT e Any real value greater than zero is valid e Anarc tangent to the 2 lines is drawn The lines need to be long enough to make actual contact with the arc but do not need to intersect 6 1 4 3 POINT ARC Description Thi
102. will create it VPG writes all mass information to the file and returns the user to the MASS MENU 3 If the file name is old VPG prompts gt WARNING FILE ALREADY EXISTS OVERWRITE Y N gt YES Overwrite the file with new data gt NO Exit and do nothing 6 18 3 CREATE MASS Description This function allows the user create a new mass element to the database For details please refer to Section 6 3 6 18 4 DELETE CONM2 Description This function deletes a selected individual or group of CONM2 elements Usage 1 VPG prompts DELETE CONM2 SELECT ELEMENTS User may select a CONM2 element with any methods DONE The selected CONM2 element will be deleted and VPG will exit this function ABORT Rejects selected CONM2 elements and exists the command 6 18 5 CONM2 PROPERTY Description The details of this function refer to Section 6 12 6 18 6 IDENTIFY MASS Description This function identifies a mass element CONM2 and provide X Y Z geometry and mass properties provided in the model unit system Usage 6 212 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENT BY CURSOR The user selects a mass element and VPG will display the information of this mass EXIT to MASS MENU 6 18 7 CALCULATE MASS Description This function calculates a mass center of gravity location and inertia properties for selected parts Parts must have a material property and thickness defined with a
103. window Users may select the parameters with the mouse button and enter new values through the keyboard The parameters are 5 8 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 5 File Manager ABAQUS specific Refer to the ABAQUS manual for more details 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER FILE NAME OR STOP TO EXIT e Enter a file name up to 24 characters Using the inp convention for ABAQUS files is suggested 2 If the file name already exists VPG prompts the following message gt FILENAME ALREADY EXISTS O K TO OVERWRITE Y N e YES will overwrite the existing file e N will prompt for a file name 3 If materials and properties have already been defined a CONTROL PARAM ETERS window will be shown and VPG prompts gt DEFINE MODIFY DATA SELECT AN ITEM TO EDIT e EXIT sends user to step 6 4 If there are no materials or properties defined in the database VPG prompts gt NO MATERIALS DEFINED IN DATABASE SELECT OPTION 1 SELECT GLOBAL DEFAULT e Defines one global material and one global property for the database 2 DEFINE BY PARTS e Assigns materials and properties to each individual part 3 IGNORE DEFINITION e Ignores material and property definition 4 EXIT 5 VPG prompts gt OUTPUT ONLY ACTIVE PARTS Y N e YES will only output the active parts parts that are turned ON e NOvwwill output all parts in the database 6 VPG prompts gt ENTER TITLE e The user can enter up to 60 characters 5 7 2 WRITE BINARY FILE This function
104. 0 18 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY length RBARS between the separated parts Common nodes between parts become new nodes once the parts are separated Usage 1 VPG prompts gt CREATE RIGID LINKS BETWEEN SEPARATED PARTS Y N YES creates a part called ZEROBAR in PART CONTROL that automatically contains all of the newly created RBARS 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT PART OR ALL SP A E 3 Ifthe user selects ALL PARTS VPG prompts gt XXXX tt of RBE2s RBE2S CREATED BETWEEN SEPARATED PARTS All modeled parts in the database separate from each other This includes PLATES SOLIDS CBARS CBEAMS CELAS1 CELAS2 ELEMENTS PLOTEL ELEMENTS CROD CTUBE ELEMENTS These entities do not separate RBE2 RBAR ELEMENTS CONM2 ELEMENTS CORD2R ELEMENTS 4 lf the user enters SELECTED PARTS VPG prompts SELECT PART TO SEPARATE PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART The parts separate from each other and VPG prompts gt XXXX of RBE2s RBE2S CREATED BETWEEN SELECTED PARTS 10 3 17 TRANSPARENT MODE Description This function makes selected parts transparent during the shading operation Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK A LINE L ELEM C OR PART NAME P OF A PART 2 The user makes the appropriate selection then enters DONE to exit the menu Note The user may adjust the degree of transparency in the SETUP menu refer to Section 10 4 10 3 18 VIEW Description The functions in the VIEW menu are used to adjust the
105. 0 3 22 Thickness Menu 10 3 23 CHECK CONTINUITY Description In order for the thickness to be calculated in a component the part must be continuous That is there must be no voids or breaks in the mesh The CHECK CONTINUITY command performs a Boundary Check to identify any mesh discontinuities 10 3 24 AUTO NORMAL Description The calculation method used to create nodal thicknesses requires that all elements be consistent with respect to normals This requires element connectivities to be defined in a consistent manner This function allows users to check the connectivity definitions for the components and reverse any elements that are inconsistent 10 3 25 CALCULATE Description This function executes a background process that uses component geometry material and thickness to calculate a nodal thickness and residual strain value 10 3 26 READ DYNAIN Description This function allows users to read a DYNAIN file from a previously executed LS DYNA metalforming analysis 10 3 27 SHOW THICKNESS Description This function allows the user to visualize the calculated thickness values via color fringe plots The thickness value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of the display area 10 3 28 REMOVE THICKNESS Description This function allows the user to remove previously defined thickness values obtained from a thickness calculation The user must then recreate a shell section o
106. 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO DELETE e All available MPC cards are listed in the MPC CARD LIST box MPC LIST Description This function lists the defined MPC cards in a pop up window Usage 1 VPG prompts LIST SET ONLY EXIT TO CONTINUE MPC MODIFY Description This function allows the user to simultaneously delete and recreate any MPC card Usage 1 VPG prompts SELECT CARD TO MODIFY 2 After the user selects an MPC card the BOUNDARY MPC DEFINITION window pops up and the user can modify parameters in the window 6 158 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 10 MATERIAL PROPERTY LS DYNA The functions in the MATERIAL PROPERTY MENU are designed to define and modify the material properties in the database Parts are displayed according to the color of their material definition Parts without material definition are displayed in white The functions in this menu are organized as follows MATERIAL PROPERTY RDD EROS IEN ASSTGH MATERTAL CHARGE COLOR EUPY CREATE DELETE DEFIME PROPERTIES ERASE UHREF MATL LIST MATERIAL COLOR ON OFF Ti OF F REHIHBER SHOW BUSH LH THERMAL MATL HEHU VIEW By switching solver code settings in the ANALYSIS PROGRAM command in the SETUP menu the user can assign and create materials that are solver code specific The user may assign and create materials at the beginning or at the end of a VPG session A detailed description of each function is given in the fol
107. 2 After selecting a set VPG prompts gt SETXIS SELECTED gt ENTER CARD DESCRIPTION 70 CHAR MAX e Once the note is entered the user is returned to step 1 6 7 14 CREATE ELEMENT Description This function allows the user to generate sets with unique element ID numbers The elements may be included in multiple sets Usage 1 The ELEMENT TYPE SELECTION window pops up as following cB amp m JcsHEam CHEAM JOTFIASICOUADA casEwn JCTFSABACOUADE _ CBLISH _JCTRARMOOLADR _ Causeio _ICT RA OOUADE CDMPH Je TR CDaMP jcTuBE _ CELAS1 _JPLoTE _ICELAS2 jPa Casp RE jecouwg _IRBES touan Joun _ crRoo 2 After the user selects element set type VPG prompts 6 119 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt ENTER NEW ELEMENT SET NUMBER X ORE TO EXIT e Any integer greater than zero 0 is valid e f the user enters an element set ID number already assigned VPG returns the prompt gt ELEMENT SET xxxx ALREADY EXISTS 3 After the user enters an element set ID number VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS e Select elements by the following methods MHORT CURSOR LOCATION EXCLUDE OM OFF KEY IA ELEM HARE HULTI PDIHT REGION PART SURFACE ELEHMEHT TYPE UIHDON FREE REGION REJECT LAST DOME e The user may press the left mouse button or type C to select the element nearest to the cursor e f the user selects the same element twice while creating a set VPG returns the prompt gt
108. 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Click CLEAR NODE CURVE from TOOL Pull down menu the node curve result will be removed from the display area 9 9 7 DEFINE ELEMENT CURVE Description This function allows the user to plot the result in a time history graph of the selected elements RESULT options selected 9 9 8 MODEL SUMMARY The function only works during Contour Animation with ELEMENT Description This function enables the user to display the statistics regarding elements and nodes in the model Figure 9 44 shows a sample model summary 9 41 Model Summar Humber af Parts Humber af Elers Humber of Modes Max Elem No Max Node Mo Beans TH Plates auad Plates Hexahedrons Wegez Tatras Figure 9 44 Model Summary eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 10 OPTION MENU The functions in this menu are shown in Figure 9 45 The user can customize the appearance in the graphic display window Option v Axis Iv Title M Logo C Normal Color Elem Orientation Figure 9 45 Tool Menu A detailed description of each option is given in the following section 9 10 1 AXIS toggle Description The XYZ coordinate system is displayed in the lower left corner of the display window This option allows the user to toggle the axes on off 9 10 2 TITLE toggle Description The title of the result file is displayed in the upper left corner of the display window This option allows the us
109. 5 18 CHECK SPRING Description This function checks spring elements for unconnected ends If unconnected elements are found a mass value can be entered to create mass elements at the free ends automatically 6 5 19 CHECK JOINT Description This function allows the user to check for loose joint elements Usage 1 VPQG prompts gt xxxx UNCONNECTED JOINT ELEMENTS FOUND gt INCLUDE FAILED ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N YES NO e f YES is selected the PART DEFINITION window pops up After clicking OK to close the window the user returns to the MODEL CHECKER menu e f NO is selected the user returns to the MODEL CHECKER menu 6 102 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 5 20 CHECK MASS INERTIA Description This function allows the user to check for loose mass and inertia 6 5 21 CHECK PENETRATION Description This function allows the user to check penetration Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT MASTER PART 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT SLAVE PART 3 The Penetration Check window pops up See the following figure Oj Repair parts locally 3 Mose en re parts m Fenealralinn fa 000010 Max movernent 1D ODOR Check Pepcur Paced Exit 4 After setting parameters click Check VPG prompts gt XXXX ELEMENTS BE PENETRATED 6 5 22 CHECK UNCONNECTED Description This function allows the user to check unconnected parts or assemblies Unconnected parts are defined as any shell or solid mesh
110. 6 78 ee 25d A HL31 764 1 Y a ET UPOST nh ee ETHER ura 317 2 PEN 251 GS Figure 9 62 List Node Value 5 Atthe same time another Control Option Window appears shown as Figure 7 2 10 The functions control the number and position of nodes listed and which nodes should be listed 9 52 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Control Option Highest List lp List per Page List Position Figure 9 63 List Value Control Option HIGHEST The set of nodes with highest value are listed NEXT HIGHEST The set of nodes with next highest value are listed NEXT LOWEST The set of nodes with next lowest value are listed LOWEST The set of nodes with lowest value are listed SET LIST NUMBER The function prompts a data control window that allows the user to enter the number of the listed nodes SET LIST POSTION This function allows the user to place the list window by the cursor pick Other functions are common with those the SECTION DEFORMATION VECTOR The functions in this menu animate the transient analysis results in real time and are used to display the results of individual steps with the vector The options are shown in Figure 7 3 1 9 53 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING verior Operation Uis placement Currant Layer Curnenid Caormmpaneris LAE Ln F z Undaform By Elem Size Scale Factor 1 0 Contour Seting w Reset 0 000000 0 003416 0 006631 JU uTudz48
111. 6450 aate eo 8M zd E POMT s imat asoan sano omai moan sem m o J m m n mam a M L oa orem a eet saag waur jenio negas wem POAT 44 1581 E1 I T4753 E33 IS Lu B mes HIE IARD DPONT iz tangs enom sno iasa pom sam oF _ Mri J When the user has finished altering the data select OK 7 2 8 MODIFY BUSHING Description This option allows the user to modify defined suspension models bushing definition from the VPG database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK A BUSHING TO MODIFY SUSPENSION 7 20 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES e Once a bushing from the suspension is selected the definition window is displayed as shown m BILE CI T F MATERIAE DEFINITION ITEMS DATA CAPE DEECRIFTICAN pss 55 FA pcr TAAA LAT L SFr FATE i Y HR HEVE FACIL ARES TRANG LATION BREUI FATE Y UP i LAL LZ RETI TRAAS LATOR EFFITAD MATEY COMICAL Cass SOTA O maL SP FATE 5 aa DNE COBICA r AXES ROTATIONAL SPRING FATE 7 05 V OEE ia Far jaa PRR LATIO Fel Lid rdc RATE y TOX22nE REAL 2 A9IT TRA LATIONAL TAPS AATE CONCI pedas PROTATIO Kal Daa red ARETE e When the user has finished altering the data select OK to accept this change or select cancel to quit 7 2 9 VISUALIZE SUSPENSION Description This option allows the user to visualize a suspension and change part color VPG will create temporary surfaces that can be shaded for vi
112. ADIOSS OUTPUT Y N e f YES is selected the RIGID BODY information will be loaded with the output file The user can then load the RADIOSS input file DOO e f NO is selected VPG will prompt gt ADJUST RIGID BODY PRIMARY NODES BY VPG Y N eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 5 File Manager e YES will locate the RIGID bodies and recalculate the rigid body primary node locations e NOvwill finish the input sequence without modifying the model information VPG creates some default materials and element properties for elements that are lost during the file reading These are assigned to the part DEFAU s VPG creates a node set element set material set property set and interface contact set for boundary conditions interface rigid walls time history etc VPG can read multiple RADIOSS input files into the same database 5 6 1 9 READ SUSP ADAMS Section J of the Appendix gives a complete description of converting ADAMS models to VPG Please refer to that section when converting an ADAMS suspension 5 7 EXPORT This function allows the user to output from the current database The options are similar to the options mentioned above See Figure 5 7 1 Lookin C vpg vPG 2004 04 D2 VPG3 0 V RS File Mame Export File Type L SD TNA dyn W Cancel Figure 5 7 1 Export file Window A detailed description of each file export function is given in the following section 5 7 1 WRITE ABAQUS FILE VPG displays the CONTROL PARAMETER
113. ANALYSIS menu directs the user to the INIT COND CARDS menu in the pre processing BOUNDARY CONDITIONS menu See Section 6 8 of this manual 8 3 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 8 ANALYSIS EXECUTION 8 9 DEFINE CONTACTS Description DEFINE CONTACTS allows the user to create apply and modify contact interfaces within an LS DYNA model By selecting DEFINE CONTACTS on the ANALYSIS menu VPG directs the user to the CONTACT INTERFACE menu in the pre processing menu See Section 6 13 of this manual 8 10 DEFINE CURVE Description The DEFINE CURVE function on the ANALYSIS menu allows users to define load curves for use in LS DYNA analyses This function is described in detail in Section 10 4 8 of this manual 8 11 DYNA INPUT FILE OPTIONS Description This function allows the user to define the analysis unit and the portion of the model that is to be exported into an LS DYNA input file The user may also add comments to the model describing the Analysis Title Engineer s name and the Project Name SIDYNA INPUT FILE OPTIONS Jol xj ANALYSYS UNIT CURRENT avo TEM Full Model uj Active Parts Only Input File Nama Cuvpg VPG 2004 D4 OS VPG3 0 1 dyn Analysis Title me Engineer s Mame eeR Project Mame OK Figure 8 2 Write DYNA Input File Window 8 12 RUN ANALYSIS Description The user may elect to execute the analysis directly from within the VPG user interface By selecting this option prior to sele
114. AR ORIENTATION e Up to three values may be entered to define a vector in the bar s local XY plane The local Y axis of the bar will be plotted at the first node of the bar element as it is generated 4 If user enters VECTOR then VPG prompts 6 42 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt ENTER CBAR VECTOR e i e 0 0 1 CREATE RIGID LINK RBE2 NASTRAN Description This section covers the options for the RIGID LINK subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER DEPENDENT D O F DEFAULT 123456 OR 1 TO EXIT e Any combination of integers 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 may be entered as degrees of freedom e Blanks or commas are not allowed between the degrees of freedom i e 123456 all D O F 2 Next VPG prompts for nodes points for element gt PICK NODES POINTS gt AT INDEPENDENT NODE e Tocreate the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three 3 Once the desired node or point has been selected VPG prompts gt AT DEPENDENT NODE e The user may select up to 200 dependent nodes 4 Once the user picks the dependent node s DONE registers the selection and restarts the prompt cycle CREATE PLOTEL ELEMENT NASTRAN Description This section covers the options for the PLOTEL ELEMENT subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS PLOTEL elements are used as the cross section pattern for the DRAG MESH operation Usage 1 VPG prompt
115. AR or in the YZ plane PI ISOMETRIC VIEW 2 11 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features Automatically displays the model from the isometric plane 60 degree isometric g CLEAR Removes the highlighted entities from the screen zt IDENTIFY NODE This function enables the user to identify any node Y IDENDFIY ELEMENT This function enables the user to identify any element DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO NODES This function enables the user to calculate the distance between two nodes Ed ANGLE BETWEEN THREE NODES This function enables the user to measure the angle between two vectors formed by three nodes 2 8 MOUSE FUNCTIONS All VPG functions are accessible via selection using the left mouse button To access a function the user selects the desired button using the mouse Frer Rotations pointer and presses the left mouse button This button is also n T l l Pan used for selecting definition cards locating the cursor in definition 144 cards creating drag windows locating points nodes elements Clear Active Window Umn DFE Uirtwal X Rotation with commonly used model manipulation functions See Figure Wirtwal Rotation Virtwal 2 Rotation Scrgpen Rotation La chapters Fixed Uiews etc Theright mouse button activates a floating pull down menu 2 6 1 All functions on the menu will be described in following Figure 2 6 1 Floating Pull Down Menu accessed via Right Mouse Butto
116. CARDS GLOBAL Description This function defines global constraints Usage 1 When CREATE is selected the CONSTRAINED GLOBAL DEFINITION window pops up e The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS JOINT STIFFNESS Description This function defines joint stiffness for joints defined by the previous option Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION FLEX TON TORS I UH FE HERAL I PED e The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the L S DYNA User s Manual Section 4 23 for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS LINEAR 6 135 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Description This function defines linear constraint equations between displacements rotations which can be defined in local global coordinate systems Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 4 35 for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS LAGRANGIAN SOLID Description This function couples Lagrangian mesh shells solids or beams to the material points of a Eulerain flow master This option may also be used to model rebar in concrete or tire cords in rubber The slave part or slave part set is coupled to the master part or master part set Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 4 34
117. DULE removes highlights 6 2 19 SWEEP SURFACE Description This function allows the user to create a surface via the selection of a section line and a direction line The surface is generated along the length of the direction line C DIRECTION PATTERN Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a sweep type gt SELECT SWEEP TYPE NORMAL SWEEP e The section lines remain perpendicular to the line of direction RIGID SWEEP The section lines remain parallel to the line of pattern 2 VPG prompts the user to select a line gt SELECT A LINE FOR THE SWEEP PATTERN 6 28 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR The selected line will act as a constant cross section for the new surface 3 Once the line has been selected VPG prompts gt SELECT ALINE FOR THE SWEEP DIRECTION The new surface will generate along the selected line and the user will return to step 2 6 2 20 TRANSFORM Description This function allows the user to move or rotate a selected surface either locally or globally Usage 1 VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN VPG prompts the user to create a local coordinate system The user also has the option to select the global coordinate system Refer to Local Coordinate System Section 2 15 for a thorough explanation of this procedure 2 Once the desired coordinate system has been defined VPG prompts gt MOVE OR ROTATE M R MOVE gt ENTER U V W INCREMENTS
118. E mm Key in a tolerance value between the old part and the new part 5 VPG prompts gt REPLACE TARGET PART BY THIS PICKED PART Y N YES All connections were moved from the first selected part to the second selected part and the first selected part was deleted from the database NO will exit this function 6 17 9 DELETE REP PART SET Description This function allows the user to select a part set to replace an old part set move the connections from the old part set to the new part set and delete the old part set 6 209 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG prompts gt REPLACE PART SET SELECTED THE PART SET AS TARGET gt SELECT SET FROM PART SET LIST Select a part set to be replaced from the part set list 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT THIS PART SET AS TARGET Y N YES The selected part set will be replaced 3 VPG prompt gt SELECTED THE PART SET TO REPLACE JUST PART SET gt SELECT SET FROM PART SET LIST Select another part set from the part set list to replace the part set that has been selected 4 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE TOLERANCE VALUE mm Key in a tolerance value between the old parts and the new parts 5 VPG prompts gt REPLACE TARGET PART SET BY THIS PICKED ONE Y N YES All connections were moved from the first selected part set to the second selected part set and the first selected part set was deleted from the database NO will exit this function 6 210 eta
119. E MATERIAL XXXXXXX DENSITY IS XXXXXXXX Note For tire tuning procedures see the VPG Structure Tutorial sections 1 6 and 2 4 7 26 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 3 2 DELETE TIRE MODEL Description This option allows the user to delete the currently defined tire models Usage l VPG prompts DELETE TIRE BY ELEMENT PICK ii Once the tire is selected it is highlighted and VPG prompts DO YOU WANT TO DELETE THIS TIRE Y N ABORT jn If YES is selected the tire will be deleted 7 3 3 COPY TIRE MODEL Description This function allows the user to copy a tire model and its characteristics to a specific location Usage 1 VPG prompts CHOOSE A TIRE FOR COPYING BY PICKING AN ELEMENT 2 After selecting the tire VPG prompts DO YOU WANT TO CHOOSE THIS TIRE Y N ABORT 3 The user is then prompted for the location of the new tire Once entered the tire is copied to that location 7 27 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 3 4 CREATE COMPOSITE Description This option allows the user to auto generate composite tire models based on user defined parameters Usage 1 VPG displays a pop up window with tire parameter data and prompts gt SELECT AN ITEM TO EDIT Dishes 4 alja SECT NATH immi 125 cocoon aseecrmano aw RIMIAMETER decr 5 nuno RIM AETH nrt na or iva ELEWEHTI 10 UTRESD HEIGHT imm I Gocco LTRE amp D HEIGHT gre Dt BERI RATIO PR 56 DO T Wa ria
120. E TO LOCATE BODY BLOCK EDHTRDL KEYS BERT CURSOR AT MIDE KEY IH X V Z Select CURSOR AT NODE default and select a node from the part as target position BODY BLOCK 7 5 2 OCCUPANT SAFETY ECE REGULATIONS 7 5 2 1 ECE17 LUGGAGE INTRUSTION Description This function will import and position luggage blocks of the proper weight and dimensions for use in an ECE 17 Luggage Intrusion simulation Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER LUGGAGE INTRUSION INFORMATION 7 63 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES SDMIUDPBUDLEAT 2 VPG prompts PICK SEAT REAR END TO LOCATE LUGGAGE HORIZONTALLY Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as target position 3 VPG prompts PICK A TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE LUGGAGE VERTICALLY s E Jer c c r i Li P PHTH LUGGAGE 7 64 eta VPG 3 0 UN Lu E m O a gt Chapter 7 7 6 DUMMY POSITIONING VPG MODULES The functions in the DUMMY POSITIONING menu allow the user to auto generate dummy and seatbelt models from a library of dummy types and position them in the current database The data required for positioning of the dummy is the H Point of the occupant position FTSS MIHHY WYHH ID SIA HYBRID 5 HYBRID PFF S10 ls 3 YEMA CHILD amp YEAR CHILD LSTE DMN brr HMadi SE BEF RMABLE 5t BEFURPABLE 95 RIGID So RIGID 5 RIGID 95 ECE SIDE us SIDE ERIT The user may select any dummy from
121. E at emi l l 7 39 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 2 VPG prompts gt PICK A CRASH TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE ROOF CONTROL KEYS ABORT CURSOR AT ELEMENT KEY IM X Y Z H FF PART KEEP PART UHDO LAST 3 Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the roof rail part as target position The rigid plate is imported and placed in the location you have specified Proper contacts and velocity will also be defined in the model a a m unm Figure 4 An Example of a Generated FMVSS216 Roof Crush Model 7 4 5 5 FMVSS301 FLAT REAR IMPACT Description This function imports and positions rigid walls used to simulate an FMVSS301 Rear Impact test Usage 1 VPG prompts ENTER REAR IMPACT INFORMATION 7 40 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES REAR IMPACT DATA T 381 nae gan Input values and press OK 2 VPG prompts gt PICK VEHICLE REAR BUMPER TO LOCATE RIGID WALL 3 Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as the target position The rear rigid wall and a rigid road surface will be positioned in the desired locations Proper contacts and velocities will also be defined in the model E miu a Ld TECT a ii cee p p miN Li FELL i eie reenen Tractors A T imam dada i pi Sn ae z i Tu a Pfprrre Sit i ge zc aom DTI oor Ern nv Figure 5 An Example of a Generated FMVSS301 Flat Rear Impact Model
122. EFINE LOAD OPTION STATIC LOAD DYMAMIC LOAD HUHLIHEARR LUAKD TEMPERATURE FIELD 2 These options are described as subsections in the following pages LOAD STATIC LOAD Description This function defines and modifies static loads The loads may be used in the subcase definition Usage 1 VPG prompts to select option as following CRERTE DELETE LIST FORCE LIST PRESSURE HOD TF REMDUE FORCE REMDUE PRESSURE SHOW LOAD STATIC LOAD CREATE Description This function defines a new load set subcase definition Usage 6 145 The load set may be used in the eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 1 When entering CREATE VPG prompts to select option as following ERE FORCED FORCE GRAU MOHEHT 1 HOME HT e he user may enter an integer as the load set number If a load set with the entered number exists the user is prompted to enter a different integer e The user is allowed to apply pressure loads to the element centers in the VPG model Distributed element pressure loads are applied normal to the element surface Positive pressure loads are in the same direction as the positive element normal according to the right hand rule Negative pressure loads are in the opposite direction of the positive element normal LOAD STATIC LOAD DELETE Description This function deletes the selected load set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO DELETE e Available load sets are displayed in the
123. EFORE RESTART YES NO ABORT Figure 5 2 2 Save Prompt 5 3 RESTART This function allows the user to restart the current database from the last saved point VPG will prompt the user to save the current file See Figure 5 2 2 After that VPG will prompt the user to restart from a new database or the current one 5 2 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 5 File Manager RESTART WITH HEU DB YES NO ABORT Figure 5 3 1 Restart Database Select YES to open a new database The Open File Window appears Select NO to reopen the current database from the last saved point ABORT to cancel the operation 5 4 SAVE This function updates the current database The User may overwrite the existing file or create a new file at the execution of the SAVE command If the user chooses to overwrite the file all previous mode data will be overwritten and the current model configuration will be saved If the user chooses to create a new file the current database will not be updated and the current model configuration will be written to a new file with the database name provided by the user This file now becomes the current model database open in VPG 5 5 SAVE AS This function saves the current database as a new file See Figure 5 5 1 Lookin C vpg vPG 2004 04 D2 vPG3 D m so I steering contral vpg je test 1 vpg i until vog File Mame steering control vpg Gave File Type VP CP vag M Cancel Figure 5 5 1 Save Database As 5 6 IM
124. ELEMENT xxxx ALREADY PICKED If the user selects DONE VPG saves the set and prompts gt XELEMENTS INCLUDED IN ELEMENT SET X e If the user selects ABORT VPG deletes the set and forwards the user to the ELEMENT SET submenu Note Users may not assign the same ID numbers to both node sets and element sets 6 7 15 CURRENT ELEMENT Description This function lists the defined element sets in a pop up window The user can then select the current set from those listed Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM ELEMENT SET LIST 6 120 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR List of all element sets CURSOR AT ELEMENT EXIT 2 Once the set is selected VPG prompts gt SET X IS SELECTED gt ELEMENT SET X FLAGGED AS CURRENT SET 6 7 16 DELETE ELEMENT Description This function allows the user to remove element sets by ID number VPG is specifically configured to recognize element sets for this procedure For deleting element nodes refer to the command in section 6 7 4 Usage 1 VPQG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM ELEMENT SET LIST List of all element sets CURSOR AT ELEMENT ALL ELEMENT SETS UNDO EXIT 2 Ifthe user selects ALL ELEMENT SETS in step 1 VPG prompts gt OK TO DELETE ALL ELEMENT SETS Y N YES NO If YES VPG issues the following message gt ALL ELEMENT SETS DELETED FROM DATABASE e If NO VPG returns the user to the ELEMENT SET submenu 3 Ifthe user selects an individual element set i
125. ESSURE CFD SET Description This function defines pressure CFD set boundary conditions Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS PRESSURE OUTFLOW Description This function defines pressure outflow boundary conditions These boundary conditions are attached to solid elements using the Eulerian ambient formulation and defined to be pressure outflow ambient elements Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 3 17 for further description BOUNDARY CARDS RADIATION Description This function defines radiation boundary conditions for a thermal or coupled thermal structural analysis The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 3 19 for further description BOUNDARY CARDS SLIDING PLANE Description This function defines a sliding symmetry plane The option applies to continuum domains modeled with solid elements Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual 6 131 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Section 3 21 for further description BOUNDARY CARDS SPC Description This function defines nodal single point constraints After selecting CREATE NODE VPG displays the following dialogue box Once the DOF is determined in the dialogue box VPG prompts the user to select the nodes DONE finishes the selection and displays the nodes with their SPC set number m ILLI zl x Loca Conrdimale System Defew Saiti One Fr m The Folgwing j J
126. ETE HARDCOPY OPTIONS QUERY ANIME SALI EXIT eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY These options are explained in GRAPH Section 8 4 10 4 9 SHOW LINES Description This function identifies any existing line and its direction VPG highlights the selected line and marks its points with arrowheads that are oriented in the direction of the line 10 4 10 DATABASE STAT ISTICS Description This function displays statistics about the VPG database regarding geometry models materials and interfaces The figures are displayed in the following window IAT ARAS SEMEL Figure 10 4 10 Database Statistics Window 10 4 11 HARDCOPY DEFAULTS gt m EM Description This function allows the user to define the default settings for printing or saving image files Refer the detailed descriptions in section 5 9 10 4 12 SETUP DEFAULTS Description The SETUP DEFAULTS window contains various preprocessing utilities that are toggle switch activated See the figure below 10 30 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY Figure 10 4 12 Setup Defaults Menu A detailed description of each option is given in the following section MENU POSTITION Description Allow the user to change Menu position to left or right or right hand side of the display window based on the user s preference ANALYSIS PROGRAM Description This option adjusts the property and material data to match the selected parameters of the solver The d
127. FACE IS UNTRIM SURFACE 6 2 23 SURFACE SEPARATION Description This function separates the surfaces of a solid geometry into upper and lower surfaces and places them in new parts Usage 1 VPG prompts SELECT THICKNESS INPUT METHOD KEVEDDARD FROM A HID SURFACE EXIT 2 Once selecting thickness input method middle surface is done 6 35 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 2 24 SECTION CUT Description This function creates a cross section which may be saved as a geometric line entity Usage 1 VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN VPG prompts the user to create a local coordinate system The user also has the option to select the global coordinate system Refer to Local Coordinate System Section 2 15 for a thorough explanation of this procedure 2 Once the desired coordinate system has been defined VPG prompts gt ENTER PLANE TO CUT SURFACE UV VW UW UV PLANE VW PLANE UW PLANE 6 36 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 6 3 ELEMENT PRE PROCESSOR The ELEMENT menu contains the commands to create and modify elements and to instantly mesh IGES surfaces The 2 3 and 4 LINE MESH commands create plate elements via line data selection and the 6 8 9 and 12 LINE SOLID MESH commands create solid elements via line data selection Elements can be modified to suit a particular model with the MODIFY SPLIT and COARSE ELEMENT commands The commands in the ELEMENT menu
128. FMVSS 207 and FMVSS 210 requirements Usage 7 98 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER SEATBELT ANCHORAGE CRASH INFORMATION ITEM S BATA mMM BODY BLOCK CLEARANCE mim Oe nai Gangell TE 2 VPG prompts gt PICK A NODE TO LOCATE CENTER OF LOWER BLOCK CIMT KEYS Gmin aT ELEMENT MUT iM X Y 2 UM UFF FRET HEEP PRAT moO LAST 3 VPG prompts gt PICK A NODE TO LOCATE CENTER OF UPPER BLOCK 4 VPG prompts gt DEFINE A VECTOR TO MOVE SEATBELTS TRAHEF ORB EDITT UPPER BLOCH ELULRSE DPERATIUH KEV IH VECTOR OH OFF PART PREVIOUS MENU EXIT 5 VPG prompts gt DEFINE AN AXIS TO ROTATE SEATBELTS 7 59 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES B TATIBM UPPER BLOCK AIMER HLUEK MEUEKSE OPERATION ROTATION RHELE DEFINE AXIS an Orr PART FREUIENT HOME EXIT 7 5 1 3 FMVSS225 CHILD RESTRAINTS ANCHORAGE Description This function will create child restraints anchorage in the model Usage 1 VPG prompts ENTER CHILD RESTRAINTS INFORMATION HIT BRS Ta Se Le ITEWE p PAIA FORWARD PULL 1LATERAL PULL J NO DF CHILD SEAT ef E Cancel _ UE 2 VPG prompts PICK A NODE TO LOCATE FIRST SEAT LEFT SIDE CLAMP 7 60 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES CONTROL REVS niRT CURSOR AT ELEHEHT WEY IM X 2 DH FF PART KEEP FART UBD LAST Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select
129. G echoes the following message gt ALL ELEMENTS PASS CHECK e f any of the elements fail the model check VPG displays the following message with the option to create a new part gt XXXX ELEMENTS FAILED CHECK 2 Ifthe elements fail the model check after clicking Exit VPG prompts the user to place these elements into a new part gt INCLUDE FAILED ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N YES The PART DEFINITION window pops up e The failed elements will be removed from their original part and added to the NEW PART The new part will be ON and CURRENT NO e VPG prompts the user to check individual elements for interior angle via cursor pick Select EXIT to exit this function IAL VL UL The highlighted elements have failed the interior angle check 6 93 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 5 6 CHECK OVERLAP Description This function checks the elements for duplicate nodal connectivity All element types are checked Usage 1 CHECK OVERLAP ELEM e f no overlapping elements are found in the displayed elements the following message is echoed and the user is returned to the MODEL CHECKER menu gt NO OVERLAP ELEMENT FOUND e If duplicate elements are found in the displayed elements the following message will be echoed gt xxxx OVERLAP ELEMENTS FOUND VPG will continue with the option of adding these elements to a new part 2 VPG prompts INCLUDE DUPLICATE ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N YES The PART DEFINITION wi
130. GONAL NODE POINTS The user selects two nodes points in a diagonal fashion to define the active widow KEY IN XYZ RANGE The user defines the size volume of the active window by entering its global coordinates via the keyboard The user may also expand an existing active window by modifying any or all of its coordinates gt ENTER XYZ RANGE XMIN XMAX YMIN YMAX ZMIN ZMAX ACTIVE WINDOW IS OFF Turns off or deactivates the current active window SCALE ACTIVE WINDOW This allows the user to scale the current active window to a larger or smaller window gt ENTER SCALE FACTOR DRAG WINDOW The user defines the active window by selecting a two region diagonal on screen 10 2 ICON BAR The ICON BAR contains commonly used commands Database and Part control dansla Viewing manipulation Dy LI LI The user initiates the commands via mouse pick A detailed description of each function is given in the following section 10 2 1 DATABASE AND PART CONTROL O NEW FILE Allows the user to create a new database file For a detailed description see chapter 5 FILE MANAGER 10 8 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY OPEN FILE Allows the user to open a database file For a detailed description see chapter 5 FILE MANAGER E SAVE FILE Allows the user to save a database file For a detailed description see chapter 5 FILE MANAGER PRINT Allows the user to create a postscript file of display area and send the fi
131. HO LAST Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as the target position T LE LLL ETTE m N oF ri w E af Lizrn LIT DE 9i eee Da madii a L Figure 15 An Example of a Generated 0 Degree Pendulum Bumper Impact 7 4 7 6 BUMPER IMPACT PENDULUM Description This function will create a rigid pendulum in front of the vehicle Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER BUMPER CRASH INFORMATION 7 59 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES UFR TRPUT PATA E E Ee BUMPER STRUCTURE CLEARANCE mm VEHICLE VELOMTY meis 2 VPG prompts PICK A CRASH TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE BUMPER EDHTRIH KEYS ARNAT KEY IH X Y Z BGH FF PART EEEF PART BHDO LAST 3 VPG prompts gt DEFINE CONTACT NORMAL DIRECTION AGAINST BUMPER TEMPLATE DIRECTION ABORT KEY IM WEETUH HODES VECTOR SHELL HEKHAL SHELL REWERSE HOGHAL HDD LAST There are four approaches to define the normal direction e KEY IN VECTOR Manually key in a vector e NODES VECTOR Select two nodes to define a vector The head will align with the normal of the element e SHELL NORMAL selected e SHELL REVERSE The head will align with the reverse normal NORMAL direction of the element selected 7 56 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES EH h ee zzi Figure 16 An Example of a Generated 30 Degree Pendulum Bumper Impact 7 5 OCCUPANT SAFETY 7 5 1 FMVSS REGULATIONS 7 5 1 1 FMV
132. IN SCALING a Field Editing VP FORMULATION FOR RATE EFFECTS Push Button Figure 2 14 1 Card Definition Window 2 16 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features FIELD DESCRIPTION The field description indicates the value to be added to the editing field If the field description text is gray it indicates that the value entered in that field is dependent on another field that must be edited first EDITING PUSH BUTTON An editing button forwards the user through a series of prompts menus or cards that results in a valid value for the chosen field OK Accepts and saves the defined input data NEXT Forwards the user to the next input data window for this entity PREVIOUS Forwards the user to the previous input window for this entity CANCEL Exits without saving or defining the data ENTER Pressing ENTER at any time during input data definition accepts and saves the defined data 2 16 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM VPG refers to the local coordinate system to translate rotate mirror copy and generate points lines and nodes When such a function is selected the program will automatically prompt the user to generate a local system designated as the UVW coordinate frame One two or three reference points are required to establish a local coordinate system For a three point system the first reference point defines the local origin The second reference which extends from the first reference p
133. ING 9 2 GENERAL OVERVIEW The POST application interface varies slightly from the preprocessing user interface It allows the user to quickly access most functions at any time during the session The icon bar and menu bar functions behave in the same manner as the preprocessing functions eta Post breaks the screen into six distinct regions The regions are used to provide input or display messages to the user The six regions are illustrated and described in Figure 9 1 j E toh boets EN I f s m Iu Spi eem Menu Har veg T uL ETE Ld Lii LIPS mum pepo SbF a ui E TELE dr dram Gam Crer _Mrvarecat p ced nn T regum murs 7 bum reri T igre k L MN Messumne Window Figure 9 1 eta Post interface window GRAPHIC DISPLAY WINDOW Models and graphs are displayed in this window MENU BAR Commands and options are displayed in this area ICON BAR Provides the user easy access to the commonly used functions of the program 9 7 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING CONTROL WINDOW AREA Once the user selects a command from the MENU BAR or ICON BAR a corresponding dialog window with the appropriate functions is displayed in this area DISPLAY OPTIONS The options in this group are used to control the model displayed in the graphic display window These options are always displayed and can be used at any time during an eta Post session PROMPT AREA eta Post displays comments and messages to the user
134. L VIRTUAL Z ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the global Z axis when the cursor is moved up or down P SCREEN X ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the screen X axis when the cursor is moved up or down m SCREEN Y ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the screen Y axis when the cursor is moved up or down ey SCREEN Z ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the screen Z axis when the cursor is moved up or down Note Screen axis rotation uses the display screen as a plane of rotation The screen X axis is horizontal The screen Y axis vertical and screen Z axis is perpendicular to screen X and Y FREE ROTATION This function is a combination of SX and SY Moving the mouse up down manipulates SX Moving the mouse left right manipulates SY Moving the mouse diagonally combines the movements of both commands Clicking the left mouse button stops the rotation This function can also be activated by pressing Control and Left mouse button and exits by releasing left mouse button PAN This command enables the user to translate the model by following the movement of the cursor If the cursor is moved off the screen the cursor reappears at the center of the screen Clicking 2 10 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features the left mouse button stops the pan This function can also be activated by pressing Control and Middle mo
135. LY ACTIVE PARTS Y N YES NO e YES will only output the elements displayed on the screen e NO will output all elements existing in the database 9 15 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 5 File Manager 4 VPG prompts gt ENTER ANALYSIS TITLE e Any alphanumeric input up to 72 characters may be entered as the title of the NASTRAN bulk data file 5 7 9 WRITE PAMCRASH FILE This function allows the user to output a PAMCRASH pc data file directly from the VPG database 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER FILE NAME OR STOP TO EXIT e Enter a file name up to 24 characters 2 If the file name already exists the program will prompt the following message gt FILENAME ALREADY EXISTS O K TO OVERWRITE Y N e YES will overwrite the existing file e N will prompt for a file name 3 VPG prompts gt SELECT PAMCRASH VERSION 1 SEQUENTIAL 2 FREE NUMBERING gt DO YOU WANT TO USE KEYWORD INPUT Y N YES NO 4 VPG prompts gt OUTPUT ONLY ACTIVE PARTS Y N YES NO 5 VPG prompts for optional keyword cards via pop ups 6 VPG prompts gt ENTER TITLE e The user enters an alphanumeric title containing a maximum of 48 characters e VPG returns the user to the FILE MANAGER menu Note If the properties materials are not assigned to the parts in the database VPG prompts the user to define the properties materials by default by global default or by part Supported properties are listed in Appendix A VPG Capabilities for F E A
136. MA CMB e Any combination of integers 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 may be entered as degrees of freedom 1 translational along the global X axis 2 translational along the global Y axis 3 translational along the global Z axis 4 rotational along the global X axis 5 rotational along the global Y axis 6 rotational along the global Z axis e Blanks or commas are not allowed between the degrees of freedom i e 123 456 456 345 2 Once the desired D O F has been entered the prompt will read gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT e To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three e Once the desired nodes 2 or points 2 have been selected the element will be created e EXIT or ABORT will exit this function 6 46 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR CREATE MASS CONM2 NASTRAN Description This subsection covers the options for the MASS subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt DEFINE CONM2 ELEMENT COORDINATE SYSTEM 2 VPG prompts gt ENTER MASS VALUE AND MOMENTS OF INERTIA e VPG displays a pop up window with the following items 111 121 122 131 132 133 etc MOMENT OF INERTIA e The user may enter only the mass if desired The moment of inertia is an optional entry e The user should remember that the units of the CONM2 s should be consistent with the units of the database e g DATABASE MM CONM2 KG 3 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POIN
137. MATION 7 48 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES SIDE POLE DATA Cancel UE ITEM POLE STRUCTURE CLEARANCE mm 2 HOOD URE H VEHICLE VELOCHTY mms 2 VPG prompts PICK A CRASH TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE SIDE POLE CONTROL KEYS ABORT CURSOR AT ELEMEHT HEY IH X V 2 H FF PART KEEP PART UND LAST Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as target position 3 VPG prompts gt DEFINE CONTACT NORMAL DIRECTION AGAINST POLE TEMPLATE DIRECTION ABORT KEY IM VECTOR HODES VECTOR SHELL HORMAL SHELL REVERSE NORMAL UHI LAST There are four approaches to define the head direction e KEY IN VECTOR Manually key in a vector e NODES VECTOR Select two nodes to define a vector The head will align with the normal of the element e SHELL NORMAL selected e SHELL REVERSE The head will align with the reverse normal NORMAL direction of the element selected 4 Select SHELL NORMAL 7 49 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES Figure 11 An Example of a Generated Side Pole Impact Model uU TE 1 m O oO gt 7 50 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 4 7 3 IIHS 40 ODB FRONT Description This function will create ODB at the 40 front of the vehicle Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER IIHS 40 ODB CRASH INFORMATION IEH airs WH CRASH TATA i xi ITEMS DATA WEHICLE ODB CLEARANCE mm ERITIIITZEIT VEHICLE VEL
138. MENTS WILL BE ADDED TO PART xxxx part name gt SELECT ELEMENTS 3 he user selects the desired elements then enters DONE to exit the menu 10 12 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 3 2 ADD LINES TO PART Description This function allows the user to copy lines from one part to another part The part to which the lines are added does not have to be current or on Usage 1 VPG prompts SELECT TARGET PART PICK A LINE L AN ELEM C OR PART NAME P OF A PART 2 Once the user selects the target part VPG prompts LINES WILL BE ADDED TO PART xxxx part name SELECT LINES 3 The user selects the desired lines then enters DONE to exit the menu 10 3 3 ADD SURFACES TO PART Description This function allows the user to copy surfaces from one part to another part The part to which the surfaces are added does not have to be current or on Usage 1 VPG prompts SELECT TARGET PART PICK A LINE L AN ELEM C OR PART NAME P OF A PART 2 Once the user selects the target parts VPG prompts SURFACES WILL BE ADDED TO PART xxxx part name gt SELECT SURFACES 3 The user selects the desired surfaces then enters DONE to exit the menu 10 3 4 CONNECTING ELEMENTS Description This function is used to determine element connectivity from one part in the model to another Usage 1 VPG prompts SELECT PART FOR CONNECTING ELEMENTS PICK AN ELEMENT OR A PART NAME OF A PART part list
139. MESHING Y N 5 After entering YES VPG prompts gt ACCEPT MESH YES NO RE MESH 6 3 17 AUTO REPAIR Description This function allows the user to automatically repair mesh Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS e After selecting elements VPG automatically repairs the selected elements 2 Then VPG prompts gt ACCEPT REPAIRING RESULT YES NO 6 3 18 2 LINE MESH Description This function generates elements between two selected lines A rectangular pattern of N1 by N2 quadrilateral elements will be generated where N1 is the number of elements along the direction of the first selected line and N2 is the number of elements between the two lines Fora transition mesh it is possible to enter N3 and N4 parameters for the mesh each side may have a different number of elements e g 10 5 8 7 The nodes in the direction of N2 are generated by linear interpretation between the opposing nodes on the two lines A row of N2 quadrilateral elements is generated first from the starting end of line 1 to the starting end of line 2 The pattern will be repeated N1 times along line 1 The node sequence starts at the beginning of line 1 and follows the direction of line 1 with the right hand rule The created elements are included in the CURRENT PART The CURRENT PART should be verified before proceeding with this function Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICKLINE LINE SEGMENT allows the user to combine a broken line while selecti
140. MPOBENT Taws middle leyti a STE ONG ad 77278 i 24 4 H RERO OLI JEDE LUPE ER SNC J EEA n HC 2 2110E 002 1 BO 5E HHE i ERI HOLZ 3H nd TE at a En AUS LEMS iMi zii Figure 9 38 Example of Mirror Function Input L 5S ErTHA gun TL ica T 15 liec sit STH 1h TINE FTE oe COMPORENT Zaima middle layer a rs PEG ad 77279 IHE REL ED BELL LI EE ED L EE SNC 2 E54 BE i 22710 005 LENE e a 8 BRIDE HZ 3H ng eet a yip Hort it tage s pt iixME DE Figure 9 39 Mirror Results by YZ Plane Press the CLEAN MIRROR RESULT on the Control Option Window the mirror result is missing and the model is displayed as the original status 9 38 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 9 4 DEFINE ACTIVE WINDOW Description This function allows the user to isolate a Control Option portion of the displayed model for more detailed viewing or editing The user defines the desired area eta Post Select by Cursor displays the elements with the analysis result as active window Other objects on the screen will be masked and 9elect by wirid ow inactive Select by Polygon Select by Freehand The user can define the Active Window by Cursor Drag Window Polygon Freehand and Displayed See the Control Option shown in Figure 9 40 Click CLEAR ACTIVE WINDOW from the TOOL Pull down menu to remove the defined active window The program will display the whole model as the original status Figure 9 40 Define A
141. N ADAMS PRE SUSPENSION FILE IP TIS M ADAMS PRE SUSPENSION TYPES SUPPORTED ARE 7 2 6 REPLACE PART Description This option allows the user to replace parts This is useful for replacing rigid components with shell or solid mesh component models Through this REPLACE PART command existing part connections are retained and applied to the new part 7 19 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES Usage Ts VPG prompts gt SELECT TARGET PART TO BE REPLACED gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART When the user has finished picking a part and selects OK 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT FLEXIBLE PARTS TO REPLACE TARGET gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART When the user has finished picking a part select OK 7 2 7 MODIFY HARDPOINT Description When the user has read in an Adams Pre file this option allows the user to modify defined suspension geometry definitions from within the VPG database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT TO MODIFY SUSPENSION HARDPOINT e The MODIFY HARDPOINT window is displayed for user to modify hard point X Y Z positions CPPS Te Hake Ps X EFT YLEFT Z EFT X4UGHT RIGHT ZGUGHT LES 142291 6435 SORRY 142281 dea a uina IPOINT i mra aas emam omr a a a Te OPOINT 3 Fares cms38 aen mij 1707 am aen RO POWT a ELFE msm8 ase mugs T 455 TI OPONT al i03 7700 er sS THOU qu POMT T 1613 qe rd 6
142. NG OPTIONS submenu without removing any of the selected pressure loads LOAD STATIC LOAD SHOW Description This function shows the selected load set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO SHOW Available load sets are displayed in the STATIC LOAD CARD window LOAD DYNAMIC LOAD Description This function defines and modifies dynamic loads The loads may be used in the subcase definition Usage 1 VPG prompts to select option as following CREATE This function defines a new load set The load set may be used in the subcase definition 1 When entering CREATE VPG prompts to select option as following 6 149 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR RL ong LOADS TLORD4 TLOAD DL BAD EXIT e The functions DELETE LIST and MODIFY refer to STATIC LOAD LOAD NONLINEAR LOAD Description This function defines and modifies nonlinear loads The loads may be used in the subcase definition Usage 1 VPG prompts to select option as following CREATE DELETE LIST HOBTFY ERIT CREATE This function defines a new load set The load set may be used in the subcase definition 1 When entering CREATE VPG prompts to select option as following MOL THA HOLTH MOL DM HOLTH EXIT e The functions DELETE LIST and MODIFY refer to STATIC LOAD 6 150 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR LOAD TEMPERATURE FIELD Description This function defines and modifies tem
143. NOT IN DATABASE If the user selects a node number by KEYBOARD ENTRY that is not connected to a part VPG prompts gt NODE xxxx IS NOT CONNECTED TO ANY PART 6 4 14 PROJECT Description This function projects a node or group of nodes onto a plane surface s or mesh The nodes may be referenced or unreferenced referenced nodes would then project the finite element mesh Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT PROJECT OPTION EXIT F E MESH go to step 2 PLANE IN LOCAL UV go to step 3 SURFACE go to step 5 2 Option F E MESH gt gt SELECT PLATE ELEMENTS FOR TARGET SURFACE SELECT ELEMENTS ABORT exits without action DONE completes the operation and prompts the user to step 7 3 Option PLANE IN LOCAL UV gt gt gt 6 83 DEFINE PROJECTION UV PLANE CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN VPG prompts the user to create a local coordinate system to define the UV eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 84 plane A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 15 VPG prompts gt PROJECT NODES ALONG W AXIS Y N e YES go to step 9 e NO go to step 7 Option SURFACE VPG prompts gt SELECT SURFACE e ABORT exits without action DONE completes the operation and continues to step 6 VPG prompts gt PROJECT TO SURFACE ALONG THE NORMAL Y N e YES go to step 9 e NO go to step 7 VPG
144. NSLATE 7 17 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES Description This option allows the user to translate auto generated suspension models Its purpose is to allow the user to quickly align the auto generated suspension model with the F E body model for attachment Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT TO TRANSLATE SUSPENSION MOVE SUSPEHSIUH PICK TWO HODES IHCREHEHTAL ave WACO LAST ERIT e Once the two locations have been determined the suspension is moved with the second coordinate now occupying the first 7 2 4 MODIFY Description This option allows the user to modify defined suspension models from the VPG database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT TO MODIFY SUSPENSION e Once an element from the suspension is selected VPG prompts gt OK TO MODIFY THIS SUSPENSION Y N e YES Modify step by step the suspension model like in the create method The user returns to the SUSPENSION MENU e NO Returns the user to the SUSPENSION MENU 7 2 5 READ ADAMS PRE Description This option allows the user to read in 10 types of Adams Pre format suspension files to the VPG database Usage 1 VPG prompts READ ADAMS PRE MENU e The READ ADAMS PRE FILE MENU window is displayed for user to OPEN a fst rst database file 7 18 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES A Lpakin dC Anar pre Oo T J eS front fat Fig Mare 3 amp ront fst pari Fila Tii mit rel Care gt READ IN A
145. NT This function creates a postscript file of display area and sends the file to the printer default or to a file Prior to printing the postscript driver must be initialized to accommodate the eta VPG software The user can define the printing default See Section 5 9 5 17 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 5 File Manager 5 9 PRINT SETUP This function allows the user to define the default setting for printing of image files The options are shown in Figure 5 9 1 5 9 1 PAPER CUT The user can specify a given paper size and margin Standard paper sizes are supported such as 8 5 x11 11 x17 A4 etc HARDCOPY DEFAULTS isl 030000 x i Color None Figure 5 9 1 Printer Setup Select drop list at the right of PAPER CUT to choose a paper size Enter a number in the field beside PAPER MARGIN to define the shorter of the paper s two margins top and bottom Select the button beside Paper Length Unit to choose a unit in or mm cc Lu lt Z lt LLI Er LL 5 9 2 PRINTER The user can select a printer or select a format to print to a file Enter the printer name in field or select from the list below f Print To File is toggled on the user can choose a format by selecting the drop list beside Print File Format VPG supports postscript PS encapsulated postscript EPS GIF and JPG file formats Note When PRINT is selected the user will be prompted enter a file name instead of
146. NTROID AREA SLIDING INTERFACE ENERGY SLEOUT Description The user can plot the interface energy data from the sleout file The following types are available TOTAL SLAVE SIDE TOTAL MASTER SILE TOTAL ENERGY SPC REACTION FORCES SPCFORC Description The user can plot the SPC reaction force data from the spcforc file The following types are available X FORCE Y FORCE Z FORCE X MOMENT Y MOMENT Z MOMENT SUBSYSTEM STATISTICS SSSTAT Description The user can plot the subsystem statistic data from the ssstat file The following types are available KINETIC ENERGY GLOGAL KINETIC ENERGY SUBSYSEM 1 KINETIC ENERGY SUBSYSEM 2 KINETIC ENERGY SUBSYSEM 3 KINETIC ENERGY SUBSYSEM 4 INTERNAL ENERGY GLOBAL INTERNAL ENERGY SUBSYSTEM 1 INTERNAL ENERGY SUBSYSTEM 2 INTERNAL ENERGY SUBSYSTEM 3 INTERNAL ENERGY SUBSYSTEM 4 KINETIC ENERGY RATIOS 1 9 62 INTERNAL ENERGY RATIOS 2 INTERNAL ENERGY RATIOS 3 INTERNAL ENERGY RATIOS 4 X MOMENT 1 X MOMENT 2 X MOMENT 3 X MOMENT 4 Y MOMENT 1 Y MOMENT 2 Y MOMENT 3 Y MOMENT 4 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 9 KINETIC ENERGY RATIOS 2 Z MOMENT 1 KINETIC ENERGY RATIOS 3 Z MOMENT 2 KINETIC ENERGY RATIOS 4 Z MOMENT 3 INTERNAL ENERGY RATIOS 1 Z MOMENT 4 POST PROCESSING SPOTWELD RIVET FORCES SWFORC Description The user can plot the spotweld rivet force data from the swforc file The following types are available AXIAL SHEAR TEMPERATURE OUTPUT TPRINT 9
147. O ALIGN NODES 2 After selecting a line VPG prompts 6 75 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt SELECT NODES TO ALIGN 6 4 2 NODES BETWEEN PT NODE Description This command generates nodes that are spaced equally between two existing selected nodes or points The new nodes are displayed as unreferenced free nodes and are labeled with asterisks Usage 1 VPG prompts for each point node gt SELECT NODE POINT 1 HOPE PIHT REJECT LAST EXIT e EXIT returns the user to the NODE OPTIONS menu e The user can select the node nearest the cursor by pressing the left mouse button instead of typing the letter N e VPG prompts gt SELECT NODE POINT 2 2 VPG prompts gt ENTER NUMBER OF NODES BETWEEN TWO NODES POINTS e Any positive integer is valid 3 The user has the option to enter EXIT to terminate Asterisks represent unreferenced nodes that have been created between two existing nodes 6 76 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 4 3 CHECK DUPLICATE ID Description This function renumbers any duplicate node numbers found in the VPG database Users are unable to create duplicate node numbers from within the program However users may import files containing duplicate nodes from other programs VPG will renumber the duplicates according to the value of the maximum node number 1 Usage 1 If any duplicate nodes are found the following messages echo on screen and in the VPG msg user files located
148. OCITY mmis 1 787778E Dh VEHCLE WIDTH mm ei tans Z OF VEHICLE GROUND mm nasaan rann cancel om 2 VPG prompts PICK VEHICLE FRONT BUMPER AGAINST ODB RIGHT UP CORNER CONTROL KEYS ABORT CURSOR AT ELEHEHT KEY IH X Y 2 H FF PART KEEP PART WHO LAST Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as target position 3 VPG prompts gt ALL NODES ARE SLAVE TO RIGID WALL gt INFINITE SIZE PLANE IS DEFINED 7 51 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES Figure 12 An Example of a Generated IIHS 40 ODB Impact Model 7 4 7 4 AMS RIGID 15 DEG Description This function will create a rigid wall at the front of the vehicle Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER AMS WALL INFORMATION Cp Lu m O a gt 2 VPG prompts PICK VEHICLE FRONT BUMPER TO LOCATE RIGID WALL Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as the target position 3 VPG prompts ALL NODES ARE SLAVE TO RIGID WALL 7 52 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES gt INFINITE SIZE PLANE IS DEFINED BECCLDILIIILLSON Figure 18 An Example of a Generated AMS 15 Degree Offset Crash Model 7 4 7 4 BUMPER IMPACT 0 DEG Description This function will create a rigid bumper at the front of the vehicle Usage 1 VPG prompts ENTER BUMPER CRASH INFORMATION ZLHPEB DSPUT DATA 2 VPG prompts PICK A CRASH TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE BUMPE
149. OND POINT ON BOUNDARY e VPG splits the surface once the user selects the second boundary point UV LINES gt SELECT UV LINE TO SPLIT SURFACE EXIT 6 2 17 SECTION REVOLUTION Description This function creates a surface by rotating a selected section line the generatrix up to 360 about a vector the axis of revolution Usage 1 VPG prompts SELECT THE AXIS OF REVOLUTION gt SELECT THE FIRST POINT FOR THE AXIS ABORT LINE TWO POINTS e The user may select a line defined by only two points to be the axis of revolution TWO POINTS e Default REJECT LAST POINT UNDO EXIT e The user has been prompted to select the first of two points required to define the axis of revolution Once the first point has been selected VPG prompts gt SELECT THE SECOND POINT FOR THE AXIS e The user selects the second point then VPG displays a vector representing the axis of revolution gt SELECT A LINE AS THE GENERATRIX OF REVOLUTION LINE default SEGMENT allows user to combine line segments into one line REJECT rejects last selection DONE 2 VPG prompts 6 27 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt ENTER START AND END ANGLE DEFAULT 0 360 e The user may enter a desired start angle and end angle to generate a surface or press ENTER to generate a 360 degree angle 6 2 18 SHOW Description This function highlights the selected surface and UV lines in white color Choosing CLEAR in the VPG DISPLAY PARAMETER OPTIONS MO
150. OPEN Opens a result or model file i PRINT Creates a postscript file of the display area and sends it to the printer default or writes the image to a file Prior to printing the printer must be initialized to accommodate the print out from eta Post software a d PART ON OFF This function enables the user to turn the selected part s on off Once the function is selected the PART ON OFF dialog window is displayed shown as Figure 9 2 Fart Oneration Show Element Tyne F Bearri P Shell Koop Selected By A nid al Ad On All CT Reverse Undo Redo Exit Figure 9 2 PART ON OFF Window Note When PART ON OFF dialog window is displayed only VIEW OPREATION functions are enabled to use other functions are disabled User can select part to turn on or off by picking the part name in the part list There are several 9 9 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING other methods to turn part on or off as described below SELECT BY A PICK ELEMENT The part including the selected element is selected The element will be highlighted as the cursor moves over the part SELECT BY DRAG WINDOW This function allows the user to drag a window around the desired parts All parts including the selected elements are selected E SELECT BY MULTI REGION This function allows the user to select a multi point region all parts including the selected elements are selected Points are selected by clickin
151. PG allows is 0 01 units The user may increase the default tolerance as necessary The COINCIDENT NODE CHECK merges two nodes in a coincident node group into one node and retains the lower node number i e VPG combines two nodes that share the same location and renumbers the new node with the lower grid number VPG designates the higher grid number as unreferenced Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER TOL DEFAULT z0 01 e Any positive real number is a valid entry 2 After entering a tolerance VPG prompts the user to select the nodes to be checked gt SELECT OPTION FOR COINCIDENT NODE CHECK ALL HODES IM MODEL DISPLAYED HODES SELECTED HODES e EXIT Exits the user to the NODE OPTIONS menu without executing COINCIDENT NODE CHECK e After selecting one of the previous options or if no coincident nodes are found the user returns to the NODE OPTIONS menu e f coincident nodes are found VPG prompts gt XXXX COINCIDENT NODES FOUND gt MERGE COINCIDENT NODES Y N e YES merges the coincident nodes e NO returns the user to the NODE OPTIONS menu e Coincident nodes become unreferenced nodes and are represented by asterisks e Some or all of the unreferenced nodes may be deleted using the DELETE UNREFERENCED NODE option e VPG will not merge nodes belonging to the same element i e zero length elements with unique node numbers will not be merged avoiding the degeneration of the element 6 4 6 COPY Description Thi
152. PG s ability to create and assign material and element properties directly on a displayed model greatly reduces the amount of editing required Definition cards appear at specific junctions in the session prompting the user for material element properties Users also have the option to specify the analysis software NASTRAN LS DYNA RADIOSS PAMCRASH prior to assigning properties Contact Interface eta VPG seamlessly interfaces with LS DYNA allowing the user to create and assign impact sliding or automatic interfaces for VPG applications eta VPG displays contact properties in easily read and modified CONTACT CARDS with a high degree of speed and flexibility Boundary Conditions eta VPG s BOUNDARY CONDITIONS menu allows the user to quickly create and verify constraints and loads on VPG models Model Integrity Checking Functions The functions in eta VPG s MODEL CHECKER menu quickly validate models for element orientation size skew connectivity and interior angles Model validation default values are 2 3 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features easily adjusted to suit the user s needs Constraints eta VPG supports all LS DYNA Constraint Cards for quick easy definition and manipulation of joints welds rivets etc 2 3 POST PROCESSOR eta VPG integrates a general purpose complete post processor for data post processing of analysis result files Analysis results are seamlessly input from VPG s double precision LS
153. PORT This function allows the user to read CAD or model data See Figure 5 6 1 5 3 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 5 File Manager Lookin C vpgVvPG_2004_04_02VPG3 0 xd File Mame Open File Type S E T NA Cdyn mad dk M Cancel Figure 5 6 1 Import File Window 5 6 1 FILE TYPE Select the drop down selection in the FILE TYPE field to select the proper format The available formats are MODEL DATA FORMAT LS DYNA Nastran Abaqus Genesis Moldflow PamCrash Radioss CAD DATA FILE IGES LINE VDA DXF CATIA STEP Unigraphics SPECIAL MODEL FORMAT ADAMS ADAMS Pre A detailed description of each file import function is given in the following section 5 4 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 5 File Manager IGES igs iges LINE lir VDA wda das VF dsf CATIA4 model CATIAS CATPart STEP stp step Uc nrt L S D Y MA dm mad k NASTRAN dat nas Genesis dat ABAQUS inp PAMCRASH pc RADIOSS 000 MOLDFLOVY rfl ADAMS adm Pre susp fst rst Figure 5 6 2 File Format 5 6 1 1 READ CAD DATA A series of functions in this menu allows the user to read converted wireframe and surface data into VPG The supported file formats include IGES igs iges VPG lin VDA vda DXF dxf CATIA4 model CATIA5 catpart STEP stp step and UG prt In order to provide flexibility in accepting line data from different CAD systems VPG uses a
154. R 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS 2 Once desired elements have been selected DONE executes the command 6 3 15 SPLIT Description This function divides CQUAD4 and CTRI3 elements into 2 or 4 elements Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION FOR SPLIT ELEMENT 2 BD amp Qgnps 2 TRIAS TEIA 2 TRIAS TEIA a CUHBIHE TRIA amp TRIAS ARB TERRY LOCATION SOLED Th SOLIDS EXIT 2 QUADS splits a QUAD4 into two QUAD4s 4 QUADS splits a QUAD4 into four QUAD4s 2 TRIAS splits a QUAD4 into two TRIAs TRIA 2 TRIAS splits a TRIAS into two TRIA3s TRIA QUAD COMBINE splits a QUAD into a QUAD and a TRIA TRIA 4 TRIAS splits a TRIA into four TRIAs ARBITRARY LOCATION defines locators for splitting elements SOLID TO 8 SOLIDS splits a SOLID into 8 SOLIDs 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENT TO SPLIT CURSOR LOCATION MULTI POIKT REGION n PART REVERSE IEPERREIUM DRAG WIHDM URDD LAST DOME EXIT REVERSE OPERATION 6 63 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Reverses the split direction This option does not apply to group operations 6 3 16 SURFACE MESH Description This function allows the user to automatically mesh surface data VPG automeshes using 2D elements plate elements Supported surface types are covered in Pre Processor Section 2 1 of this manual The user has the option of automeshing by selecting one surface multiple surfaces or all of the displayed sur
155. R CONTROL KEYS ARIAT CURSOR AT ELEMENT KEY IH X T Z BH FF PART KEEP PART Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as target position 3 VPG prompts DEFINE CONTACT NORMAL DIRECTION AGAINST BUMPER 7 53 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 TEMPLATE DIRECTION ARNAT KEV IH VECTOR HODES VECTOR SHELL HORHARL SHELL REVERSE MORAAL UHOO LAST There are four approaches to define the head direction e KEY IN VECTOR Manually key in a vector VPG MODULES e NODES VECTOR Select two nodes to define a vector e SHELL NORMAL The head will align with the normal of the element selected e SHELL REVERSE The head will align with the reverse normal NORMAL direction of the element selected Prt i hele aa Pia p dta 2l En i 4 1 Li i Hs Wis EHI a LE 5 Ln E Ara HE Figure 14 An Example of a Generated Rigid Wall Bumper Impact Model 7 4 7 5 BUMPER IMPACT OFFSET Description This function will create a rigid pendulum in the front or rear of the vehicle Usage 1 VPG prompts ENTER BUMPER CRASH INFORMATION 54 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES BUMPER OFFSET DATA ITEMS 4r DATA ELIIMPER STRLICTURE CLEARANCE mm BUMPER VELOCITY mmis eerste VEHICLE BUMPER FRONT 1 REA 2 VPG prompts gt PICK A TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE PENDULUM COHTRIL KEYS ARIAT CURSOR AT ELEHEHT KEV IH X Y Z OH FF PART KEEP PART W
156. S KEY IM HODE HUMBER 6 199 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e Ifthe user selects ALL NODES VPG displays the numbers of the nodes at their node locations and returns the user to the NODE OPTIONS menu e If the user selects KEY IN NODE NUMBER VPG displays the corresponding node and echoes the following message on the command line gt NODE xxxx X x xxx Y y yyy Z 2Z zzz e Ifthe user selects NODE VPG displays the number of the node nearest to the cursor and echoes the following message on the command line gt NODE xxxx X x xxx Y y yyy Z 2Z zzz e If the user selects POINT VPG displays the number of the point that is nearest to the cursor and echoes the following message on the command line gt POINT xxxx Xzxxxx Y y yyy Z 2Z zzz e EXIT returns the user to the SUPERELEMENT OPTIONS menu 6 15 5 IDENTIFY S E ID Description This function allows the user to identify the SUPERELEMENT I D number of a selected node s Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES POINTS ALL MODES e ALL NODES displays the SUPERELEMENT ID numbers of the nodes e The user may select nodes randomly with the cursor to display the node and SUPERELEMENT I D numbers EXIT returns the user to the SUPERELEMENT OPTIONS menu 6 200 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 16 MASS MENU LS DYNA The functions of the MASS MENU are designed to add and modify mass properties in the database It is necessary sometimes to add masses to represent no
157. S DYNA User s Manual Section 3 24 for further description BOUNDARY CARDS TEMPERATURE Description This function defines temperature boundary conditions Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS THERMAL WELD Description This function defines thermal weld boundary conditions Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS USA Description This function defines USA boundary conditions Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 8 2 CONSTRAINT CARDS Description The functions in the CONSTRAINT CARDS menu provide a means of constraining the degrees of freedom in model parts COMSTAATHT CARDS MOAPTIULTF EXTAa HODES EEMERALIZED WELDS GLODAL MIHNT STIFFNESS LINEAR LAGHEHEIAH SOLID PORTS RICID BDDIES RIGIBBUDV STOPPERS RIVET SHELL TU SOLID TIE EREAE TIED NODES W FAIL Note All of these options share this standard submenu Only the CREATE command differs with respect to each function and will be explained in the following pages 6 133 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR CREATE e Defines a new card DELETE e Deletes a selected card or cards from those displayed in a pop up window LIST e Lists the cards in the option s database via pop up window MODIFY Similar to the CREATE command this command lists the defined cards in a pop up window and allows the user to select and modify them
158. S TARGET Y N YES The selected part set will be replaced VPG prompts SELECTED THE PART SET TO REPLACE JUST PART SET gt SELECT SET FROM PART SET LIST Select another part set from the part set list to replace the part set that has been selected 6 208 VPG prompts gt Select the replace connection type gt SELECT OPTION Select a kind of connection type or all types to be replaced VPG prompts eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt PLEASE INPUT THE TOLERANCE VALUE mm Key in a tolerance value between the old parts and the new parts 6 VPG prompts gt REPLACE TARGET PART SET BY THIS PICKED ONE Y N YES The selected connection type was moved from the first selected part set to the second selected part set NO will exit this function 6 17 8 DELETE REPLACE PART Description This function allows the user to select a new part to replace an old part move all connections from the old part to the new part and delete the old part Usage 1 VPG prompts gt REPLACE PART gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART Select a part to be replaced by choosing its name or an element of it 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT THIS PART AS TARGET Y N YES The selected part will be replaced 3 VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART Select a new part by choosing its name or an element of it to replace the part that has been selected 4 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE TOLENCE VALU
159. SS201 HEAD IMPACT Description This function will position a FMVSS201 Head Impact Head Form model in the VPG model database and apply appropriate boundary conditions It should be noted that the FTSS Head Form is available only to users who have a valid FTSS Dummy or Head Form License Agreement Usage 1 VPG prompts ENTER HEAD IMPACT INFORMATION FTRS HEAD POR DATA ITEMS HEAD FORMS TRUCTURE CLEARANCE HEAD FORM VELOCITY mmis Cancel 2 VPG prompts gt PICK MOST OUTSIDE SKIN TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE HEAD Define the target on the pillar where the head will impact 7 57 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 3 VPG prompts conteo Kis ABORT CURSOR AT ELEHERT KEV IH X Y 2 OWAE FART KEEP PART unna LAST gt DEFINE CONTACT NORMAL DIRCETION AGAINST HEAD TEMPLATE BIRECTION REDHT KEY IH VECTOR AIDES UWECTDR SHELL HORMAL SHELL REVERSE HORMAL UNDO LAST There are four approaches to define the head direction e KEY IN VECTOR e NODES VECTOR e SHELL NORMAL e SHELL REVERSE NORMAL Manually key in a vector selected The head will align with VPG MODULES Select two nodes to define a vector The head will align with the normal of the element the reverse normal direction of the element selected 7 5 1 2 FMVSS207 210 SEATBELT ANCHORAGE Description This function will import and position the body block used in the evaluation of seat belt anchorages to support the simulation of
160. STATIC LOAD CARD LIST window LOAD STATIC LOAD LIST FORCE Description This function displays the applied forces and lists node numbers and respective loads in the command area of the screen Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO LIST 6 146 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODE FOR FORCE ALL NODES e All nodes with applied forces will have arrowheads displayed but no specific load magnitudes will be listed NODE EXIT e Pressing the left mouse button or typing N will list the applied force of the grid nearest to the cursor e If no FORCES or MOMENTS are applied at the selected grid VPG will display the message gt NOLOAD SPECIFIED AT SELECTED NODE and remain in the LIST FORCE option e EXIT will exit the function LIST FORCE LOAD STATIC LOAD LIST PRESSURE Description This function displays the pressure loads and respective element numbers in the command area of the screen Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO LIST 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENT FOR PRESSURE LOAD CURSOR LOCATION EXIT e lf no pressure is applied at the selected element VPG will display the message gt NO PRESSURE DEFINED AT SELECTED ELEMENT and remain in the LIST PRESSURE option e EXIT will exit the function LIST PRESSURE e If the selected element has a pressure load VPG prompts gt PRESSURE LOAD AT EL xxxx xxxx xx LOAD STATIC LOAD MODIFY Description This function modifies the
161. T LOCAL C ROT DISPLACEMENT eta VPG3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING GLOBAL X ROT VELOCITY LOCAL A VELOCITY GLOBAL Y ROT VELOCITY LOCAL B VELOCITY GLOBAL Z ROT VELOCITY LOCAL C VELOCITY GLOBAL X ACCELERATION LOCAL A ROT VELOCITY GLOBAL Y ACCELERATION LOCAL B ROT VELOCITY GLOBAL Z ACCELERATION LOCAL C ROT VELOCITY GLOBAL X ROT ACCELERATION LOCAL AACCELERATION GLOBAL Y ROT ACCELERATION LOCAL B ACCELERATION GLOBAL Z ROT ACCELERATION LOCAL C ACCELERATION DVECTOR ROW_1 A LOCAL A ROT ACCELERATION DVECTOR ROW_1 B LOCAL B ROT ACCELERATION DVECTOR ROW_1 C LOCAL C ROT ACCELERATION RESULT INTERFACE FORCES RCFORC Description The user can plot the resultant interface data from the rcforc file The following types are available X FORCE Y FORCE Z FORCE MASS WALL FORCES RWFORC Description The user can plot the rigid wall time history data from the rwforc file The following types are available NORMAL FORCE X FORCE Y FORCE Z FORCE SEATBELT OUTPUT SBTOUT Description The user can plot the seatbelt output data from the sbtout file The following types are available SEATBELT SLIPRING RETRACTOR CROSS SECTION FORCE SECFORC Description The user can plot the cross section time history data from the secforc file The 9 61 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 9 following types are available POST PROCESSING X FORCE X MOMENT Y FORCE Y MOMENT Z FORCE Z MOMENT X CENTROID TOTAL FORCE Y CENTROID TOTAL MOMENT Z CE
162. T The CURRENT PART should be verified before proceeding with this function Two mesh patterns are available for 3 Line Mesh triangular shape VPG generates the triangular elements and allows the user to position them on the model Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT 3 LINES LINE SEGMENT allows the user to combine a broken line while selecting lines for the 3 LINE MESH function as in the COMBINE LINE function in the LINE section The user must select this option before selecting the desired lines for 3 LINE MESH The user may check the line s prior to executing this function by using SHOW LINE in the LINE section 6 67 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 2 Once the user selects the desired lines the prompt will read gt ENTER MESH TYPE 1 OR 2 1 TRIA AT CORHER 2 TRIA ALONG EDGE 3 EXIT e 1 TRIA AT CORNER e Triangles are concentrated in the vertex of the first two selected lines gt ENTER NUMBER OF ELEMENTS N1 N2 N3 e 2 TRIA ALONG EDGE e Triangles are concentrated along the third selected line gt ENTER NUMBER OF ELEMENTS N1 N2 N3 e VPG accepts only one entry as each side has the same number of elements 6 3 20 4 LINE MESH Description This function generates elements in an area defined by 4 selected lines A rectangular pattern of N1 N2 N3 by N4 quadrilateral elements will be generated where N1 is the number of elements along the direction of the first selected line and N2 is the number of element
163. T SET FROM PART SET LIST Select a part set to be replaced from the part set list 6 217 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR VPG prompts gt SELECT THIS PART SET AS TARGET Y N YES The selected part set will be replaced VPG prompt gt SELECTED THE PART SET TO REPLACE JUST PART SET gt SELECT SET FROM PART SET LIST Select another part set from the part set list to replace the part set that has been selected 4 VPG prompts D 6 gt Select the replace connection type gt SELECT OPTION Select a connection type or all types to be replaced VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE TOLERANCE VALUE mm Key in a tolerance value between the old parts and the new parts VPG prompts gt REPLACE TARGET PART SET BY THIS PICKED ONE Y N YES The selected connection type was moved from the first selected part set to the second selected part set NO will exit this function 6 19 7 REMOVE REPLACE PART Description This function allows the user to select a new part to replace an old part move all connections to from the old part to the new part and delete the old part Usage 6 218 VPG prompts gt REPLACE PART gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART Select a part to be replaced by choosing its name or an element of it VPG prompts gt SELECT THIS PART AS TARGET Y N YES The selected part will be replaced VPG prompt gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART eta VPG3 0 Chapt
164. THOD TO CREATE NODE POINT IS DEFAULT 2 The user may now select node locations by WEF IH 5 V Z e By selecting EXIT the user will return to the NODE OPTIONS menu 6 4 8 DELETE UNREF NODES Description This function allows the user to DELETE either ALL or SELECTED unreferenced nodes in a database Unreferenced nodes are labeled with asterisks Usage 1 VPG prompts gt DELETE ALL OR SELECT FREE NODES A S E ALL FREE MODES SELECT FREE HUDE EXIT ALL FREE NODES e Deletes all unreferenced nodes SELECT FREE NODE e he user may now select individual or grouped nodes e f any of the selected nodes are referenced nodes VPG displays the message gt CANNOT DELETE NODE xxxx IT IS NOT UNREF When unreferenced nodes are deleted VPG will echo the following message gt xxxxunreferenced nodes deleted 6 4 9 DISTANCE Description This function calculates the distance between two points two nodes or a node and point The calculated distance will be displayed in the Message area Usage 6 80 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT FIRST NODE POINT FOR DISTANCE 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT A NODE POINT FOR DISTANCE e The overall distance and the global DX DY DZ components will be displayed at the prompt area of the screen e The user enters ABORT DONE or EXIT 6 4 10 IDENTIFY NODE POINT Description This function identifies any point node and its correspondin
165. TI JET CH Bau IHTERIEET LOH HEFEHEHCE GEUHETEY PRE PROCESSOR The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the Lagrange Eulerian and Eulerian calculations Usage 6 182 VPG prompts SELECT OPTION IA E ALE CURVE DCRUUP ALE HOGE CROP ALE SWITCH o eee eee EXIT LS DYNA Keyword User s Manual Section 1 for further description parameters for Arbitrary eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 6 8 for further description 6 14 3 COMPONENT GEBOD Description This function sets the default control parameters for component gebod Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION ie ROG HEBIG JOINT HYEHIDIII HYEHIDIII BIHT e The preceding commands yield varying definition cards X Refer to the L S DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 14 4 CONTROL CARDS Description Control cards are optional default settings Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION DEF IHE LIST e The command DEFINE reveals the CONTROL CARD list and allows the user to define new control cards and modify previously defined control cards The command LIST displays the CONTROL CARD list The command REMOVE switches cards from active YES to inactive NO 6 183 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Hil hii Hii Hii nn u PRESSURE nn n Hn hn EE nu LES A YES in the right
166. TION window 6 161 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR ad O Wn T TT O o ad TY ae a Define Properties 6 10 8 ERASE UNREF MATL Description This function automatically deletes all materials that have no parts assigned to them 6 10 9 LIST Description This function lists the defined materials in the MATERIAL CARD LIST 6 10 10 MATERIAL COLOR ON OFF Description This function toggles the display of parts between the material and part color 6 10 11 ON OFF Description This function toggles the selected material ON OFF Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a material e Users may select an existing material by picking an element or material name of a material 2 The selected material and parts are turned ON OFF 6 162 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 10 12 RENUMBER Description This function allows the user to assign a new material ID MID number to a material type Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTIONS e Methods as following AUTOMATIC ALL 6 10 13 SHOW BUSHING Description This function shows bushing Clicking the Clear screen icon turns bushing off 6 10 14 THERMAL MATL MENU Description This function creates thermal materials Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION e Methods as following ASSIGH MATERIAL CREATE DELETE DEFINE PR PERTTES LIST UIEM e The functions of the THERMAL MATERIAL MENU are similar to the functio
167. TO CONTINUE INITIAL VELOCITY MODIFY Description This function allows the user to simultaneously delete and recreate any initial velocity Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO MODIFY 2 After the user selects an initial velocity the BOUNDARY BTIC DEFINITION window pops up and the user can modify parameters in the window 6 156 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR INITIAL VELOCITY SHOW Description This function allows the user to display all or some of the defined initial velocities VPG displays the initial velocities on the screen Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO SHOW List of all initial velocities SELECT ALL ABORT UNDO EXIT e All available initial velocities are listed in the TIC CARD LIST box 6 9 5 MPC Description This function allows the user to create and or modify the MPC Usage 1 VPG displays a list of additional commands in the options area 2 Each of these commands is described in the following pages MPC CREATE Description This function allows the user to create the MPC Usage 1 When the user enters CREATE VPG prompts to select option as following 6 157 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e After the user enters MPC or MPCADD the BOUNDARY MPC DEFINITION window pops up and the user can set parameters in the window MPC DELETE Description This function enables the user to remove the selected MPC cards from the database Usage
168. TS FOR ELEMENT e To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three e The elements will be created simultaneously upon selection of the desired nodes points e EXIT or ABORT will exit this function CREATE BEAM CBEAM NASTRAN Description This subsection covers the options for the BEAM NASTRAN CBEAM section of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER CBEAM OFFSET VALUE e VPG displays a pop up window of CBEAM OFFSET VALUE 2 Once the beam offset value has been entered the prompt will read gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR CBEAM ELEMENT e Tocreate the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three 6 47 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 3 Once the desired nodes points have been selected VPG prompts gt PICK NODE PT OR VECTOR FOR CBEAM ORIENTATION e Up to three values may be entered to define a vector normal to the beam s local XY plane 4 When user enters VECTOR VPG prompts gt ENTER CBEAM VECTOR e i e 0 0 1 CREATE TRUSS ELEMENT NASTRAN Description This section covers the options for the TRUSS ELEMENT subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW PROPERTY NAME OR EX TO EXIT e VPG prompts the user to enter a property name if no properties exist in the database at the current time Once a name is entered a pop up window will appear with a list of properties to ed
169. User s Manual Section 8 22 for further description DATABASE TRACER Description The definition card in the TRACER subsection allows the user to create tracer particles which will save a history of either a material point or a spatial point into an ASCII file TRHST Usage 1 When DEFINE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 8 23 for further description 6 14 7 DEFINE Description The DEFINE definition cards allow the user to define boxes coordinate systems load curves tables and orientation vectors for various uses Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION DEFINE CARD TYPES Bx CuagHDpiHHTE SYSTEM CURWE SPRING RIEHTATIUM TABLE VECTOR DEFINE BOX Description Defines a specific box shaped volume from two corner points specified in global coordinates Usage 1 VPG prompts 6 190 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 6 191 PRE PROCESSOR ENTER COMMAND CREATE This function creates a new box after the user enters a box ID number and defines the two opposing corners using either nodes points or xyz coordinates DELETE This function deletes selected boxes Boxes can be selected via the following commands CURSOR AT BOX KEY IN BOX ID MULTI POINT REGION SELECT ALL BOXES and WINDOW Boxes that are selected are displayed in gray When the user exits the menu they are deleted DISPLAY ON OFF Toggle switch LIST e Lists the box ID numbe
170. VEHICLE WHEEL BAS CENTER EOF VEHICLE CEXOIUND emp e SS es ee MOM ZEN NUNC RS UU Lancel 2 Input values and press OK 3 VPG prompts gt PICK A NODE TO CALCULATE BARRIER VEHICLE CLEARANCE e Select a node from the left most part of the vehicle e The MDB is imported from the library and put on the specified location 4 VPG prompts for the location of the dummy PICK TEST POINT H POINT FOR DRIVER FMVSS214 DUMMY e The H POINT is a reference point of the dummy based on which the dummy is located 5 Select KEY IN X Y Z and key in 1408 370 277 The US SIDE IMPACT DUMMY is imported from the library and put on the specified location 6 AROTATION menu appears in the VPG Menu Window Using these menu options the user may perform 2 D positioning of the dummy rotating the dummy body tibia lower leg or foot position 7 36 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 1 37 7 Select EXIT 8 VPG prompts the location of passenger dummy pur ASTATIOoM Aiii E BE BP UR ee MT REEHT LEFT rin Tt VPG MODULES gt PICK TEST POINT H POINT FOR PASSENGER FMVSS214 DUMMY 9 Select KEY IN X Y Z and key in 2350 370 330 The passenger dummy is imported and positioned according to the H point Similar to the driver dummy a rotation menu appears in the VPG Menu Window The user can rotate the whole dummy or just the leg or foot to adjust their positions Select EXIT to complete the dummy positioning
171. VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 18 MASS MENU NASTRAN The functions of the MASS MENU are designed to add and modify mass properties in the database It is necessary sometimes to add masses represent nonstructural components or to modify masses to change the center of the gravity of the whole body The functions in this menu are organized as follows CONH MEMU READ FROM FILE WHITE TU FILE CREATE COMM DELETE LOHHZ COMM PROPERTY IDEHTIFY MASS CALCULATE NASS ATTACH HATS EXIT A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 6 18 1 READ FROM FILE Description This option allows the user to add mass elements to the database from a file that stores the mass information Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE FILE NAME gt ENTER DATABASE FILE NAME The files with the suffix xml will be listed in the window The user would select the name of a previously saved file or cancel to exit 2 If the file does not exist the prompt reads gt CANNOT OPEN THE INPUT FILE 3 VPG reads in the file and returns the user to the MASS MENU Notes All mass elements appear as small circles 6 18 2 WRITE TO FILE Description This function allows the user to output all mass information to a file Usage 6 211 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 1 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE FILE NAME gt ENTER DATABASE FILE NAME Enter a file name up to 24 characters 2 Ifthe file name is a new one VPG
172. YPE 0 TO EXIT 3 If the user selects ONE BY ONE VPG prompts for a new ID for each property The following prompt will be repeated for each property in the database gt ENTER PRID number FOR PROPERTY name OR E TO EXIT e If the user enters nothing VPG defaults to the original values 4 Ifthe user enters SELECT ONE VPG prompts gt SELECT PROPERTY NAME gt ENTER PART NAME OR EXIT gt PICK AN ELEM C OR PROPERTY NAME P OF A PROPERTY e After the user selects the property VPG prompts for a new ID gt PROPERTY name IS SELECTED gt ENTER PRID number FOR PROP name 6 175 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 13 CONTACT INTERFACE The functions in the CONTACT INTERFACE MENU define and modify contact interface data sliding and stonewall for transient nonlinear analysis codes The functions are organized as follows CONTACT COPY CRERTE DELETE HU BIFTY LIST REHLFHEER REVERSE H RHAL Once the CONTACT INTERFACE MENU is selected the active ON interfaces are displayed with the active parts The master segments are drawn as interior outlines of the elements where the segments are defined The letter M is labeled in the middle of the master segments Likewise the slave segments are labeled with the letter S The stonewalls are drawn as rectangular shapes and the slave nodes are labeled with small color filled squares The segments slave nodes and stonewalls are plotted in the interface color The segment let
173. a shortcut to execute the current part command Clicking on this window will execute the CURRENT PART command allowing the user to set a new current part See section 10 3 eta VPG3 0
174. access to these Manuals 4 3 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 5 File Manager Chapter Chapter 5 File Manager The options available in FILE MENU allow the user to input How data from different analysis programs into VPG A detailed Opem Ctrls description of each function in the FILE menu is given in the Restart Save Saye AS Inport F3 Export Print Print Setup Exit Ctrl s following sections Figure 5 1 File Menu 5 1 NEW This function allows the user to create a new database file Lookin C vpo vPG_2004_04_02 VPG3 O To a e steering control pg je test 1 vpg i amp until vna File Mame Opern File Type Mp V Cancel Figure 5 1 1 New File Window If a database file already has been opened in VPG and has not been saved yet there is a warning message for saving the opened file before creating a new one See Figure 5 1 2 5 1 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 5 File Manager SAUE BEFORE RESTART YES NO ABORT Figure 5 1 2 Save Prompt 5 2 OPEN This function allows the user to open databases Open Database ALL Lookin C vpo vPG_2004_04_02 VPG3 O V T2 i steering cantrol vpg je test 1 vpg i amp until vna File Mame Open File Type Mur Vi Cancel Figure 5 2 1 Open File Window If a database file already has been opened in VPG and has not been saved yet there is a warning message for saving the opened file before opening another one See Figure 5 2 2 SAUE B
175. actor greater than 1 0 generates proportionately larger elements from the selected corner A bias factor less than 1 0 generates proportionately smaller elements from the selected corner Note This function may be used with only the 2L 3L 4L 6S 8S 9S and 12S functions EDGE BIAS MESH toggle Description This option allows the user to enter an element bias factor 0 625 to 1 6 relative to the selected edge of the line data that is to be modeled This function multiplies each adjacent element that is created from the selected edge by the bias factor Note A bias factor greater than 1 0 generates proportionately larger elements from the selected edge A bias factor less than 1 0 generates proportionately smaller elements from the selected edge Note This function may be used with only the 2L 3L 4L 6S 8S 9S and 12S functions CHANGE COLOR MAP Description This function allows the user to change the default colors of the COLOR BAR for plotting of part color or contour color ELEMENT SIZE Description This function allows the user to preset a default element size before generating the 2 LINE 3 LINE 4 LINE or SURFACE mesh SHADING OPTIONS Description This function offers the following 3 options for shading a part or a model 10 32 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY Options are GOURAUD SHADING smooth shading FLAT SHADING NO EDGE FLAT SHADING W EDGE Gouraud shading is the default setting for VPG Flat Shading W
176. age 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT PART TO CHANGE COLOR gt PICK A LINE L AN ELEM C OR PART NAME P OF A PART The user selects a part as follows A By placing the cursor on a displayed part line and typing the letter L 10 2 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY B By placing the cursor on a displayed part element and pressing the left mouse button VPG displays the part list from which the user may select any part 2 Once the user selects a part VPG prompts gt SELECT COLOR FROM COLOR BAR OR EXIT VPG displays the color bar on the right edge of the screen The user may select a desired color via the mouse 3 EXIT terminates this command COLOR BAR Once the user executes this command VPG displays the color bar and the assigned colors and numbers on the right edge of the screen VPG removes the color bar when the user activates the REDRAW or CLEAR command 10 1 2 MAGNIFY WINDOW Description This function magnifies an object in the display area Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER MAGNIFICATION The user may enter any positive number as the magnification factor If the number is greater than 1 it will cause the size of the object in the display area to be enlarged If the number is less than 1 it will cause the size of the object in the display area to be reduced e g an entry of 5 will enlarge the picture whereas an entry of 5 will reduce the picture 10 1 3 REPEAT Description This function is used in con
177. alue for the side opposite N1 where N1 is not greater than 2 N3 and N3 is not greater than 2 N1 N4 optional an integer value for the side opposite N2 where N2 is not greater than 2 N4 and N4 is not greater than 2 N2 e 1 e 10 10 or 10 10 11 14 ACCEPTABLE 3 Once the desired element N1 N2 N3 N4 is entered VPG prompts gt ACCEPT MESH YES NO REMESH e YES will accept mesh and prompt for more lines e NO will not accept mesh and prompt for more lines e REMESH will not accept mesh and prompt for new N1 N2 N3 N4 6 3 21 SOLID MESH SOLID MESH 6 LINE SOLID MESH Description This function is intended for automatic 6 or 8 node solid element generation in a volume The volume is defined by top and bottom surfaces which are enclosed by 3 lines each The lines must previously be defined line direction is not important The lines defining the area do not have to intersect an open area is possible The created elements will be included in the CURRENT PART The CURRENT PART should be verified before proceeding with this function Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT 3 LINES AT BOTTOM LINE SEGMENT allows the user to combine a broken line while selecting lines for the 6 LINE MESH function as in the COMBINE LINE function in the LINE section The user must select this option before selecting the desired lines for 6 LINE MESH e The user may check the line s prior to executing this function by using SHOW LINE in the LINE section
178. am displays a CONTROL OPTION window as shown as Figure 9 14 Control Option Select by Cursor End Pick Reject Last Reject All Figure 9 14 Create Line Control Option window e SELECT BY CURSOR Select the location of the node a point will be created e END PICK Click this button to create a line by a set of straight line segments between adjacent points in sequence e ENCLOSE LINE The created line is closed by a straight line segment between the first selected and the last selected point 9 24 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING REJECT LAST The last selected node Is rejected e REJECT ALL All selected nodes are rejected EXIT Exit the function 9 8 2 DELETE LINE Description This function enables the user to delete the selected line s 9 8 4 LABEL ARROW Description LABEL allows the user to enter a title or text label at any location in the graphic display window ARROW allows the user to draw arrows at any location in the display window The program displays a control window as shown in Figure 9 15 9 25 DISPLAY LABEL ARROW LabeliArrow graphic display window Default is toggled On Arrow Arrow ARROW This function enables the user to select two points by cursor to draw an arrow in the graphic display window The name of the arrow will be listed in the Label Arrow control window The first location is the tail of the arrow and the second location is the arrow head Arrow Text
179. an element from the part as the target position 3 VPG prompts gt PICK A NODE TO LOCATE FIRST SEAT RIGHT SIDE CLAMP ay CHILDSEAT LOADING MECHANISM 7 5 1 4 FMVSS208 KNEE BOLSTER Description This function will create knee impactors and position them in the model in order to conduct a knee bolster analysis Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER KNEE BOLSTER CRASH INFORMATION ETE ELETTR DATE CUTEM i F DATA HMEE STRLUCTURE CLEARANCE men KNEE VELOCITY mena 4 hr s BOLSTER VELOCITY ima a geh m Cancel DE 7 61 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 2 VPG prompts gt PICK A CRASH TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE DRIVER LEFT KNEE CUMTR L REVS AoA T CUESOR AT ELEMENT HEY IH X v Z H U FF PART KEEP FART UHEO LAST Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as target position 3 VPG prompts gt PICK A CRASH TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE PASSAGER LEFT KNEE KNEE BOLSTER IMPACTOR 7 5 1 5 FMVSS203 STEERING CONTROL Description This function will create a body block model and position it for simulation of an FMVSS 203 Steering Control System analysis Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER STEERING CONTROL INFORMATION 7 62 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES SEA OTE DATA ITEMS DATA BTEERINUG WHEEL BODY BLOCK CLES MET T TDnDXT BOOY BLOCK VELOCITY mmus 4 667 HOME ams Cancel Dk 2 VPG prompts gt PICK A STEERING WHEEL NOD
180. and one global property for the database 2 DEFINE BY PARTS e Assigns materials and properties to each individual part 3 IGNORE DEFINITION e Ignores material and property definition 4 EXIT 5 10 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 5 File Manager 4 VPG prompts gt OUTPUT ONLY ACTIVE PARTS Y N e YES will only output the active parts parts that are turned ON e N will output all parts in the database 5 VPG prompts gt ENTER TITLE e The user can enter up to 60 characters 6 If there are no model properties defined in the database VPG prompts gt NO NODAL PROPERTIES DEFINED IN DATABASE gt ENTER NEW PROPERTY NAME OR EX TO EXIT e A NODAL PROPERTY window appears after a name is selected and VPG prompts the user to modify data in the window e EXIT ends this function and returns the user to the FILE MANAGER menu 5 7 4 WRITE DYNA FILE This function allows the user to output an LS DYNA data deck directly from the VPG database 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER FILE NAME OR STOP TO EXIT e Enter a file name up to 24 characters The dyn extension is suggested for LS DYNA files 2 If the file name already exists the program will prompt the following message gt FILE NAME ALREADY EXISTS O K TO OVERWRITE Y N e YES will overwrite the existing file e NOwill prompt for a file name 3 VPG displays the current unit system and prompts SELECT UNIT SVSTEH 1 HH TON SED H FT SLUG SEC LB Figure 5 7 2 U
181. are accompanied VPG OPEN FILE WINDOW is a convenient tool for viewing of directories and files 2 14 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features Lookin C vpo vPG_2004_04_02 VPG3 O v GT i steering control pg je test 1 vpg i until vog File Name O o File Type vpn Cancel Figure 2 12 1 Open File Window All files listed in the OPEN FILE window are displayed from the current directory based on a filter filename extension such as vpg The current directory is listed at the top of the LOOK IN drop down menu Changing the filter parameter in the File Type drop down menu sets the file type filter The FILE NAME window allows the user to enter the file name and directory manually 2 14 RECOMMENDED NAMING CONVENTION his lin bin etc The protocol for naming files during a VPG session includes attaching suffixes to the file names that specify the file types Examples of suffixes include IGES igs iges Example When reading in a line LINE lin data file VPG prompts for a line data VDA vda vias 2 15 CMF dxf CAT LA 7 model CAT IAS CATF art STEP stp step UG prt LS5 D YNA cn mad k MALS TRAN d l ns mena sis dat ABRAS ng PAMGRASH pc RADIOS O00 MOLDFLOYY mifl ADAMS adm Pre susp fst rst file name all file Names in that directory with the suffix lin are listed in the options area The user then selects the
182. as C27 Sq Int In this expression the C27 means the name of selected curve Sq and Int mean the operation to this curve There is a colon following each operation There are two kinds of colour of the expression in the Result curve text box One is black and another is red Those two kinds colour denote two different kinds of meaning When the colour of the expression is black it means that the user can press the Apply to perform this operation If the colour of the expression is red it means that the expression is not correct or the condition of current operation is not satisfied so the operation can t be executed The user can input by keyboard to define the operation according to the format of the program But this method is not very convenient for new user so this method is not recommended for the new user 9 12 8 1 APPLY Description This function allows the user to execute the operation after the user has selected some operation 9 12 8 2 UNDO Description This function allows the user to cancel the last selected operation before pressing the Apply button 9 12 8 3 CLEAR Description This function allows the user to cancel all the selected operation before pressing the Apply button 9 75 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING NOTE During the operation for curves some curve data operations require the sample frequency and intervals are the same e g binary arithmetic operation Some other unary operati
183. ation The program assigns a default view name as shown in Figure 9 26 User may enter any view name in the VIEW NAME field Click OK to save the current viewing orientation or click CANCEL to abort the save operation Input CR Name Figure 9 26 View Name control window e RECALL VIEW Recall the previously saved viewing orientation Click a VIEW NAME in the view list and then click RECALL The program will display the model according to the viewing orientation saved under the selected VIEW NAME e DELETE Delete the previously saved viewing orientation Click a VIEW NAME in the view list and then click DELETE to delete the saved view e EXIT Closes the SAVE VIEW control window and exits the function 9 8 13 BACKGROUND COLOR Description This function allows the user to select a color from color palette as the background color in the graphic display window Once the function is selected the program displays a color palette as shown in Figure 9 27 9 30 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Figure 9 27 Background Color Palette The user may select any color in the palette as the background color The program will change the background color immediately and exit the function as the color is selected Press the ESC key to exit the function without selecting any color 9 31 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 9 TOOL MENU The functions in this menu are shown in Figure 9 28 The user can define section cut mirror resu
184. ay pick individual elements for degree of warpage e DONE or EXIT returns the user to the MODEL CHECKER menu The warped solids quadrilateral elements or newly created triangular elements will remain in their original parts 6 5 15 FEATURE LINE DISPLAY Description This function allows the user to check the angle between plate and solid elements based on user specified angle criteria The user can also automatically generate plotel elements at these locations to display the structures main features 6 99 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER FEATURE LINE ANGLE CRITERION DEFAULT 20 DEG 2 VPG prompts gt GENERATE PLOTEL ELEMENTS OR LINES FOR FEATURE LINES PLUTEL ELEMERTS LIHE SEGHERTS EXIT EXIT returns the user to the model checker menu e PLOTEL or LINE SEGMENTS prompts the following 3 VPG prompts gt INCLUDE PLOTEL ELEMENTS or LINE SEGMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N NO Plotel elements or Line segments will be included in the current part e YES VPG prompts for a new part 6 5 16 SECTION CUT Description This function cuts through the plate and solid elements at a UV plane that the user defines and creates plotel elements at that plane Usage 1 VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN e VPG is now asking for a coordinate system to create section plotels VPG prompts the user to create a local system A thorough explanat
185. be plotted at the center of the element to indicate the element type The identifier symbols for the various elements are listed in the following table 10 33 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY ANALYSIS IDENTIFIER PROGRAM SYMBOL Beam LS DYNA amp NASTRAN CROD Truss NASTRAN CTUBE Pipe NASTRAN ELEMENT TYPE Spotweld LS DYNA Discrete LS DYNA Seatbelt LS DYNA CELAS1 amp CELAS2 Spring pees Mass LS DYNA NASTRAN Joint LS DYNA SPJ RVJ The default for this option is off LS DYNA amp M NASTRAN ROO M 10 5 DISPLAY OPTIONS Description The functions of the DISPLAY PARAMETER OPTIONS WINDOW control various aspects of the model s appearance CURRENT LINENENNN S 560560 I LIMES SHHIHK lI FILLHIDBE f SURF RACES T HOAMAL r EOLIE f ELEM T O8TER r Shee The user initiates the commands via mouse pick The window remains active in the lower right corner of the screen A detailed description of each function is given in the following pages LINES Turns plot lines on off SHRINK This function reduces the size of all elements by 20 percent SHRINK is also useful for locating any missing elements in a shell or solid structure FILLHIDE This function creates a hidden surface plot for all of the displayed elements which provides the user with a realistic view of the model SURFACES Turns highlighted surfaces on off NORMAL This function displays the orientation of an element with an a
186. between the two intersecting surfaces Note This surface is referred to as a Secondary surface in this section 2 Once the second surface has been selected and the user enters EXIT VPG prompts gt SELECT A CLOSED CURVE AS OUTER BOUNDARY ABORT DONE EXIT SURFACE BOUNDARY This creates the outer closed surface boundary CURVE ON SURFACE This locates an existing curve on the surface open or closed as the outer boundary of the trim operation REJECT LAST CURVE This rejects the last curve selected for the trim operation 3 VPG prompts SELECT CLOSED CURVE AS INNER BOUNDARY e This retains the surface between the outer boundary and the inner boundary during the trim operation The inner boundary can be a line segment open spline closed spline or circle e ABORT DONE EXIT NO INNER BOUNDARY This trims the outside surface of the outer boundary CURVE ON SURFACE e The user may select an existing curve on the surface open or closed as the inner boundary of the trim operation 6 32 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR REJECT LAST CURVE This rejects the last curve selected for the trim operation 4 VPG then prompts gt DELETE THE ORIGINAL SURFACE Y N e YES generates a trimmed surface NO generates a trimmed surface and retains the original surface 5 VPG returns the user to step 2 of the TRIM SURFACE command TRIM SURFACE OPEN CURVE Description This function defines an open curve on a selected surface
187. button or N to select the node nearest to the cursor If the user selects the same node twice while creating a node set VPG returns the prompt gt NODE xxxx ALREADY PICKED If the user enters DONE VPG saves the set and prompts gt X NODES INCLUDED IN NODE SET X e If the user selects ABORT VPG deletes the node set and returns the user to the NODE SET submenu 6 7 3 CURRENT NODE Description This function lists the defined node sets in a pop up window The user can then select the current set from those listed 6 115 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM NODE SET LIST List of all node sets CURSOR AT NODE EXIT 2 Once the set s is selected VPG prompts gt SET X IS SELECTED gt SET X FLAGGED AS CURRENT SET 6 7 4 DELETE NODE Description This function allows the user to remove node sets by ID number VPG is specifically configured to recognize node sets for this procedure For deleting element sets refer to the command in section 6 7 16 Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM NODE SET LIST List of all node sets CURSOR AT NODE ALL NODE SETS UNDO EXIT 2 If the user selects ALL NODE SETS in step 2 VPG prompts gt OK TO DELETE ALL NODE SETS Y N YES NO e f YES VPG issues the following message ALL NODE SETS DELETED FROM DATABASE e f NO VPG returns the user to the NODE SET submenu 3 Ifthe user selects an individual n
188. cedures and take any necessary measures to assure the accuracy of the simulations created using VPG Safety 7 31 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 4 1 General Processing Procedure The crash safety simulations documented herein have similar requirements and setup procedures They generally require a structure assembly either a full vehicle or a component of the vehicle and at least one crash tool model dummy barrier rigid wall etc During the simulation either a structure moves at a particular speed into a crash tool or a crash tool impacts the structure The displacement of the structure the acceleration or deceleration pulse the G forces on the dummy models and certain specified results are then post processed and compared with the performance criteria and legislated requirements Therefore the canned simulations have a general processing procedure From case to case the user will see variations in the components and setup procedure However the general process remains the same The user first establishes a validated structure model that includes proper mesh material properties contact definitions and correct connectivity to satisfy the given modeling guidelines The structure model is then placed in simulation position most model positions are equivalent to the vehicle design coordinate system However some are defined in an alternative testing fixture coordinate system The crash tool model is then placed i
189. contour is displayed in dark color of the bottom bar Please see the Figure 7 2 6 Note Contour Range is only accessible after plotting Once the user has made a plot and selected SET CONTOUR RANGE the lower range and upper range are entered via the DAPT INPUT field 9 49 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING The APPLY button is then selected and the model will be re plotted with new range LS ETHA sarr lng STEP IP TAE p iti COMPOMTAT Yaira Ws 71 HALEN ie FEL PR SRL DT een 117 585445 425008212 737 72318 Fe MI TTAPOST Lads Figure 9 59 An Example for Contour Range e CONTOUR MODE There are four types of colour RGB red green blue RGBM red green blue magenta RG red green GRAY e CONTOUR LEVEL The contour level can be set from 2 20 levels The program defaults to CONTINUE If the user sets the contour level with any value 2 20 the contour is displayed discretely as contour line Please see the Figure 7 2 7 9 50 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING LS YR cee inpri 516 Wo STEP 20 TME DEN COMPONENT Y st pes MNG aT sm AP Bante Bi 2B4 7573 P 38 5871 H TEZA E 115 112 594 p i H 5 23 452 i i 064 125 UD eee 39 Tula o UM III EH TP aT SAT ATSE 431902208 WETTER y eee bh a Zrponpu 37 2 TAI ETA POST Figure 9 60 An Example for Contour Line 9 11 9EXPORT CONTOUR LINE Description This function allows user to export the conto
190. cting the OK button the user will generate a model file according to the defined DYNA INPUT FILE OPTIONS Section 8 11 If the user wishes to create 8 4 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 8 ANALYSIS EXECUTION an LS DYNA input file for later execution the WRITE INPUT FILE option should be selected The user must have LS DYNA and a valid license for this option to execute properly An execution window will be opened and an interactive LS DYNA analysis will be started This will not affect the operation of VPG 8 13 WRITE INPUT FILE Description The WRITE INPUT FILE option allows the user to write an LS DYNA input file to be executed at a later time outside of VPG If the user wishes to automatically execute the simulation from within VPG the RUN ANALYSIS option should be selected prior to selecting the OK button 8 5 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Chapter Chapter 9 Post Processing 9 1 INTRODUCTION The POST function in VPG is a general post processor for all ETA software including DYNAFORM VPG and FEMB POST is an independent application module that is started when the user selects POST from the main menu The POST module quickly post processes result data of finite element analyses including the real time animation of stresses strain energy displacements and time history curves Its fully dynamic allocation of memory optimizes system resources allowing for unlimited model sizes 9 6 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESS
191. ction allows the user to change the origin of coordinate systems 10 4 3 DRAW ARROW Description This function allows the user to draw arrows about a specific image on the display screen Arrows created using this function may be removed from the display by selecting the CLEAR function from the icon bar Usage Note This command is used in conjunction with DEFINE TITLE 1 VPG prompts gt PICK THE TAIL LOCATION FOR THE ARROW CURSOR LOCATION EXIT UNDO LAST 2 After the user selects the location of the tail VPG prompts for the location of the head gt PICK THE HEAD LOCATION FOR THE ARROW CURSOR LOCATION EXIT 10 24 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY UNDO LAST 3 After the user defines the location of the head VPG draws the arrow and returns to step 1 See figure 10 4 3 DRHE AKRON OPTION Figure10 4 3 Draw Arrow 10 4 4 DISTANCE Description This function calculates the distance between 2 points 2 nodes or a node and a point This command is also listed in the ELEMENT OPTIONS and NODE OPTIONS menus Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a node or point gt SELECT TWO POINTS NODES After the user selects the appropriate points or nodes VPG displays in the prompt area of the screen the vector distance and the DX DY and DZ components 2 ABORT DONE or EXIT terminates this function 10 4 5 DEFINE TITLE Description This function allows the user to enter a title or text label at any location on the
192. ctive Window Control Window 9 9 5 DEFINE NODE TRACE Description NODE TRACING allows the user to select a set of nodes to be traced during animation A trace is a line or track that identifies the path that a node takes during its movement from one time step to another An example of the Node Trace is show in Figure 9 41 TES STEP ii TIME mimin CrA POS Figure 9 41 The Node Trace Click the CLEAR NODE TRACE from the TOOL Pull down menu to remove all of the currently defined traces 9 39 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 9 6 DEFINE NODE CURVE Description This function allows the user to plot the result in a time history graph of the selected nodes The function only works during Contour Animation The user should start a contour animation of a selected result component before using this function The program displays a dialog window as shown in Figure 9 42 Control Option Select hy Cursor Select by indo Figure 9 42 Select Nodes Control Option The procedure of selecting nodes is common with other functions described in previous sections After selecting desired nodes exit the function the node curve result is shown as in Figure 9 43 F L a Jg I nl Sia I i i ni D EUK 1 i MERGY E EM H P EIS UNE ZEN MEX I CEMPORENT Enargy E EIERIT an mH um Jia a E y i AE aj E ee i 35 re dors 3d Ea Wm LF tit Lite idet LETHE Figure 9 43 Node Curve Result 9 40 eta VPG
193. cut will rotate along the U Axis DISPLAY OPTIONS 9 35 SECTION ONLY Only the section line will be displayed after exit from the section cut function WHOLE MODEL Whole model in grey will be displayed with section line after exit from the section cut function SECTION CUT PORTION This function allows user to display a portion of the model on the positive or negative side of the local W axis after exit from the section cut function The program will display only the selected portion of the model on the screen Figure 9 34 shows a typical display of SECTION ONLY option eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 L T NYRI eT mijl STEP 4S TIHE IL DET COMPONENT X stiiess IH 1 Figure 9 34 An Example for SECTION CUT display 9 9 2 CONSTRAIN MOTION Description This function enables the user to define a reference point for animation may select any node in the model as the reference point by the function SELECT REFERENCE NODE The user may also select any or all translation degree of freedom X Y and Z to POST PROCESSING HEETE 18 50 BIRD m al tz ee es m Eu a ni 34 145507 a5 n Hr 47 iii UE IRI TIL Pat B cT DANT qnan constrain the motion Figure 9 35 shows the dialog window of the Constraint Motion Control Option Constrain x Axis Constrain Y Axis Constrain Axis Select Reference Mode Show Reference Node Clear Constrain Motion Figure 9 35 Constraint Motion Dialog Window Dis
194. d Blank SS unam mum Figure 9 56 Current Frame Contour 9 11 7 ELEMENT RESULT 10 48 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Description This function determines whether the CONTOUR will be based on elements or nodes 9 11 8 CONTOUR SETTING Description This function will start the Contour Bar Options Control Window shown as Figure 7 2 5 There are several options e REVERSE CONTOUR BAR This function allows the user to reverse the colour of contour bar for the contour plot The result of the reverse contour bar is show in Figure 7 2 4 00009 car O cF9ts DUE gLBC IS ZET cECDUUD G7 L7 SFOSPEL ELL LGO 38 lt GF gEGLSS EL 6ckSstt 97 gL 80E GEL gLECZ V EOE 5S8B5E Soe anc668 eE cBUEDZ DGE 8700270 CSF GBc 6t StS 900009 ege cre ODE BLECE 7 EC cECBOU 67 L7 GFIGF ELL LSO 3 6F SESLOG EL beblSrrss gL 80E 6EL aLECZL ee Gasen 697 an6668 2 c COEL DGE 8 0020 EGF SocO6r 9 6 T Figure 9 57 The Reverse contour Bar result Contour Bar Options Carinur Modes RGE sC riir Lies c ntnue Criou Range blir 363 EDDU Mae 516 4903 Reverse Contour Bar Recai Contour Range Apply Exil Figure 9 58 Contour Setting box e RESET CONTOUR RANGE This function resets the contour value range to the default maximum minimum values If the value is more than the maximum the contour is displayed in dark colour of the top bar and if the value is less than the minimum value the
195. d computing capacity This provided the opportunity to create system level simulations of events mimicking the test process more accurately Prior to this time conventional CAE techniques consisted of smaller specific analyses tailored to a specific task such as NVH separate from the global system level analysis of the automobile The eta VPG developers were faced with the need for an integrated analysis that included both component level and full vehicle applications with the ability to perform real time simulations The analysis would be dynamic and nonlinear unlike the static linear analysis techniques utilized by the then current CAE practices ETA first tested this concept on simple mechanisms simulating mechanical systems such as engine connecting rod piston crankshaft systems and suspension mechanisms The mechanisms were simulated as a dynamic nonlinear system in real time events The results demonstrated that the motion and forces derived from the VPG simulation were the same as the rigid body linkage motion simulation results produced from conventional multibody dynamics software However when implementing flexible bodies FE the benefit of obtaining realistic stress and strain results of flexible components from the VPG simulation in an event based fashion produced valuable analysis data that could not be generated in traditional FEA approaches ETA engineers moved another step forward by simulating a rotating tire impact in a
196. d connections would de deleted from the database ABORT DO nothing and exit 6 19 5 REPLACE PART Description This function allows the user to select a new part to replace an old part and move the connections from the old part to the new part 6 216 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG prompts gt REPLACE PART gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART Select a part to be replaced by choosing its name or an element of it 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT THIS PART AS TARGET Y N YES The selected part will be replaced 3 VPG prompt gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART Select a new part by choosing its name or an element of it to replace the part that has been selected 4 VPG prompts gt Select the replace connection type gt SELECT OPTION select a kind of connection type or all types to be replaced 5 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE TOLERANCE VALUE mm Key in a tolerance value between the old part and the new part 6 VPG prompts gt REPLACE TARGET PART BY THIS PICKED PART Y N YES The selected connection type was moved from the first selected part to the second selected part NO will exit this function 6 19 6 REPLACE PART SET Description This function allows the user to select a part set to replace an old part set and move the connections from the old part set to the new part set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt REPLACE PART SET SELECTED THE PART SET AS TARGET gt SELEC
197. de MODIFY allows the user to edit element attributes i e eid pid nid if the ATTRIBUTE TABLE ON OFF function in the ELEMENT OPTIONS menu is on For further description see the command ATTRIBUTE TABLE ON OFF in this section Note For one dimensional elements beams bars etc VPG displays the selected beam s property ID and allows the user to modify it and the beam s connectivity 6 3 12 LINE MESH Description This function allows the user to generate one dimensional elements along a selected line automatically The elements created will follow the direction of the selected line The node sequence of the element begins at the starting point of the selected line according to the right hand rule The created elements will be included in the CURRENT PART The CURRENT PART should be verified before proceeding with this function Usage 1 VPG prompts SELECT ELEMENT TYPE e Alist of available element types will be displayed as following ESIT 1 BEAH ELEHEHT 3 FLOTEL ELEMENT 2 VPG then prompts gt SELECT LINE FOR LINE MESH 3 Once the line selection has been made VPG prompts gt ENTER NUMBER OF ELEMENTS ON SELECTED LINE e Any integer greater than 1 is valid 4 VPG then prompts for the beam orientation gt PICK NODE PT OR VECTOR FOR BEAM GAP ORIENTATION 5 VPG prompts gt ACCEPT MESH YES NO YES NO e YES will accept mesh and prompt for more lines e NO will not accept mesh and prompt for more l
198. desired road surface is displayed on the screen 1 BODY TWIST LANE 2 ALTERNATE SURFACE 7 4 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 3 POTHOLE TRACK 1 5 RIPPLE TRACK 1 4 POTHHOLE TRACK 2 6 RIPPLE TRACK 2 7 CHATTERSTRIP 7 5 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 8 COBBLESTONE TRACK 9 WASHBOARD SURFACE 2 10 PAVE SURFACE 11 WASHBOARD SURFACE 2 7 6 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 1 3 DELETE Description This option allows the user to delete a defined road surface Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK ELEM C OR ROAD NAME R gt CURSOR PICK AT ELEMENT COXTEOL HEYS CRSOR HT ELEHEHT ADAD HAHE IAHE EXIT 2 Once the road surface is selected VPG prompts gt XXXX ELEMENTS IN PART XXXX OF ROAD XXXX e The road is deleted DONE or EXIT returns the user to the ROAD DEFINITION MENU 7 1 4 SUMMARY Description This option gives a summary of a selected road surface i e Part Name number of parts PID and number of elements Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECTED ROAD SURFACE SUMMARY gt SELECT AN ELEMENT ON THE TARGET ROAD SURFACE Once the desired road surface is selected its characteristics are displayed in the VPG MENU WINDOW 2 VPG prompts gt ENTER CR TO EXIT sir ER re aram rri RN NR FAMT MAME FIP ELEM 7 1 5 MOVE ROAD SURFACE Description This option allows the user to translate a defined road surface It is used primarily to move tw
199. display of the items on the screen See section 10 1 10 3 19 MODIFY Description Allows the user to change a selected part s attributes such as thickness material etc 10 19 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 3 20 RENAME Description Allows the user to change a selected part s name 10 3 20 RENUMBER PID Description This function allows the user to renumber all parts PID in the existing database See Figure 10 3 20 Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION AUTOMATIC ALL ONE BY ONE SELECT ONE EXIT SELECT OPTION AUTOMATIC ALL OME BY OWE SELECT OWE ERIT Figure 10 3 20 Renumber Part ID 10 3 21 DELETE EMPTY PARTS Description This function allows the user to delete parts that contain no lines surfaces or elements 10 3 22 THICKNESS Description This function allows the user to calculate and apply a nodal thickness value for each part of the model The calculation of the thickness is made via a one step metalforming analysis As the part is selected a background process calculates the nodal thickness values based on material properties the shape of the component and the initial component thickness Note This process is available only on HP UX operating systems and requires an additional license key THICHHESS MEHU CHECK CUNMHTIBUITT AUTO H RHAL CALCULATE READ DYHATH SHOW THICKHESS REMOVE THICKHESS SHOW PLASTIC STARIM REHUUE STARTH EXIT 10 20 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY Figure 1
200. display screen The title may be removed by selecting the CLEAR function from the icon bar Usage 1 VPG prompts gt INPUT CHARACTER SIZE 1 0 10 0 lt 1 0 gt 2 After the user selects a font size VPG prompts gt DEFINE TITLE STARTING LOCATION The user defines the location of the text by positioning the cursor at the desired point on the screen and clicking the left mouse button 3 VPG prompts ENTER TITLE The user types in the text and presses the enter key VPG displays the text at the selected location 10 25 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 4 6 IDENTIFY NODES POINTS Description This function identifies any node and its corresponding global location in X Y Z coordinates For options see Figure 10 4 6 COMTROL REYS ALL HIDES KEV IH WIDE HUMBER MODE P IHT EXIT Figure 10 4 6 Identify Option Menu Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS If the user selects ALL NODES VPG displays the numbers of the nodes at their corresponding node locations The user returns to the UTILITY menu If the user selects NODE VPG displays the number of the node that is closest in proximity to the cursor VPG issues the following message on the command line gt NODE xxxx Xzx xxx Yzy yyy Zzzzzz If the user selects POINT VPG displays the number of the point that is closest in proximity to the cursor VPG issues the following message on the command line gt POINT xxxx X x xxx Yzy yy Zzzzzz DONE or EXIT returns the us
201. displayed element normals will be reversed according to the referenced element normal Note Selecting one part at a time is recommended Parts that branch off or are separated do not always get adjusted properly 6 5 2 AUTO ORIENT SOLID Description This function identifies displays and adjusts any solid elements hexa or tetra which due to element connectivity have a non positive volume to a positive volume Usage 1 AUTO ORIENT SOLID e When the user selects AUTO ORIENT SOLID no selection options are provided The program automatically adjusts the display of solid element normals to a positive volume e If elements are reversed the following message will be returned gt ORIENTATION REVERSED FOR xxxx ELEMENTS The elements that are reversed will highlight as they are checked off The user is returned to the MODEL CHECKER menu e If no elements are reversed the following message will be returned gt ALL SOLID ELEMENTS PASS CHECK No changes occur and the user is returned to the MODEL CHECKER menu Note The user may reverse the element normals by executing the REVERSE NORMAL command in the ELEMENT OPTIONS menu 6 90 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 5 3 ASPECT RATIO Description This function allows the user to check the aspect ratio of the displayed plate and solid elements The aspect ratio is the ratio of the longest side to the shortest side of an element In VPG the default aspect ratio is 8 0 to 1 0 but th
202. drags the cursor diagonally down the screen until the desired window size is reached The user clicks the mouse once to activate the window highlighted in white 10 1 12 TRUE VIEW Description This function allows the user to display an object in true view or the normal view of the local W axis as projected onto the local UV plane Usage 1 VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE POINT FOR ORIGIN VPG asks for a desired coordinate system local or global 2 VPG displays the coordinates on screen and prompts gt ACCEPT Y N A NO returns the user to step 1 YES continues this command to step 3 10 5 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY ABORT 3 VPG prompts gt KEEP ANY GLOBAL AXIS VERTICAL Y N YES gt ENTER THE VERTICAL GLOBAL AXIS x y z gt The user may select an axis to be displayed from the bottom to the top of the screen The object remains in its true view if this option is selected No NO displays the object in its true view perpendicular to the W axis This option displays the desired geometry in its true view according to the global X Y Z coordinates or to the Z axis displayed vertically 4 VPG prompts gt DO YOU WISH TO MAP ANY LINE ON TO THE X Y PLANE YES NO exits the TRUE VIEW function 5 Ifthe user selects YES VPG prompts SELECT LINES ABORT DONE EXIT KEYBOARD ENTRY LINE PART SELECT TARGET PART PICK A LINE L AN ELEM C gt OR PART NAME P OF A PART The
203. e POSTPROCESS menu allow the user to graphically display and manipulate analysis results There are 4 functions shown in the post processing tool bar as shown in Figure 9 48 Figure 9 48 Post process functional icons Once a function in the tool bar is selected the POST PROCESSING CONTROL WINDOW appears Each function allows the user to graphically display and manipulate a specific result for stamping simulation The user selects the desired PLOT STATE TIME STEPS FRAME RANGE and COMPONENTS to plot or animate the result Note To load LS DYNA result files and to activate the post process menu see FILE OPEN in Chapter 3 FILE MANAGER Note The user will not have access to have the control window when other control option windows are active A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections fi DEFORM The functions in this menu animate the displacement of the model in real time and display displacement of an individual step The options are shown in Figure 9 49 Deform Operation M Undeform Scale Factor D Ou 0 003416 0 006831 0 010246 0 013663 From 1 E Frame Mumber 4 Frames Second Figure 9 49 Deform control window 9 44 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING DEFORM OPERATIONS e SHOW UNDEFORM SHAPE This function enables user to toggle the undeformed geometry of the model on off The deformed shape plot is displayed in its original colour The plot of the undeformed shape i
204. e a graph to the new graph from an existent graph 9 12 12 EXIT Description This button allows the user to exit the Graph operation 9 76 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY Chapter CHAPTER 10 UTILITY UTILITY includes the following sections VIEWING OPTIONS ICON BAR FUNCTIONS PART CONTROL UTILITY and DISPLAY PARAMETER OPTIONS WINDOW The functions in these sections allow the user to alter the model s display define the model s parameters and define the model s part makeup 10 1 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 10 10 1 VIEW OPTIONS UTILITY The functions in the VIEWING OPTIONS menu are used to adjust the display of the items on the screen See Figure 10 1 VIEW CHRHGE COLOR HAGHIFY WIHDUNM REFERT REWERSE ROTATION RECALL VIEW SAVE MIEW UIEMPORTS ON OFF SCREEM R T UIRTURLRU T DEFIHE TITLE CURSOR Z2UGH TRUE WIEW HIDDEH SURFACE AEN TRAHSP MODE OH UFF HOWE LIGHT SOURCE ACTIVE WIMDUAM EXIT Figure 10 1 View Option Menu A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 10 1 1 CHANGE COLORS Description The functions in this submenu allow the user to change the color of any displayed item including part colors See Figure 10 1 1 CHANGE DOLORS CHAHCE FART COLORS COLOR BAR EXIT Figure10 1 1 Change Color Menu CHANGE PART COLORS Description This function changes the colors of selected parts The user may activate a color change when the parts are on or off Us
205. e button WINDOW ZOOM The user defines the corners of the zoom window by positioning the cursor on the display screen The user presses the left mouse button and drags the mouse diagonally down until the desired window size is reached Release the left button The section included in the window is displayed in full screen EA FREE HAND ZOOM The user defines the area of zoom window by clicking and holding the left mouse button in the display area and drawing a circle around the interested area When the left button is released the area that had been circled is displayed full screen FILL This command rescales the model to include all entities belonging to parts that are currently turned on FILL automatically zooms in or out until the model fits the viewing area of the screen ACTIVE WINDOW This command allows the user to isolate a portion of the displayed geometry model for more detailed viewing or editing For a detailed description see section 10 1 16 VIEW ACTIVE WINDOW i I REDRAW VPG is currently designed to update the screen after each command Occasionally the use of specific commands requires that images be updated with an additional step e g when the user operates the dynamic zoom at the same time that the element normals are displayed he or she must activate the REDRAW command to resize the arrows that represent the element normals 4 CLEAR Allows the user to remove the highlighted entities from the scree
206. e file is selected and the data is read in VPG displays the DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST The user has the choice of selecting the curves before they are plotted Note The load curve database format is shown below ALL text must be entered with CAPITAL letters eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 LOAD CURVE FILE FORMAT line 1 line 2 line 3 line 4 line 5 line n line n 1 line n2 line n 3 etc last line Where CURVE CURVE ID TYPE CURVE TITLE X1 Y1 X2 Y2 END etc X1 x5 x3 END UTILITY VPG LOAD CURVE Header line CURVE CURVE ID TYPE CURVE TITLE A5 I5 15 1X A8 Xl Y1 2EI054 X2 Y2 2F10 4 X3 Y3 2F10 4 CURVE CURVEID TYPE CURVETITLE Repeat a new curve Y1 2F10 4 pee 2210 4 Y3 2F10 4 A3 Terminate Input Header Required Load Curve Number Curve Type 0 Transient Analysis 1 Stress Initialization Curve s Title User Defined Curve Point 1 Curve Point 2 Header Required The following is an example of the LOAD CURVE file SVPG LOAD CURVE CURVE 2 0 CURVE 2 0 0000 0 0000 1 0000 1 5000 2 0000 0 0000 3 0000 0 5000 4 0000 1 5000 CURVE 4 0 CURVE 4 0 0000 2 0000 6 0000 3 5000 7 0000 1 5000 8 0000 2 0000 END SHOW CURVE Description This function displays load curves Usage 10 29 1 VPG displays the DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST 2 After selecting a curve VPG displays the following curve operations CURES CURUE OPERATI OHS CLEAR SCEEEH DEL
207. e following sections Note If the selected analysis code is NASTRAN a separate menu with different options will appear See Section 6 9 BOUNDARY CONDITIONS NASTRAN 6 8 1 BOUNDARY CARDS Description The BOUNDARY CARDS functions create and verify constraints and loads on finite element models The functions in the BOUNDARY CARDS MENU are organized as follows Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION 6 128 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR TOUHDARY CARDS ACOMSTIC COMPLIMG AMBIENT EOS C HSECTIUM DVCLIC ELEMENT METMO FLUX COL H H REFLECTIHG HOH REFLECTIMG 2D OUTFLOW CFD PRESCRIBER CFB PRESCRIBER HOTIGH PRESSHHE CFB SET PRESSURE OUTFLOW HADIREIIGOH SLIBIHEU PLAHE SPC SYTHHETHY FHILHEUHE TEMPERATURE THERMAL WELD EA Note All of these options share this standard submenu The submenu yields varying ways to access and create definition cards for the above BOUNDARY CARDS gt CREATE e Defines a new card DELETE e Deletes a selected card or cards from those displayed in a pop up window LIST Lists the cards in the option s database via pop up window MODIFY e Similar to the CREATE command this command lists the defined cards in a pop up window and allows the user to select and modify them EXIT BOUNDARY CARDS ACOUSTIC COUPLING Description This function defines acoustic coupling boundary conditions for a thermal or coupled thermal structural analysis Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for
208. e for creating and altering new cross sections CREATE defines a new cross section DELETE deletes a defined cross section DISPLAY ON OFF toggles the cross section display on off MODIFY redefines a cross section SHOW SECTION CUT lists the defined cross sections in the VPG menu window VIEW EXIT 7 If the user selects SET VPG prompts for a set type If the type of set selected has not yet been defined the user will be prompted to create one see SET MENU oection 6 6 6 7 Once the set has been determined VPG returns to step 1 Note Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 8 6 for further description DATABASE EXTENT OUTPUT Description The definition cards in the EXTENT OUTPUT subsection specify the BINARY database output files 6 187 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION CREATE e Refer to the beginning of this section for a description of these commands 2 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION EXTENT DATABASE TYPES Rus BIHARY MOUTE MPG 5 SSStat EXIT 3 When the option is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 8 23 for further description DATABASE FORMAT Description The definition cards in the FORMAT subsection specify database format Usage 1 When the DEFINE is selected the DATABASE FORMAT DEFINITION window appears DATABASE HISTORY Description T
209. e name of the subcase The user can choose from a list of all available SPC sets If there are no SPC sets defined in the database then VPG will enter the CREATE SPC SET menu and prompt the user to define the SPC set SUBCASE CONTROL DELETE SUBCASE Description This function deletes selected subcases from the VPG database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SUBCASE CARD TO DELETE All available subcases are listed in the SUBCASE CARD LIST window Note DELETE SUBCASE does not delete the SPC and Load sets in the subcase SUBCASE CONTROL SHOW SUBCASE Description This function displays the SPC and Load sets in the selected subcases in the VPG database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SUBCASE CARD TO SHOW All available subcases are listed in the SUBCASE CARD LIST window SUBCASE CONTROL MODIFY SUBCASE Description This function modifies selected subcases in the VPG database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SUBCASE CARD TO MODIFY All available subcases are listed in the SUBCASE CARD LIST window 2 Once the user selects a subcase to modify the NASTRAN SUBCASE DEFINITION window pops up 6 9 2 LOAD Description This menu lists the options to configure and modify load sets in the VPG 6 144 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR database Descriptions of the various commands in this function are provided in the following sections Usage 1 VPG displays the following list of commands in the options area D
210. e nearest nodes gt No and Abort exit and do nothing 6 16 5 DELETE MASS Description This function deletes a selected individual or group of mass elements Usage 1 VPG prompts ONLY MASS ELEMENTS WILL BE DELETED SELECT ELEMENTS User can select mass elements with any methods DONE The selected mass elements are deleted and return to MASS MENU ABORT return to the MASS MENU 6 16 6 IDENTIFY MASS Description This function identifies a mass element and provide X Y Z geometry and mass properties provided in the model unit system 6 203 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG prompts ONLY MASS ELEMENTS WILL BE SELECTED gt SELECT ELEMENTS User selects a mass element and it will display information of this mass 6 16 7 CALCULATE MASS Description This function calculates a mass center of gravity location and inertia properties for selected parts Parts must have a material property and thickness defined with a material density specified Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER OUTPUT FILE NAME OR CR FOR DEFAULT OR STOP FOR QUIT User inputs a file name 2 VPG prompts gt ENTER COMMAND MASS CALCULATION ALL PARTS SELECT PART EXIT ALL PARTS Output all mass information of all parts to the input file SELECT PART Output the mass information of the selected part to the input file EXIT Returns the user to the MASS MENU 6 204 eta VPG3 0 Chap
211. e or counter clockwise fashion and the remaining three tires are generated and added to the model Once the tires are defined the user attaches them to the suspension and defines the initial rotational velocity of the tires Tire modeling is discussed in Section 7 3 This topic is also described in the VPG Structure Tutorial 4 Auto Generating a Road Surface The user generates the desired road surface by selecting it from the ROAD SURFACE MENU If the road surface is not in the correct position in relation to the suspension after generation the MOVE ROAD SURFACE command is used to position it Next contact between the road surface and the tires are determined using the FIVE NODES TO SURFACE interface type The road is then constrained in the Y Z and rotational directions using the material property assigned to the road Next a velocity is assigned to the road using the BOUNDARY PRESCRIBED MOTION card Details on ROAD SURFACE libraries may be found in Chapter 7 Section 1 5 Adding a Body Model The body to chassis suspension attachment process depends upon what type of body model the user wishes to use for analysis deformable or rigid Rigid Body The rigid body model is constrained to the rigid beams that define the body attachment points on the suspension Deformable Body The specific coordinates for the body attachment points must be entered when the user defines the Extra Node Coordinates for the front rear suspension mode
212. e user may adjust it as necessary Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER ASPECT RATIO DEFAULT 8 0 Users may accept the default value of 8 0 by pressing the Enter key or they may enter any real number that is a valid value for the aspect ratio e VPG runs a check on the values for the aspect ratio Any elements that exceed the desired aspect ratio are highlighted The messages echoed to the command line are gt XXX ELEMENTS FAILED CHECK or ALL ELEMENTS PASS CHECK 2 The following message will be displayed for the failed elements gt INCLUDE FAILED ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N YES The PART DEFINITION window pops up The failed elements will be removed from their original parts and added to the NEW PART e The new part will be ON and CURRENT NO e VPG prompts the user to check the individual elements for aspect ratio via cursor pick Select EXIT to exit the function 6 5 4 BOUNDARY DISPLAY Description This function checks the continuity of the free edges in a group of elements All free edges will be highlighted with a boundary display Usage 1 VPG prompts gt CHECK SINGLE OR MULTIPLE SURFACE S M SINGLE SURFACE e Checks the continuity of the displayed elements and highlights all of the single free edges of the displayed model 6 91 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR MULTIPLE SURFACE e Checks the continuity of the displayed elements It also highlights the non intersecting free edges of the mult
213. e user to adjust the brightness and shininess of the part by adjusting the setting of Ambient Diffuse and Specular light The LIGHT PROPERTY only is operational when the SHADE option is turned on The user may click and drag the slider in each light property to adjust the light property Slide to the right results in more brightness or reflection of the display AMBIENT Ambient light is a uniform light source coming from all directions to the part e DIFFUSE Diffuse light is a parallel light source coming from the light source direction This light is reflected evenly from the part surface e SPECULAR Specular light is similar to the diffuse light except the light is reflected sharply in a particular direction e RESET LIGHT Reset the light property to the default setting 9 8 7 MATERIAL PROPERTY eta Post allows the user to modify different material properties for rendering the part The material property only takes effect in the SHADE mode with GRAY COLOR option MATERIAL User may select the material from the Material drop down list The available materials are aluminum steel copper iron silver bronze and rubber User may assign a material to selected parts by using the PART ATTRIBUTE function e MATERIAL COLOR The program provides adjustment for AMBIENT DIFFUSE and SPECULAR color by clicking the color box next to the property type The program displays a control window as shown in Figure 4 5 2 9 26
214. een selected 2 VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES 6 14 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN VPG asks for a coordinate system to scale the lines and prompts the user to create a local system A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 15 3 Once the desired coordinate system is created it will be displayed on the screen and the user will be prompted to accept or decline the system If the user accepts then VPG prompts gt ENTER X Y Z SCALE FACTORS e The user selects the desired scale factors Example The factors 1 1 1 reflect the line size in the negative Y direction across the UV plane the factors 0 5 0 5 0 5 reduce the lines by 0 5 6 1 18 SECTION CUT Description This function will generate line segments along a user defined UV plane at the intersection of selected lines intersecting the UV plane The line section that is created will be included in the CURRENT PART see PART CONTROL MENU Usage 1 VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN e VPG is now asking for a coordinate system to create section lines VPG prompts the user to create a local system A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 15 2 Once the desired coordinate system is acquired it will be displayed on the screen 3 Ifthe u
215. efault solver code for VPG is DYNA ABAGUS MOLDIEF LCS CFLC COLL PAMCRASH FCRASH RADIOS GENESIS The MATERIAL PROPERTY and ELEMENT PROPERTY menus change according to the analysis program Note VPG is unable to convert existing properties into the selected solver format 10 31 eta VPG3 0 gt Chapter 10 UTILITY AUTO SEGMENT END toggle Description This option allows the user to designate the end points of line segments to serve as control points Note This function is used in conjunction with CONTROL POINT MESH VPG prompts the user to select control points on lines that are joined through the line segment option CONTROL POINT MESH toggle Description This function pre selects the points on a line for the desired node locations associated with the 2L 3L 4L 65 8S 9S and 12S mesh programs FLANGE MESH toggle Description This option turns on the ability of the automeshing routines to support a flange mesh option The Flange Mesh option allows users to identify flange areas of spotwelded assemblies and requires that either 2 or 3 elements be placed on the width of the flange CORNER BIAS MESH toggle Description This option allows the user to enter an element bias factor 0 625 to 1 6 relative to the selected corner of the line data that is to be modeled This function multiplies each adjacent element that is created from the selected corner by the bias factor Note A bias f
216. efined road surface library Multiple road surface libraries can be created with multiple road surfaces in each Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SAVE ROAD SURFACE IN LIBRARY gt ENTER ROAD LIBRARY FILE NAME OR STOP TO EXIT e his creates the road surface library file or specifies a previously defined library 2 VPG prompts gt ENTER ROAD SURFACE NAME e Once the road surface name is entered the road surface is saved to the road surface library 3 To retrieve a saved road surface access the USER DEFINED key in the SELECT FROM LIBRARY menu VPG prompts for the library name Once the library is specified VPG lists the road surfaces in the MENU WINDOW 7 9 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 2 SUSPENSION MENU The functions in the SUSPENSION MENU allow the user to auto generate Front and Rear Automotive Suspension beam models from a library of Suspension types and easily attach them to the vehicle body model The beam chassis suspension model is commonly used in VPG applications Although a number of different and detailed finite element suspension models can be used the simulations will take much more CPU time than they would for simplified beam models Unless stress strain history and distribution information are needed for chassis suspension durability analyses the beam model is recommended and is both adequate and efficient for most VPG applications such as full vehicle structural durability analysis road load prediction full
217. elected and the user has exited the list VPG prompts the user gt MODIFY MASS A CG CENTER MODIFY INERTIA MOMENT e VPG displays a pop up window with the parts properties allowing the user to alter them 7 14 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES Front Suspension Library fm i 3 s LA i ga SHORT LONG A ARM SUSPENSION MCPHERSON H ARM FRONT SUSPENSION Rear Suspension Library 2 i P em e EF a pa oe P ol pau E en a _ rd pet a m a um E z m T a X m m i E P i oll li m a Eat pai 8 p MCPHERSON H ARM REAR SUSPENSION 7 15 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES TWIST BEAM REAR SUSPENSION 5 LINK REAR SUSPENSION E j U mE T ee ee 1 T me en A _ ea t T a n T 7 QUADRA LINK REAR SUSPENSION 7 16 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES TRAILING ARM REAR SUSPENSION HOTCHKISS REAR SUSPENSION 7 2 2 DELETE Description This option allows the user to delete defined suspension models from the VPG database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT TO DELETE SUSPENSION e Once an element from the suspension is selected VPG prompts gt OK TO DELETE THIS SUSPENSION Y N e YES deletes the suspension model and returns the user to the SUSPENSION MENU e NO returns the user to the SUSPENSION MENU 7 2 3 TRA
218. elected prepared for animation EVEN FRAMES Once Even Frames is picked even frames in the list window are selected prepared for animation ODD FRAMES Once Odd Frames is picked odd frames in the list window are selected prepared for animation SELECT FRAMES eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Once Select Frames is picked eta Post allows user to select more than frames prepared for animation Left mouse button picking works with CTRL and SHIFT user could select any desired frames e RANGE The RANGE window allows the user multiple options for determining the frames to be animated shown as Figure 7 1 4 The RANGE option allows the user to input a select range of frames and the increment they will be run at The input field for the RANGE option is not accessible until the option is selected After inputs desired values clicks ENTER to make the PLAY e RESET This function clears all previously selected frames enabled 9 11 3ANIMATION OPERATIONS Description This function allows the user to animate the selected frames shown as Figure 9 52 Frame Number 4 ENS appe ri Frames secand Figure 9 52 Animation Control Panel eta Post stars to animate the selected frames When click the PLAY icon the other three icons PAUSE STOP and EXPORT are active as Figure 9 53 Frame Number 1 Frames Second 29 gy Figure 9 53 Play Status e pause _ Pause the animation In this mode the f
219. elects this command VPG displays a ruler bar on the right side of the screen Moving the cursor up or down causes the model to rotate tick marks represent 20 degree rotation increments Clicking the left mouse button stops the rotation 10 9 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY VX VIRTUAL X ROTATION This command rotates the model about the global X the X axis is as displayed in the coordinate system at the lower left side of the screen When the user selects this command VPG displays a ruler bar on the right side of the screen Moving the cursor up or down causes the model to rotate tick marks represent 20 degree rotation increments Clicking the left mouse button stops the rotation e VY VIRTUAL Y ROTATION This command rotates the model about the global Y the Y axis is as displayed in the coordinate system in the lower left hand corner of the screen When the user selects this command VPG displays a ruler bar on the right hand side of the screen Moving the cursor up or down causes the model to rotate tick marks represent 20 degree rotation increments Clicking the left mouse button stops the rotation Aid VZ VIRTUAL Z ROTATION This command rotates the model about the global Z the Z axis is as displayed in the coordinate system in the lower left corner of the screen When the user selects this command VPG displays a ruler bar on the right side of the screen Moving the cursor up or down causes the model to rotate t
220. em EXIT INIT COND CARDS CFD Description This card defines initial CFD Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description INIT COND CARDS DETONATION Description This card defines points to initiate the location of high explosive detonations in part IDs that use material type 8 Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 15 2 for further description 6 138 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR INIT COND CARDS FOAM REF GEO Description This card defines initial foam reference geometry Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description INIT COND CARDS MOMENTUM Description This card defines initial momentum to be deposited in solid elements Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 15 6 for further description INIT COND CARDS STRAIN Description This card defines initial strain Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description INIT COND CARDS STRESS Description This card defines initial stress and plastic strains in the Hughes Liu beam elements Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Sections 15 8 15 10 15 12 for further description INIT COND CARDS TEMPERATURE Description This card defines initial nodal point temperatures using nodal set ID s or node numbers These initial temperatures are used in a thermal only analysis or a coupled thermal structural analysis Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 15 14 for further description INIT COND
221. enter the part s materials and properties at another time 10 3 8 CURRENT Description This function changes the current part All lines surfaces and elements that the user creates are automatically included in the current part The name of the current part is displayed in its part color in the lower right corner of the screen Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT NEW CURRENT PART gt PICK ALINE L ELEM C OR PART NAME P OF A PART The user selects a target part to make current Once the user selects the target part VPG makes the part current and displays the 10 15 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY part name in the lower right hand corner of the screen The user can also access the CURRENT PART function by clicking on the current part name displayed in the DISPLAY PARAMETER OPTIONS WINDOW 10 3 9 DELETE Description This function allows the user to delete a part with its associated surfaces lines and elements The nodes of a part that are selected for deletion become unreferenced and appear as white asterisks on the screen Note If deleting the CURRENT PART the user must select a new current part in order to continue model generation Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK ALINE L AN ELEM C OR PART NAME P OF A PART The user selects a target part 2 VPG prompts SELECT DELETE SELECTED PART OPTION PARTS ONLY PART NODES ABORT The user selects a deletion option PARTS ONLY deletes the part s selected along
222. er 9 14 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Figure 9 6 Post Processing Icons 9 4 2 DISPLAY OPTIONS Description The DISPLAY OPTIONS window displays the current part and contains the following commonly used functions Smooth Shade Gray Color Fill Color Element Edge Shrink Hidden Surface Plate Normal Background Figure 9 7 Display Options 9 4 2 1 SHADE toggle Description This command displays the elements as if they were illuminated by a light source Elements that are not directly exposed to the light source are appropriately shaded to simulate the actual shading effect Eta Post uses two methods for object shading flat and smooth Flat shading shades each polygon upon the intensity of the light over a series of polygons making the elements appear flat and angled 9 4 2 2 SMOOTH SHADE toggle Description This function uses the Gourand shading method to make the model appears more smoothly The feature angles between adjacent elements are smoothed by this shading method Note The SMOOTH SHADE option is only available when the SHADE option is on 9 4 2 3 GRAY COLOR toggle Description This function can only be used in SHADE mode If the function is toggled on the model will be plotted in gray color during deformed plot or animation deformation and the parts without stress strain during contour plot or animation If the parts are defined with material color in Part Attribute function
223. er 6 PRE PROCESSOR Select a new part by choosing its name or an element of it to replace the part that has been selected VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE TOLERANCE VALUE mm Key in a tolerance value between the old part and the new part VPG prompts gt REPLACE TARGET PART BY THIS PICKED PART Y N YES All connections were moved from the first selected part to the second selected part and the first selected part was deleted from the database NO will exit this function 6 19 8 REPLACE PART SET Description This function allows the user to select a part set to replace an old part set move the connections from the old part set to the new part set and delete the old part set Usage 6 219 VPG prompts gt REPLACE PART SET gt SELECTED THE PART SET AS TARGET gt SELECT SET FROM PART SET LIST Select a part set to be replaced from the part set list VPG prompts gt SELECT THIS PART SET AS TARGET Y N YES The selected part set will be replaced VPG prompts gt SELECTED THE PART SET TO REPLACE JUST PART SET gt SELECT SET FROM PART SET LIST Select another part set from the part set list to replace the part set that has been selected 4 VPG prompts 5 gt PLEASE INPUT THE TOLERANCE VALUE mm Key in a tolerance value between the old parts and the new parts VPG prompts gt REPLACE TARGET PART SET BY THIS PICKED ONE Y N YES All connections were moved from the first se
224. er to select a surface on the screen 2 Oncethe surface is selected VPG places edge numbers on the surface and prompts the user to enter a number of section lines along edges 1 and 2 3 VPG creates a set of section lines along edges 1 and 2 These lines are included in the current part 6 2 4 DELETE Description This function deletes the selected surfaces from the database Usage VPG prompts the user to select a surface on the screen 2 The user may select surfaces by part list or screen pick or by selecting displayed surfaces using the mouse 3 Surfaces will be highlighted as they are selected 4 Surfaces may be de selected by selecting REJECT LAST from the menu 5 The surface are deleted from the database when the EXIT command is executed 6 2 5 2 LINE SURFACE Description This function generates surfaces between two selected lines The orientation of the surface is independent of the direction of the lines The created surface are included in the CURRENT PART The CURRENT PART should be verified before proceeding with this function Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICKLINE LINE SEGMENT allows the user to combine a broken line while selecting lines 6 21 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR for the 2 LINE SURFACE function as in the COMBINE LINE function in the LINE section The user must select this option before selecting the desired lines for 2 LINE SURFACE The user may check the line s prior to executing this funct
225. er to the UTILITY MENU 10 4 7 IDENTIFY ELEMENTS Description This function allows the user to identify an element and its nodes by cursor selection Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENT BY CURSOR VPG identifies the element s respective type number part and nodes The selected element will be highlighted and element and node numbers will be displayed in the dialogue window The user also has the option to key in the number of a desired element to identify its location and characteristics It will also identify NASTRAN ELEMENT LS DYNA ELEMENT TYPE TYPE CBAR BEAM 9 RIGID EL RBE PLOTEL PLOTEL PLATE PLATE CELAS2 SPRING RBAHR MASS 9 9 RBE SEATBELT 9 10 26 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY IDENTIFY ELEMENTS displays element numbers and corresponding node numbers 10 4 8 LOAD CURVE Description This function defines and modifies the load curves for a nonlinear analysis The LOAD CURVE command requires several levels of submenus Usage 1 VPG displays the Load Curve option menu as below figure LOAD CORUE CREATE DELETE ERASE UHREF QURU LIST MODIFY READ CURVE RF HUHBER SHOW CURVE EXIT Figure 10 4 8 1 Load Curve Option Menu 2 After the user selects a command VPG lists a set of options specific to that command CREATE Description This function allows the user to create load curves Usage 1 VPG displays the CURVE DEFINITION CARD all
226. er to toggle the title on off 9 10 3 LOGO toggle Description This function toggles the logo ETA POST at the lower left corner of screen on and off 9 10 4 NORMAL COLOR toggle Description This option allows the user to display the part color on positive side and gray color on the negative side of the finite element model when PLATE NORMAL option is selected in the DISPLAY OPTIONS window This option is essential for the user to visually check the part for reversed normal of the finite element mesh Figure 9 46 shows a part displayed with NORMAL COLOR and PLATE NORMAL option 10 42 eta VPG 3 0 POST PROCESSING Chapter 9 Figure 9 46 Typical display with Normal Color and Plate Normal option e 9 10 5 ELEMENT ORIENTATION to It allows the user to visualize the direction of the element location U axis and local Z Description This option shows a vector from the first node to the second node of each plate element It is useful to check the orientation of the composite axis according to the right hand rule material Figure 9 47 shows a typical display of a part with ELEMENT ORIENTATION option EU xem Wi A A ARN ules 1564 A nue Us QA sa ESOT 4 nV bi ISS it z e SS Y Uae dy E PIA ETA POST Figure 9 47 Typical display with Element Orientation option eta VPG 3 0 9 43 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 11 POSTPROCESS The functions in th
227. ergy 3 Internal Energy 5 Total Energy B Total Initial Energy 8 Spring Damper Energy Damping Energy Sliding Energy External Work Step Size A vBlncity 1 v amp el ncity velocity Timo nar nna rola Flat New Graph Ss Exit Figure 9 66 Graph Control Window Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING contained data types will be displayed and the list box item may change depending upon the project For example in Figure 14 3 there are two types N A and Wall 1 9 12 4 COMPONENT LIST BOX Description The items list on Component box are not only depends upon the selected file type on Result file list box also depends upon the selected type on type list box Moreover the same as the item on type list only the actual contained data types will be displayed and the list box item may change depending upon the items specified in the analysis 9 12 5 PLOT Description This button allows the user to plot the selected item on Component list box with graph in current Curve window The example is shown on Figure 9 67 IE Td E Ld eri x De 5 Teu TEF j T T p 3 L jJ 1 P F cm 1 LL 4m T J ped E J L LE nl dam j alle Led Ei S LIN A gr F l ti l 13 iM EI di LT i a vd 1E j fri D wi cs c r uma ange m DE mA n ci Lum el ree chm EL am I i d Tm m XXL Io Uur INNEN M i r Ej en LiT LL pir So T op I p M Y ee aS ee eee a ti La re r r ve ES Lg LI PELLE ELI
228. ers should refer to NASTRAN software documentation 5 13 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 5 Detailed description 1 VPG Prompts ENTER CONTROLS OPTION ANALYSIS TYPE e Displays a submenu with NASTRAN analysis types gt File Manager HASTRAN FILE CONTROL ANALYSIS TYPE FORMAT OPTION OUTPUT OPTION FARAH CARDS WRITE FILE EAIT Figure 5 7 3 Nastran File Options 185 BUCKLING 186 H H LIHERR STATICS 1H8 DIHECT COMPLES EIGENVALUES 188 DIHECT FREQUENCY RESPONSE T89 DIRECT TRANSIENT RESPONSE 118 H bRL COMPLES EIGENVALUES 111 H bRL FREQUENCY RESPONSE 112 HODAL TRANSIENT RESPONSE 129 H H LIHERR TRANSIENT RESPONSE 153 STERDY STATE HEAT TRANSFER 159 THRHSIEHT HEAT TRANSFER EAIT Figure 5 7 4 Nastran analysis type FORMAT OPTION 5 14 Displays a submenu with file format options SIHGLE FIELD DOUBLE FIELD FREE FORMAT EXIT Figure 5 7 5 Nastran Format Option eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 5 File Manager SINGLE FIELD fixed format columns of eight DOUBLE FIELD double precision OUTPUT OPTION e Displays a submenu with output options Figure 5 7 6 Nastran Output Option PARAM CARDS e Displays the parameter modify window see figure below WRITE FILE EXIT zu dim A s oc LLI Figure 5 7 7 Nastran Parameter Card Window x zZ lt 2 VPG prompts TE gt ENTER FILE NAME OR STOP TO EXIT TE e Enter a file name up to 24 characters 3 VPG prompts gt OUTPUT ON
229. ers the options for the TRANSLATIONAL DRAG subsection of DRAG MESH This function extrudes the selected elements along the W axis to form the higher order elements i e 1D elements lt PLOTEL beams gt are extruded to form plates and plate elements are extruded to form solid elements Usage 1 VPG prompts to select elements 2 VPG prompts to create local coordinates 3 Once local coordinates are defined VPG prompts gt ENTER DRAG DISTANCE ALONG W AXIS OR 0 TO EXIT 4 Then VPG prompts gt ENTER NUMBER OF LAYERS ABOUT W AXIS OR 0 TO EXIT 5 Once the number of layers is entered the mesh is created VPG prompts gt ACCEPT MESH YES NO REMESH DRAG MESH 3 OR 4 LINE DRAG Description This section describes the options for the 3 OR 4 LINE DRAG subsection of DRAG MESH The line drag commands extrude the selected plate elements to create solid elements bounded by 3 or 4 lines in space Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT 3 THEN PRESS D OR 4 CONTROL LINES 6 57 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e The user must select the 4 volume lines in clockwise or counterclockwise order 3 Once the desired lines are selected VPG prompts gt ENTER NUMBER OF LAYERS OF SOLID ELEMENTS ACCEPT MESH Y N e Line direction is not important during 4 LINE DRAG but the lines should be of reasonable length to form the desired shape The control lines do not have to pass through the nodes of
230. erties 2 Once the user selects a section to be redefined VPG displays its definition card The user can then redefine that section 6 173 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 12 11 ERASE UNREF SECT Description This function automatically deletes all sections that have no parts assigned to them 6 12 12 LIST NASTRAN Description This function lists the names of the element properties in the VPG MENU WINDOW VPG displays the element properties in their corresponding colors when the properties are turned ON and in white when the properties are turned OFF 6 12 13 LIST LS DYNA Description This function displays the VPG section card list 6 12 14 ON OFF Description This function turns the selected property and its parts ON OFF Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a property gt SELECT SECTION WINDOW MULTI PT REGION ON ALL SECTION OFF ALL SECTION UNDO EXIT 2 VPG turns the selected property and its parts on off 6 12 15 PROPERTY PART COLOR toggle Description This function toggles the display of the part between its property and part color 6 12 16 RENUMBER Property ID Description This function renumbers the ID for a selected property or for all properties Usage 1 VPG prompts for the option 6 174 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt SELECT OPTIONS AUTOMATIC MLL DHE HY OME SELECT OHE EXIT 2 If the user enters AUTOMATIC ALL VPG prompts gt ENTER FIRST PROPERTY ID amp INC T
231. es a tied shell edge interface that can release locally as a function of plastic strain of the shells surrounding the interface nodes A rather ductile failure is achieved Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 4 58 for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS TIED NODES W FAIL Description This function defines a tied node set with the failure based on plastic strain The nodes must be coincident Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 4 60 for further description 6 8 3 INIT COND CARDS 6 137 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Description Initial condition cards provide a way of initializing velocities and detonation points Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION CFD DETONATION FDAH REF GED MOMENTUM STRAIN STRESS TEMPERATURE VEHICLE KINEHRTIDS VELOCITY UBlD UBLISHE FRACTIUH Note All of these options share this standard submenu Only the CREATE command differs with respect to each function and will be explained in the following pages CREATE Defines a new card DELETE Deletes a selected card or cards from those displayed in a pop up window LIST e Lists the cards in the option s database via pop up window MODIFY e Similar to the CREATE command this command lists the defined cards in a pop up window and allows the user to select and modify th
232. es parts to the current set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT element node part FOR type SET XXXX gt SELECT element node part 2 Once the elements nodes parts have been selected and the user has exited the INCLUDE submenu VPG displays the new additions with their set number and prompts gt XXXX ELEMENTS NODES PARTS IN SET XXXX 6 6 8 LIST Description This function displays a list of the defined sets in the model database 6 6 9 REMOVE Description This function removes elements nodes parts from the current set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT element node part FROM type SET XXXX gt SELECT element node part 2 Once the elements nodes parts have been selected and the user has exited the REMOVE submenu VPG removes the elements nodes part from their set 6 6 10 RENUMBER SET Description This function allows the user to renumber any of the defined sets This may be performed on a single set or an all sets contained in the database Usage 6 111 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 1 VPG prompts gt SELECTED OPTIONS AUTOMATIC ALL 2 If entering AUTOMATIC ALL VPG prompts gt ENTER FIRST type ID amp INC TYPE 0 TO EXIT 3 If entering ONE BY ONE VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW type SET ID OLD X TYPE 0 TO EXIT e his prompt is repeated until all sets are given a new set ID 4 If entering SELECT ONE VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM type SET LIST e Once setis selected VPG prompts
233. eta VPG User s Manual A Mechanical System Simulation Software eta VPG Version 3 0 Manual Release Date November 4 2004 FOREWARD The concepts methods and examples presented in this text are for illustrative and educational purposes only and are not intended to be exhaustive or to apply to any particular engineering problem or design This material is a compilation of data and figures from many sources Engineering Technology Associates Inc assumes no liability or responsibility to any person or company for direct or indirect damages resulting from the use of any information contained herein Engineering Technology Associates Inc 1133 East Maple Road Suite 200 Troy MI 48083 Phone 248 729 3010 Support 800 ETA 3362 Fax 248 729 3020 Engineering Technology Associates Inc ETA the ETA logo and eta VPG are the registered trademarks of Engineering Technology Associates Inc All other trademarks or names are the property of their respective owners Copyright 2004 Engineering Technology Associates Inc All rights reserved TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION DOCUMENTATION eta VPG History eta VPG Methodology eta VPG Software Package eta VPG Special Features Section 1 1 Section 1 2 Section 1 3 Section 1 4 Section 1 5 CHAPTER 2 FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS OVERVIEW General Pre Processor Post Processor Menu System Function Keys Display Window Icon Bar Mouse Functions Keyboard Ent
234. etting e EXIT Close the light property control window and Figure 9 18 Color Map Control exit the function 988COLORMAP 11 QEMEMESX Description Eta Post uses 14 different colors to distinguish parts in the model This function enables the user to modify any part color from default setting The program displays the COLOR MAP control window as shown in Figure 9 19 The user may select any color to modify by clicking on a color block in the color palette The program will display a change part color control window as shown in Figure 9 20 The procedure of changing Part Color is same as in Change Material Color that has been described in Section 4 6 Figure 9 19 Part Color Control 9 8 9 PART ATTRIBUTES Fart attributes Description The functions in PART ATTRIBUTES PattColor control window allow the user to customize the display characteristics for selected parts in the model There are fives options The default PART ATTRIBUTES control window is shown in Figure 9 19 e PART COLOR The user may change part color from the color list Click on the PART COLOR option and select the parts from the part list Figure 4 7 1 Part Attributes control window Part Color 9 27 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 9 28 POST PROCESSING window or click the part from the screen The program will mark the part name with an asterisk and highlight the parts on the screen Select a color from the color table to change the part co
235. f tools to help the user better understand and convey the results Features include the ability to manipulate the display area s settings labels colours etc and a host of advanced filtering techniques FIR SAE Butterworth averaging etc The detailed description of available function in GRAPH is given in the following sections The GRAPH function can be active by click the GRAPH icon on toolbar in despite of if the user have loaded a model file to current database or not Then the result file load control window will pop up on the right of screen for the user to load the time history result file The control window is shown in Figure 7 14 1 Graph Result File Load Exit Figure 9 65 The Initial Graph Window 9 12 1 LOAD RESULT FILE Description The function allows the user to read result files form LS DYNA analysis into the current database The user has the ability to input LS DYNA ASCII State and Time data formats Click the Load button and the program pops up the Select File dialog box for user to select a 9 55 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING database file The figure is shown in Figure 7 14 2 D3PLOT GRAPH DATA Description Select File EM A_ModehResulli raining C Springback glstat 2 matsurm I7 redout 3 I7 Sleout File Name Open File Type D3plot Graph Data Figure 9 65 Select File dialog box There are some kinds of D8plot graph data format supported by eta Post P
236. faces DISPLAYED SURFACES allows the user to automesh all surfaces at once To model one surface at a time default the user selects an individual surface with the cursor and selects DONE Usage 1 VPG prompts to select surface mesh methods Surface mesh methods as following TOPOLOGY MESH WIR TABLE MESH PAULING HESH Enter TOPOLOGY MESH and VARIABLE MESH 2 VPG prompts to select surface ei ped Wired hihi ST GWoREHO E STE WEE 3 After selecting surface the Mesh srwacenp me Eo Input Window pops up and allows EBuwrGe o parameters to be set in the window Click ELEMENT Pin OK to close the window The Mesh Input Window is as following Bi Check irtara bp ri pur Arge iah 4 VPG prompts iann Part gt CONTINUE MESHING Y N mbci an 8 aro epar 5 VPG prompts aah Quali gt ACCEPT MESH werrene iu YES NO RE MESH ewm 050 ASPECT RATIO fill Enter PAVING MESH oaas oces i TR MARET AMELE i0 E DAD ME TIT AOLE EE ui 2 VPG prompts to select surface cua went awa ix MEELEMSUE fri 3 VPG prompts WArElEMSUE 502 ak tam 6 64 ai 9 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt INCLUDE ELEMENTS IN THEIR ORIGINAL PART Y N YES VPG creates and stores the elements in the PID of the surface from which they were created NO VPG creates and stores the elements in the current part 4 After entering YES or NO a pop up window appears and VPG prompts
237. function REMOVE NODES IN SET without releasing any of the selected grids SPC SHOW Description This function allows the user to display all or some of the defined SPC sets VPG displays D O F next to each node Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK SPC TO SHOW List of all SPC sets CURSOR AT NODE WINDOW MULTI PT REGION SELECT ALL UNDO ALL EXIT 6 9 4 INITIAL VELOCITY Description This function allows the user to define and assign both linear and angular velocities to selected nodes Usage 1 VPG displays a list of additional commands in the options area CREATE DELETE LIST H bLFY S HOW eee ee cNAN ERIT 2 Each of these commands is described in the following pages 6 155 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR INITIAL VELOCITY CREATE Description This function enables the user to define and assign initial velocity to the displayed model Usage 1 After the user enters CREATE the BOUNDARY BTIC DEFINITION window pops up and the user sets parameters in the window INITIAL VELOCITY DELETE Description This function enables the user to remove the selected initial velocities from the database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO DELETE e All available initial velocities are listed in the TIC CARD LIST box INITIAL VELOCITY LIST Description This function lists the defined initial velocities in a pop up window Usage 1 VPG prompts gt LIST SET ONLY EXIT
238. function calculates the distance between two nodes selected by cursor pick or key in node number The program displays a CONTROL OPTION window as shown as Figure 1 5 Control Gptian Select by Cursor Key in id Reject Last Figure 9 5 Measure distance Control Option window The operation on SEELECT BY CURSOR and KEY IN ID is same as in IDENTIFY NODE function REJECT LAST allows user to reject the last selected node Once two nodes are selected the program labels the distance and X Y Z components between the selected nodes on the screen and also outputs the information in the message window ANGLE BETWEEN THREE NODES This function measures the angle between two vectors formed by three nodes The first selected node defines the vertex of the angle The program displays a CONTROL OPTION window that is common with the one in DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO NODES function Once three nodes are selected the program labels the angle at the vertex node and outputs the information in the message window 9 4 1 POSTPROCESSING ICONS The functions in the POSTPROCESS icon bar allow the user to access the functions to process the result files There are two kinds of icon on the eta Post one is global icons which control part on off views and dynamic rotation The seond group of icons controls the type of post processing to be performed deformed shape stress vector plots of graphing Each of thse are described in the following sections of this chapt
239. function defines interfaces for linking calculations Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION INTERFACE OPTIORS COMFOMEMT HODE COMPOMEMT SEGHEHT DISCRETE MODE LIME DISCRETE SET LINE LIHK SEGHEHT LIKE EDGE Juv SPRIBGCHACK e All of the preceding commands yield varying definition cards except for SPRINGBACK Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 17 for further description of the above commands 2 Upon selecting SPRINGBACK VPG displays a pop up window with the following selections MAZD MOTHICKMESS STRAH THICHHESS STR H HOTHILEHESS ERIT e Once the thickness is determined VPG displays the appropriate definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 17 for further description of the above command 6 196 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 14 12 SEATBELT Description This function defines a seatbelt Usage 1 When SEATBELT is selected VPG prompts the following card options gt SELECT OPTION SEATBELT ADD CARDS RCCELERGHETER PRE TENS OHER RETRACTOR SEHSIR SLIPRING EXIT e Each of these seatbelt functions yields various definition cards For further description of these cards refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 11 6 14 13 TERMINATION Description This function defines the analysis termination point in reference to a particular node or body The nodal stop condition works on the global coordinate position while
240. further description BOUNDARY CARDS AMBIENT EOS 6 129 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Description This function defines ambient Equation of State boundary conditions for a thermal or coupled thermal structural analysis Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS CONVECTION Description This function defines convection boundary conditions for a thermal or coupled thermal structural analysis Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 3 1 for further description BOUNDARY CARDS CYCLIC Description These boundary conditions can be used to model a segment of an object that has rotational symmetry such as an impeller The segment boundaries may be curved or planar Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 3 4 for further description BOUNDARY CARDS ELEMENT METHOD Description This function defines element method boundary conditions Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS FLUX Description This function defines flux boundary conditions for a thermal or coupled thermal structural analysis Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 3 6 for further description BOUNDARY CARDS MCOL Description This function defines MCOL boundary conditions Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS NON REFLECTING Description This function defines a non reflecting boundary The option applies to continuum domains
241. g global location in terms of its X Y Z coordinates and node or point number Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS ALL NODES KEY IH HOCE HUHBEHR e lf ALL NODES is selected VPG displays the appropriate numbers at the node locations elf KEY IN NODE NUMBER is selected VPG displays the appropriate node location The following message will echo on the command line gt NODE xxxx Xzx xxx Yzy yyy Z 2Z zzz e f NODE is selected VPG displays the number of the node nearest the cursor location The following message will echo on the command line gt NODE xxxx Xzx xxx Yzy yyy Zzzzzz e f POINT is selected VPG displays the number of the point nearest the cursor location The following message will echo on the command line gt POINT xxxx Xzx xxx Ye y yyy Z 2Z zzz e EXIT completes the command sequence and returns the user to the NODE OPTIONS menu Note To clear the label display select CLEAR from the VPG DISPLAY PARAMETER OPTIONS module 6 4 11 LABEL Description This function toggles the node labels ON OFF When the user selects LABEL VPG displays the numbers of the nodes in the database 6 81 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 4 12 MOVE NODE TO PT NODE Description This function moves referenced or unreferenced nodes to any location on the display screen Usage 1 VPQG prompts gt SELECT NODE TO MOVE e UNDO LAST is a valid selection only after a node has been moved This command returns the
242. g the mouse in the Graphic Display area E SELECT BY FREE HAND This function allows the user to select a region by a free hand all parts including the selected elements are selected The user depresses the left mouse button and moves the mouse to select the desired region SELECT BY ELEMENT TYPE This function allows the user to turn selected element types on off so that they are shown or no longer shown in the window list and in the GRAPHIC DISPLAY window BEAM All parts with the beam element are removed from the part list if the BEAM is toggled off And all parts with the beam element appear in the part list if the BEAM is toggled on SHELL All parts with the shell element are removed from the part list if the SHELL is toggled off And all parts with the shell element appear in the part list if the SHELL is toggled on SOLID All parts with the solid element are removed from the part list if the SOLID is toggled off And all parts with the solid element appear in the part list if the SOLID is toggled on OTHER All parts with the line are removed from the part list if the OTHER is toggled off And all parts with the line appear in the part list if the OTHER is toggled on KEEP If KEEP is selected the selected parts are highlighted and are labeled with asterisk on the Part List When the user exits the function only the selected parts remain displayed ALL ON Turns all parts on and displays them on the screen ALL OFF 9 10
243. ganized as follows WRITE COHMECTION HORAL RIGID BOO PPE LH GAMER Select one connection type Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE FILE NAME gt ENTER DATABASE FILE NAME Enter a file name up to 24 characters 2 f the file name is a new one VPG will create it VPG writes the chosen connection information to the file and returns the user to the WRITE CONNECTION menu 3 If the file name is old VPG prompts gt WARNING FILE xml ALREADY EXISTS OVERWRITE Y N gt YES Overwrite the file with new data NO Exit and do nothing 6 17 3 CREATE CONNECTION Description This function allows the user to create connections of five types as following CREATE COMMECTION HORAL RIGID BOO SPEIHG DRHPER 6 17 4 MODIFY CONNECTION Description This function allows the user to modify connections Choose one type of them and select a connection 6 206 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 After entering MODIFY CONNECTION VPG prompts gt ENTER COMMAND CHAHGE ELEMENT TVPE ACHI TU MATION SP DIS BEAM TO MATIDA SP RHE TO SPRIHE SPOTWELD TO REE SPRING TO SPOTWELD EXIT 6 17 5 DELETE CONNECTION Description This function allows the user delete connections of the five types Choose one type of them and select a connection Usage DONE The selected connections would be deleted from the database ABORT Do nothing and exit 6 17 6 REPLACE PART Descrip
244. gend for the corresponding color values is displayed in the upper right hand corner of the Screen Time History Plot eta VPG s TIME HISTORY PLOT functions enable the user to visualize the results of an analysis with XY plots VPG offers a wide range of tools to manipulate the information on the display screen with labels colors multiple graphs and a host of advanced filtering techniques e g FIR Butterworth SAE scaling smoothing and averaging FFT Fast Fourier Transform The TIME FREQUENCY function allows the user to convert time domain to frequency domain response for signal processing analysis The FFT equation is used to convert time domain to frequency domain and frequency domain to time domain for any graph plot 2 5 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features 2 4 MENU SYSTEM The program starts in the MAIN menu see figure 2 3 1 and branches out into submenus The user selects a sub menu by mouse pick or keyboard entry Descriptions for these menu options are located in their respective sections File Parts Pre Eoad Suspensiow Tire Safety malysis Fatigue ost Graph Wtilities View Help Figure 2 3 1 Main Menu 2 6 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 2 FILE PART PRE LINE SURFACE OPTIONS ELEMENT OPTIONS NODE OPTIONS MODEL CHECKER SET MENU BOUNDARY CONDITIONS MATERIAL ELEMENT PROPERTY CONTACT INTERFACE DYNA MISCELLANEOUS NASTRAN MISCELLANEOUS SUPER ELEMENT MASS MENU ASSEMBLY 2 A
245. gram e g NASTRAN LS DYNA defined in the SETUP menu 2 Once the user has chosen a material type a pop up window appears with the material s properties The displayed property table allows the user to insert values for the material s properties 6 11 5 DELETE Description This function deletes the user selected materials from the database Usage 1 VPG prompts the user for the name of the target material gt SELECT MATERIAL gt PICK AN ELEM C OR MATERIAL NAME M OF A MATL 2 The user selects the material to be deleted The elements that are assigned with that material turn gray and VPG prompts gt MATERIAL ID X IS SELECTED e If the user enters EXIT VPG deletes the material and changes the color of the part from gray to white The white indicates that the part does not have any material properties assigned to it VPG returns to step 1 6 11 6 DEFINE PROPERTIES Description This function defines or modifies the properties of a selected material Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a material gt SELECT A MATERIAL e The user selects a material by picking an element C or material name M of a material 2 After the user selects a material the MATERIAL DEFINITION window appears and a prompt reads gt MATERIAL ID X IS SELECTED 6 166 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 3 VPG displays the properties and the type of material that the user has defined ina table The user may modify the properties in the wi
246. gt DEFINE MODIFY MESH QUALITY CRITERIA e The MESH QUALITY CRITERIA window is as following E MESH QUALITY CRITERTA XJ S ET Lg sse WARPAGE Um ap ASPECT RATIO snapnaE eun MIN INT ANGLE TRI EAC ta MAX INT ANGLE TRI fi 200008E a02 MIN INT ANGLE QUAD s snapnarcami MAX INT ANGLE QUAD MIN ELEMENT SIZE MAX ELEMENT SIZE OK Cancel 5 VPG then prompts gt ENTER NO OF ELEMENTS N1 N2 N3 N4 See the 2 LINE MESH command in this section for a description of this prompt e fatrimmed surface is selected only N1 N2 will be prompted 6 Once the number of elements has been entered VPG checks the mesh quality and displays the MESH QUALITY CHECK window VPG prompts gt ACCEPT MESH YES NO RE MESH VPG creates a mesh that merges coincident nodes on the boundary lines between surfaces VPG optimizes most boundary problems 7 To mesh multiple surfaces at once users select multiple surfaces in the same way and elements are selected VPG prompts gt ENTER THE ELEMENT SIZE OR 1 TO EXIT Enter TRIANGULAR MESH 2 VPG prompts to select surface 3 VPG prompts gt ENTER THE BDY GAP OVERLAP TOL DEFAULT 2 5 OR 1 TO EXIT 6 65 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt ENTER THE ELEMENT SIZE DEFAULT 15 0 OR 1 TO EXIT INCLUDE ELEMENTS IN THEIR ORIGINAL PART Y N 4 After entering YES or NO VPG prompts gt CONTINUE
247. gv NASTRAN results file pch op2 NASTRAN model file nas dat DYNAFORM VPG FEMB LINE DATA file lin OP Og Ie eta Post can open DYNA result files to process the results directly After the NASTRAN result file is loaded the program will require loading the corresponding NASTRAN model file The user may import LINE DATA DYNA or NASTRAN model files 9 6 CONFIGURATION FILE The etapost config file or initialization file controls the default setting of eta Post This file is located in the installation directory and can be edited via the text editor The normal content of the etapost config file is HETA Post User Configure File GRAPHIC ENGINE 4 Buffer Bit 16 Color Buffer Bit 16 Edge Color 255 255 255 Background Color n0 OU aor Plotter Styler GDI Light Source Type LOCAL second Render OFF Debug OFF WINDOW FARAMETER Layout Type RIGHT PRODUCT PARAMETER Product Name DYWAFORM Extended GUI OW DIRECTORY Home F Q Model DF test INDEX FILE File Name etapost idx 9 6 1 GRAPHIC ENGINE Description The parameters in this group are used to customize the OpenGL behavior with various graphics cards 9 17 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Z buffer Bit Sets the bits of Z buffer when rendering a model the default value is 16 Color buffer Bit Setting the bits of color buffer when displaying a model the default value is 16 Edge color Setting the color of the edge of m
248. he Apply button to change the setting 9 12 6 5 BACKGROUND COLOR Description This function offers an option for the user to change the background colour of the curve window The default background colour of the curve window is black and the colour is displaying on the button The user can click this button and the colour panel will pop up and prompt the user to select the desired colour for the curve The colour panel is shown in figure 14 8 If don t want to change the colour after the colour panel have popped up the user can click anywhere else on the screen to cancel the colour select Then click the Apply button to change the setting Figure 9 71 The Curve Color Palette 9 12 6 7 AXIS OPERATION 9 67 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Description Those functions on Axis Operation enable the user to modify the attribute of the axis of coordinate including Log X Log Y Grid displaying and change the high of Y axis 9 12 6 8 LOG X and LOG Y toggle Description This function enables the user to change the X and Y coordinate values to logarithmic values 9 12 6 9 GRID Description This function enables the user to display grid on the curve Please refer to the Figure 7 14 7 9 12 6 10 AXIS HEIGHT Description This function enables the user to specify the height of y axis on the curve window through clicking with left mouse on the area of positive orientation of y axis The user can re click the Modify button to cance
249. he bottom surface see 6 LINE MESH and 3 lines connecting the top and bottom surfaces Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT 3 LINES AT BOTTOM gt SELECT 3 LINES AT TOP gt SELECT 3 LINES ON THE SIDE STARTING BETWEEN LINE 1 amp 3 9 LINE MESH is similar to 6 LINE MESH with the exception of 3 connecting lines Line direction clockwise or counter clockwise for all line selections should be consistent 2 See 6 LINE MESH for further details and the prompt descriptions SOLID MESH 12 LINE SOLID MESH Description This function allows the user to generate 8 node solid elements automatically in a volume The volume is defined by 12 lines 4 lines for the top surface 4 lines for the bottom surface see 8 LINE MESH and 4 lines for connecting the top and bottom surfaces Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECTA LINES AT BOTTOM gt SELECT A LINES AT TOP gt SELECTA LINES ON THE SIDE STARTING BETWEEN LINE 1 amp 4 12 LINE MESH is similar to 8 LINE MESH with the exception of 4 connecting 6 71 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR lines The user should maintain the consistent direction clockwise counter clock wise for all line selections 2 See section 8 LINE MESH for further details and prompt descriptions SOLID MESH TETRA MESH Description This function allows the user to generate 4 or 10 node solid elements automatically in a volume Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT TETRA MESH OPTION M HODES 48 NODES
250. he definition cards in the HISTORY subsection specify which nodes or elements are outputted into the binary history file Usage 6 188 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION DATABASE HISTORY OPTION ne AM BEAM SET AO DE HIE LOCAL HODE SET HOE SET LOCAL PLATE PLATE SET SOLID SOLIO SET TSHELL SET TSHELL EXIT The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 8 19 for further description DATABASE NODAL FORCE GROUP Description The definition cards in the NODAL FORCE GROUP subsection specify a nodal force group for output into ASCII files Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 8 20 for further description DATABASE SPRING FORWARD Description The definition card in the SPRING FORWARD subsection creates a spring forward nodal force file Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 8 21 for further description DATABASE SUPER PLASTIC FORMING Description The definition card in the SUPER PLASTIC FORMING subsection specifies the output intervals to the superplastic forming output files 6 189 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 When DEFINE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA
251. he options for the RIGID BODY RBE3 subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER COMPONENT NUMBERS DEFAULT 123456 OR 1 TO EXIT e Defines the degrees of freedom 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT REFERENCE NODE FOR RBE3 3 VPG prompts gt ENTER WEIGHTING FACTOR WT 1 REAL OR 0 TO END gt ENTER COMPONENT WITH WEIGHTING FACTOR DEFAULT 123 gt FOR NODE WITH WEIGHTING FACTOR 100E 01 gt SELECT INDEPENDENT NODES 4 Step 3 is repeated until the user selects DONE or ABORT CREATE SPOTWELD NASTRAN 6 49 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Description This function allows the user to create local coordinate systems to be attached to the RBAR or RBE2 elements for the application of weld study Two options are provided The first option creates the RBAR and attaches the local coordinate systems at each node automatically The second option attaches the local coordinate system automatically to the existing RBAR elements Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT COORDINATE SYSTEM TYPE RECTANGULAR CYLINDRICAL SPHERIDAL RRORT 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT LOCAL AXIS ALONG RBAR RBE2 3 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION TO CREATE SPOTWELD 4 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODE POINT FOR INDEPENDENT NODE his step is repeated once and the SPOTWELD is defined e Once the SPOTWELD is defined its coordinate system is displayed CREATE NODAL RIGID BODY LS DYNA Descript
252. he outer boundary and the inner boundary will be retained during the trim operation The inner boundary can be a line segment open spline closed spline or circle ABORT DONE EXIT NO INNER BOUNDARY e The surface outside of the outer boundary will be trimmed CURVE ON SURFACE e The user may select an existing curve on the surface open or closed as the inner boundary of the trim operation REJECT LAST CURVE e Deselects the curve selected for the trim operation 4 VPG then prompts gt DELETE THE ORIGINAL SURFACE Y N e YES generates a trimmed surface e NO generates a trimmed surface and retains the original surface 5 The user is returned to step 2 of TRIM SURFACE command 6 34 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR TRIM SURFACE REJECT LAST POINT Description This function deselects points when defining a trim line TRIM SURFACE DONE CLOSED Description This function defines a closed curve on a selected surface After determining the surface type of curve and points this function connects the points closing the curve with the first and last points selected linked 6 2 22 UNTRIM SURFACE Description This function removes all holes on the selected surface Once the surface is selected all holes on the surface are removed Usage 1 VPG prompts to select surface 2 Once the surface is selected VPG prompts gt KEEP THE TRIM LINES YES NO If there is no hole on selected surface VPG prompts gt SUR
253. hics display window to a printer or saves it to a image file This function allows the user to define the default settings for printing or saving image files The options are shown in Figure 9 12 etanjHP LaserJet EL Print To File Format Onentation amp Landscape t nn x Matrtier of Copies C Portat F Print Background T Bounding Box Print Stamp Time F Print File Hame f Prin ETA Logo I Keep Background white f Print Graphic Description Figure 9 12 Print Window 9 7 5 1 PRINTER Description The user can select a printer or select a format to save to a file e Enter the printer name in the field or select from the drop down list and click PRINT to print the image 9 21 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING e f PRINT TO FILE option is selected the user can choose a format by selecting the options in the drop down list in FORMAT window DYNAFORM supports Postscript PS Encapsulated Postscript EPS GIF and JPEG file formats Note When PRINT TO FILE is selected the program will prompt the user to enter a filename to save the current display to a file of the specified format 9 7 5 2 PAPER Description The user can specify the paper size and or margin for the image print out e Select the button at the top left to choose a paper size Note The supported sizes are LETTER 8 5x11 inches A4 8 26x11 69 and B5 7 17x10 13 Users can also specify a paper size for a specific paper by entering size
254. hodology to grow in scope of application and reliability The release of VPG 1 0 in 1998 was an effort to address the specific needs of system modeling by combining the tools created for tire modeling and suspension modeling with the finite element meshing and associated tools found within the eta FEMB product As usage progressed and the needs of users expanded fatigue analysis software was embedded into VPG as were the signal processing tools used in NVH post processing The dual nature of many of the models created in VPG and the desire to construct one model for use in several types of simulations drove the development of the VPG Safety module This module was incorporated into eta VPG version 2 0 which was released in 2002 1 3 VPG Methodology for Event Simulations Virtual Proving Ground VPG is a general term used to reference a simulation methodology using the tire and proving ground road surface approach The VPG method is a set of techniques used with an explicit nonlinear dynamic analysis program which allows for the complete analysis of a mechanical system including all joints bushings materials and geometric non linearities using an event based analysis The class of problems targeted is those in which a mechanical system is to be analyzed in a dynamic sense In other words when a mechanical system is in use the displacements forces accelerations and stresses occur in real time The VPG method allows for the calculation
255. hs is accessed through this menu selection 4 12 UTILITIES The UTILITIES menu allows users to perform various modeling and display functions As an example the user may add Arrows or Comments on the screen for additional information when creating JPEG or GIF image files An important feature of the UTILITIES menu is the SETUP command This command allows the user to specify display and model database characteristics From this menu the user may specify the model type and global parameters to be applied to the model On the SETUP menu the user may specify the analysis program for the current database This function defines the menus that will be displayed as well as the content of those menus As an example when the NASTRAN option is selected for this command the menus will then contain the material types element types and boundary conditions that pertain to NASTRAN models All analysis parameters will also be specified in a manner consistent with NASTRAN If the user selects LS DYNA similarly all menus material models contact types and element types will be consistent with LS DYNA models 4 13 VIEW This menu allows users to manipulate the model in the Display Window Views may be saved and recalled by the user 4 14 HELP The HELP menu allow user to identify the build date and version of the VPG software The HELP menu provides access to the on line version of this documentation in a searchable format Contains online help and
256. ial by entering one by name or by picking an element on the screen that is assigned to the desired material default 3 After the user selects the material VPG prompts gt MATERIAL ID X IS SELECTED gt SELECT PARTS TO ASSIGN MATERIAL gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART 4 The material will be assigned to the selected elements of the parts The selected parts will be shown in the material color after the user exits this command 6 11 2 CHANGE COLOR Description This function changes the color of a selected material Usage 1 The color bar is displayed on the right edge of the graphic area 2 After the user selects the material VPG prompts gt MATERIAL ID X IS SELECTED gt SELECT COLOR FROM COLOR BAR OR EXIT 3 The color of the material changes to the user selected color from the color bar 6 11 3 COPY Description This function duplicates the properties from one material onto another material Usage 1 VPG displays the material card list and prompts gt SELECT MATERIAL TO COPY 2 Once the user selects a material to copy VPG copies the material and prompts MATERIAL ID X IS SELECTED gt MATERIAL ID XX DUPLICATED FROM MATERIAL ID X e The user exits the function COPY 6 11 4 CREATE Description This function creates a new material 6 165 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 A pop up window appears with the material types The list of the material types depends on the analysis pro
257. ibutes control window No Contour There are some functional buttons on the Part Attributes window for the user to easily select groups of parts ALL PARTS Enable the user to select all the parts on the current database DISPLAYED Enable the user to select all the parts that displaying on the current window REVERSE Enable the user to reverse the selected parts All the selected parts will be unselected and all the unselected parts will be selected CLEAR SELECTION Turn all the selected parts to unselected UNDO Enable the user to cancel the last selected operation before pressing the Apply button REDO Enable the user to cancel the UNDO operation APPLY Enable the user to execute the selected operation SAVE Enable the user to save the current part attributes in file A Select file dialog box will pop up and prompt the user to specify a name after clicking this button RECALL Enable the user to load the previously saved parts attribute file and set as the current parts attribute 9 8 12 USER DEFINED VIEW Description This function is used to save the current viewing orientation and recall the previously saved view User may save up to 10 views in a session The program displays a control window as shown in Figure 9 25 9 29 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING View List Userievy 1 Userieywe 2 Save View Delete Recall view Exit Figure 9 25 User View control window e SAVE VIEW Save the current viewing orient
258. ick marks represent 20 degree rotation increments Clicking the left mouse button stops the rotation S TOP VIEW This command automatically displays the model from the TOP or XY plane 1 SIDE VIEW This command automatically displays the model from the SIDE or XZ plane al REAR VIEW This command automatically displays the model from the REAR or YZ plane Y ISOMETRIC VIEW This command automatically displays the model form the ISOMETRIC 60 Degree Isometric point of view FREE ROTATION The Freehand Rotation FREROT command is a combination of SX and SY Moving the mouse up down manipulates SX Moving the mouse left right manipulates SY Moving the mouse diagonally combines the movements of both commands Clicking the left mouse button stops the rotation This function can also be activated by pressing Control and the left mouse button a t PAN This command translates the model by following the movement of the cursor If the cursor is moved off the screen the cursor reappears at the center of the screen Clicking the left 10 10 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY mouse button stops the pan This function can also be activated by pressing Control and the middle mouse button aj CURSOR ZOOM The user picks a point about which to zoom The model is centered about this point and the User may move the cursor up or down to zoom in and out This function can also be activated by pressing Control and the right mous
259. in eta Post are prioritized Functions in Display Options can be accessed to at any time The functions in Edit and Tool menu have the highest priority If any of these functions is started all other functions in eta POST are disabled Control Window has the lowest priority The user is enabled to access other functions when Control window is opened Only functions in Edit menu Tool menu and Display Option are allowed to be used during animation 9 4 4 CONTROL WINDOW AND CONTROL OPTION WINDOW Description eta Post incorporates two types of window FUNCTION DIALOG WINDOW and CONTROL WINDOW At the bottom of the FUNCTION DIALOG WINDOW there are buttons to execute reject reset the data or close the window The functions of these buttons are listed below APPLY Executes the current function CANCEL Rejects the current operation EXIT Exits the current window OK Accepts the data in the dialog box and forwards the user to the next step UNDO Rejects the last step of the operation RESET Restores the original set REJECT Rejects the previous selection 9 16 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 5 FILE FORMAT The protocol for naming files during an eta Post session includes attaching suffixes to the file names that specify the file tyoes The appropriate file names are listed in the option area of the display screen DYNA result file d3plot d3drif dynain DYNA model file dyn DYNA result file of eigenvalue analysis d3ei
260. in the database 5 12 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 5 File Manager 5 7 7 WRITE MOLDFLOW FILE This function allows the user to output the current model data into an external file in MOLDFLOW format VPG supports Moldflow version 5 1 Note Node and element numbers must be in sequence to write a MOLDFLOW file The user may either renumber or compress nodes elements see NODE OPTIONS menu If the nodes are not in sequential order VPG prompts gt RENUMBER NODE NUMBERS AND TRY AGAIN or gt RENUMBER ELEMENT NUMBERS AND TRY AGAIN 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER ROOT NAME FOR INPUT FILES OR STOP TO EXIT e VPG writes three files in accordance with the MOLDFLOW format mfl mod and tri 2 If the file name already exists the program will prompt the following message gt FILENAME ALREADY EXISTS O K TO OVERWRITE Y N e YES will overwrite the existing file e N will prompt for a file name 3 After entering file name VPG prompts gt SELECT UNIT CURRENTLY USED IN DATABASE MM CM IN 4 VPG prompts gt OUTPUT ONLY ACTIVE PARTS Y N e YES will only output the elements displayed on the screen e NOwill output all elements existing in the database 5 VPG prompts gt ENTER TITLE 5 7 8 WRITE NASTRAN This function allows the user to output the current model data to an external file into NASTRAN format The user may output either the complete model data or partial model data For detailed descriptions of these options us
261. in the work directory gt CHECKING xxxx NODES FOR DUPLICATE NODES gt DUPLICATE NODE xxxx CHANGED TO yyyy gt XXXx DUPLICATE NODES FOUND If no duplicate nodes are found the following messages echo on screen and in the VPG msg user files located in the work directory gt CHECKING xxxx NODES FOR DUPLICATE NODES gt NO DUPLICATE NODE FOUND 6 4 4 CHANGE ID Description This function changes the numbers of the existing nodes The parts containing these nodes do not need to be on or current during this procedure Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODE FOR NEW NODE NUMBER e The user can select the node nearest the cursor by pressing the left mouse button instead of typing the letter N or entering the keyboard option 2 After selecting a node the user is prompted for a new node number gt ENTER NEW NODE NO FOR XXXX OR CR FOR UNCHANGE e Any unused positive integer is a valid entry If the entered number is already being used the following prompt will appear NODE NUMBER xxxx ALREADY EXISTS REQUEST DENIED gt ENTER NEW NODE NO FOR XXXX OR CR FOR UNCHANGE 6 4 5 COINCIDENT CHECK Description This option checks for coincident nodes that may be in the displayed or other part s of the model Coincident nodes are defined as having distance between each other that is less than or equal to a specified tolerance The VPG default tolerance which is the 6 77 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR lowest tolerance V
262. indicates that this type of card has not been defined e Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 8 4 for further description of the DATABASE BINARY definition cards DJPLUE COHPLETE HTPEI STATE TES DJTHDT ELEHEHT SUBSET T H FES bunHLF GVHAMIE HELAXAT TEH n Dapur BIHAAY RESTARE FILE TEL DIRE OH HERH VALUE Da eae HE DIPAME PARTIAL UTPUT STAT ub D3CHCM CRRCK DATA Hi IRTFUA COHTACT L MNTEBEFEDE DATA wn W BH F BIHARY RESTART FILE mi AIFILE EXTRA TIPE HIZTEKY DATA H ERIT DATABASE CROSS SECTION Description The definition cards in the CROSS SECTION subsection define a cross section for resultant forces written to an ASCII Section Force file 6 186 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW CROSS SECTION ID X OR E TO EXIT 2 After entering new cross section ID VPG prompts gt SELECT CROSS SECTION TYPE PLANE see step 3 SET see step 7 3 Ifthe user selects PLANE VPG will first prompt for a part set gt SELECT PART SET ALL PARTS 1 CRERTE 2 SELECT e VPG then prompts for a coordinate system for the cross section see Coordinate System Section 2 15 4 Next the user will be prompted for the origin of the cross section 5 VPG then prompts gt ENTER LENGTH L ALONG U AND M ALONG V 0 FOR INFINITE 6 After entering the U V increments VPG displays the cross section The following commands are availabl
263. indow below Lookin C vpo vPG_2004_04_O2 VPG3 O v lt a a steering_control vpg je test 1 vpg i until vpg File Name Opern File Type Mp V Cancel Figure 3 1 1 Open File Window 2 The user would either select the name of a previously saved file or enter the name of a new file in the Dialogue window The recommended practice is to add the extension vpg to a newly created file 3 If creating a NEW file the user would be prompted to do so CREATE NEW FILE YES HO Figure 3 1 2 Create New File Prompt 3 7 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 3 Getting Started 4 The user will be prompted to select the analysis program desired d The analysis program selected will set defaults for the orm eta VPG session to generate either LS DYNA or ABAQUS NASTRAN cards HELF LOW DCFLUM CHMN D PAHERASH RADIUSS BDEHES TS Figure 3 1 3 Select Analysis Type 5 he user will also be prompted to select the Unit System desired SELECT WHIT SYSTEM The selected unit system will be stored in the database as HM TUM SEC M 4 HH G HSEC H 3 Hi KG MSEC HH 5 the default value setting The user will now be in the MAIN MENU of eta VPG and ready to start the session H KG SEC H FT SLUG SEC LB Figure 3 1 4 Unit System 3 2 SETTING UP A VPG SYSTEM MODEL Following is a general outline for setting up a VPG system model There are three unique modules in the VPG pre processor that allow the user
264. ines 6 ABORT DONE or EXIT exits this function 6 61 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 3 13 RENUMBER Description This function allows the user to renumber all elements in the existing database with the option of creating a summary table report of the element ranges between each part The user may renumber elements in sequence or by parts Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER RENUMBERING OPTION ALL FARTS MULTIPLE PARTS 2 When user enters SEQUENCE VPG prompts gt ENTER STARTING ELEMENT NUMBER DEFAULT 1 3 When user enters ALL PARTS VPG prompts gt ASSIGN STARTING ELEMENT NUMBER FOR EACH PART Y N YES gt ENTER STARTING ELEMENT NO FOR PART xxxx e Once a number has been entered the prompt will read gt ELEMENT x TO xx ASSIGNED NEXT ELEM NO yyyy e f blank or zero is entered yyyy will be used as the starting element number for the next part e These prompts will continue for every part in the database NO gt ENTER STARTING ELEMENT NUMBER any positive integer ENTER ELEMENT INCREMENT BETWEEN PARTS 1000 e Any positive integer may be entered 4 When user enters MULTIPLE PARTS VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART gt ENTER STARTING ELEMENT NUMBER FOR CHOSEN PARTS 6 3 14 REVERSE NORMAL Description This function allows the user to reverse the element orientation normal for all elements except CORD2R and CONM2 Usage 6 62 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSO
265. int selected to define a point or node NODE POINT REJECT LAST 2 DONE and EXIT will exit the function An example of a generated spline curve 6 1 8 DELETE Description This function allows the user to delete selected lines Lines may be selected by individual cursor selections by dragging a window by entering line numbers or by muti point region selections Usage 6 8 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 9 1 VPG prompts gt PICK LINE TO DELETE gt SELECT LINES e Select DONE once the desired lines have been selected 6 1 9 EXTEND LINE Description This function allows the user to extend a line by a specified distance along the axis of the line at either end of the line Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT LINE TO EXTEND 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT END POINT TO EXTEND LINE e Select the desired end point of the line to extend 3 VPOG prompts gt ENTER LENGTH TO BE EXTENDED e Input any real number 4 Selecting UNDO will undo the last extend operation 6 1 10 GENERATE LINES Description This function allows the user to draw a line between nodes or points via a combination of keyboard and mouse selections The created lines are incorporated into the CURRENT PART or see PART CONTROL MENU Usage j VPG prompts gt PICK NEXT POINT OR NODE INCREMENTAL XYZ e The user may enter an additional DX DY DZ from the previous point or node selected to continue drawing the line KEY IN XYZ
266. intend name of curve firstly for changing the attribute 9 12 6 1 CURVE NAME Description This function offers an option for the user to change the name of the curve 9 12 6 2 CURVE STYLE Description This function offers an option for the user to change the displaying type of curve There are four kinds of display type available 9 66 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING SOLID DASH DOT DASH DOT The default type is SOLID and the user can press the gt button on the right of the text box to select a desired type Then click the Apply button to change the setting 9 12 6 3 CURVE MARK Description This function offers an option for the user to change the type of curve mark There are six kinds of curve mark type available ROUND SQUARE UP TRIANGULAR DOWN TRIANGULAR DIAMOND NO MARK The user can press the v button on the right of the text box to select a desired type Then click the Apply button to change the setting 9 12 6 4 CURVE COLOUR Description This function offers an option for the user to change the colour of curve The colour of the current curve is displaying on the button The user can click this button and the colour panel will pop up and prompt the user to select the desired colour for the curve The colour panel is shown in figure 7 14 8 If don t want to change the colour after the colour panel have popped up the user can click anywhere else on the screen to cancel the colour select Then click t
267. ion This function defines a NODAL RIGID BODY element between multiple nodes The first selected node serves as a reference point all additional nodes are connected to this first node usually the center of the rigid body for display purposes Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT THE FIRST NODE FOR RIGID BODY 6 50 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e The first node is selected e Nodes can be selected by cursor pick drag window multi point region or part gt SELECT NODES e The second and subsequent nodes are selected until the user selects DONE e The rigid body is displayed with double lines with an R alongside it CREATE THICK SHELL LS DYNA Description This section covers the options for the THICK SHELL subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Note A solid element cannot be created in a part that has plate properties The user must either create a new part and assign it solid properties or make a part current that contains solid properties Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT e To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three e EXIT or ABORT terminates this function CREATE SPRING DAMPER LS DYNA Description This function defines a spring damper element between two nodes points _ It is recommended that the user select the ATTRIBUTE TABLE ON OFF in the element options menu prior to creating a spring damper This will pop up the ELEMENT
268. ion by using SHOW LINE in the LINE section 2 Once the lines have been selected and a surface is created VPG prompts gt ACCEPT SURFACE YES NO ABORT e YES will accept the surface and prompt for more lines to create additional surfaces e NO will not accept the surface and prompt for more lines e ABORT rejects the surface and exits the command 6 2 6 3 LINE SURFACE Description This function generates a surface in an area defined by 3 lines line direction is not important The lines defining the area do not have to intersect an open area is possible The new surface is included in the CURRENT PART The CURRENT PART should be verified before proceeding with this function Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT 3 LINES LINE SEGMENT allows the user to combine a broken line while selecting lines for the 3 LINE SURFACE function as in the COMBINE LINE function in the LINE section The user must select this option before selecting the desired lines for 3 LINE SURFACE The user may check the line s prior to executing this function by using SHOW LINE in the LINE section Note Select lines in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction Note The direction of the surface normal dictates the direction of the plate element normals 6 2 7 4 LINE SURFACE Description This function generates a surface in an area defined by 4 selected lines The created surface is included in the CURRENT PART The CURRENT PART should be verified before pr
269. ion of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 15 2 Once the desired coordinate system is acquired it will be displayed on the screen and the prompt will read gt ACCEPT Y N A YES gt ENTER DISTANCE OF SECTION PLANE FROM W 0 e Any real value is a valid response e User may now input a distance along the W axis from the selected origin of the coordinate e The cross section of plotels will be created at the distance W in the 6 100 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 3 4 PRE PROCESSOR UV plane NO e Returns to step 1 ABORT VPG prompts gt INCLUDE PLOTEL ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N YES NO If NO is selected plotel elements will be added to the current part and the user will return to the MODEL CHECKER menu If YES is selected the PART DEFINITION window pops up The plotel elements will be included in the new part The new part will be ON and CURRENT 6 5 17 CHECK FREE SURFACE Description This function checks the continuity of the solid elements A free surface is the face of a solid element that is occupied by one solid element VPG will replot the solid elements on screen displaying only the free surfaces Any unexpected quad or tri surface indicates potential errors in the solid element connectivity Usage 1 CHECK FREE SURFACE The following five messages will appear in the command line area of the Screen gt XXXX SURFACES FOUND gt
270. iple surfaces unless the intersection of the multiple surfaces is not connected properly 2 VPG prompts gt GENERATE PLOTEL ELEMENTS FOR FREE EDGES PLOTEL ELEMENTS LIME SEGHEHTS EXIT 3 Ifthe user selects PLOTEL ELEMENTS VPG prompts gt INCLUDE PLOTEL ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N YES NO 4 Ifthe user selects YES the PART DEFINITION window pops up VPG will both add plotels to the part and make the part current The boundary will remain highlighted until the user selects CLEAR Note VPG will display the boundary of the outer most edges of a solid element structure Users should also use the CHECK FREE SURFACE command for solid element structures that are described in this section Single Surface Boundary Check Multiple Surfaces Boundary Check 6 5 5 CHECK ANGLE Description This function checks the minimum values of the interior angles for shell and solid elements VPG checks and highlights any interior angles that are less than the default values Users have the option to adjust the default values as desired Usage 1 The ANGLE CHECK window pops up and the user sees the following figure 6 92 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR IO x Quad Element _ Max interior Angle H2000 Min Interiar Angle WEE Tri Element Max Interior Angle M10 00 Min Interior Angle Bono e Once parameters are defined click Check f the elements pass the interior angle check VP
271. is highlighted on the screen and the outputs the coordinates in the message window Figure 9 3 shows the CONTROL OPTION window when the function starts Control Option Select by Cursor Kev in id Figure 9 3 Identify Node Control Option Window SELECT BY CURSOR Default The program highlights the node that is nearest the cursor Click the left mouse button when the desired node is traced The selected node will be labeled with the node number KEY IN ID This option allows user to identify the element by entering a node number The program displays a DATA CONTORL window as shown in Figure 9 4 The user enters the node number and selects OK The desired node will be highlighted and the node number displayed on the screen DATA CONTROL Node ID 1l OK Cancel Figure 9 4 Data Control Window RESET The last input element ID will appear in the field OK Accept the element ID and close the DATA CONTROL window 9 13 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING CANCEL Close the DATA CONTROL window and exits KEY IN mode ia IDENDTIY ELEMENT This function enables the user to identify any element its part and its nodes by cursor selection default or key in ID number The program will highlight the selected element with the element number on the screen and also display the element connectivity in the message window The operation of this function is same as the IDENTIFY NODE function D DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO NODES This
272. it 2 Once the property ID has been entered the prompt will read gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three e An element will be created after two nodes points are selected e EXIT or ABORT will exit this function CREATE HOLLOW TUBE NASTRAN Description This section covers the options for the HOLLOW TUBE subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts ENTER NEW PROPERTY NAME OR EX TO EXIT e VPG prompts the user to enter a property name if no properties exist in the database at the current time Once a name is entered a pop up window will appear with a list of properties to edit 6 48 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 2 Once the property ID has been entered the prompt will read gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT e To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three e An element will be created after two nodes points are selected e EXIT or ABORT will exit this function CREATE ISOPARAMETRIC SHELL NASTRAN Description This section covers the options for the ISOPARAMETRIC SHELL subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT Generating isoparametric tri or quad elements require the user to select three nodes points per side 6 CREATE RIGID BODY RBE3 NASTRAN Description This section covers t
273. ithm value of the original Y axis value 9 12 6 17 FILTERS Description In this section an introduction on digital filter is presented including the filter design usage and result interpretation There are four different filters implemented in OPERATION They are e Average Filter e Butterworth Filter e Finite Impulse Response FIR e SAE Filter 9 12 6 18 AVERAGE Description Average allows the user to smooth the curve through averaging the value of a point with a number of surrounding points defined by user This averaging of the points can make the curve become smoother Select the Average type from the pop up list window via clicking the down triangular button below the FILTER Clicking the Select button the DATA CONTROL windows will pop up and prompt the user to input the number of the points for averaging as Figure 7 14 10 is shown The user may enter the appropriate coefficient in the input box which displays the default value of 10 DATA CONTROL Point Number 10l Reset OK Cancel Figure 9 73 DATA CONTROL window of AVERAGE filter After the user enters the appropriate coefficient presses OK to accept the input value and exit the DATA CONTROL window Press Apply to display the filter result 9 12 6 19 FIR FILTER Description This function allows the user to smooth the curve according to the finite impulse response FIR filter specifications 9 71 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Select the
274. junction with the SCREEN AXES ROTATION and the VIRTUAL AXES ROTATION commands to repeat the degree of rotation and to replot the geometry of a part The user may repeat this command as many times as desired 10 1 4 REVERSE ROTATION Description This function works in conjunction with SCREEN AXES ROTATION and VIRTUAL AXES ROTATION to reverse the degree of rotation and to replot the geometry of a part The user may repeat this command as many times as desired 10 1 5 RECALL VIEW Description This function allows the user to recall any previously saved view VPG contains the following predefined views 1 TOP VIEW 2 SIDE VIEW 3 REAR VIEW 4 ISOMETRIC VIEW 60 DEGREE ISOMETRIC When the user selects any of the above views VPG re scales the displayed part accordingly 10 3 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 1 6 SAVE VIEW Description This function allows the user to save and store a desired view in the current VPG database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER VIEW TITLE UP TO 18 CHARACTERS The user enters a title for the desired view RECALL VIEW lists the new view and its corresponding view number The program allows the user to save up to six new views plus the four views that are predefined a total of 10 views 2 If the user exceeds the total number of views allowed the prompt at the bottom of the screen will read gt SELECT VIEW TO OVERWRITE 5 to 10 THE LIST OF YOUR SAVED VIEWS WILL BE LISTED IN THE OPTIONS AREA
275. l I D number to the nodes that are specified by the user 2 When SELECT NODES is entered VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES e The user specifies the nodes that are to receive a residual I D number e Once the user selects the residual nodes DONE or EXIT terminates this 6 198 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR function VPG denotes the residual nodes with a small zero 0 on the screen above the appropriate nodes 6 15 2 ASSIGN S E ID Description This function is a one command operation that assigns a SUPERELEMENT I D to all nodes in the entire VPG database the SUPERELEMENT I D is the same as the PID number of the corresponding part 6 15 3 CHANGE S E ID Description This function allows the user to change or assign a SUPERELEMENT I D to selected nodes Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW SUPER EL I D OR 0 ZERO TO EXIT e The user may now enter the desired SUPERELEMENT I D 2 VPG prompts gt NEW G E ID DOES NOT EXIST OK TO CONTINUE Y N e YES will prompt step 3 e NO will exit this function 3 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES FOR NEW S E ID e Once the user selects the S E nodes DONE terminates this function VPG displays the new S E ID numbers on the screen above the appropriate nodes 6 15 4 IDENTIFY NODE POINT Description This function identifies any point node and its corresponding global location within the X Y Z coordinates Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS ALL HODE
276. l this operation 9 12 6 11 X TITLE Description This function offers an option for the user to change the title of X axis horizontal The x title will be displayed under the X axis 9 12 6 12 Y TITLE Description This function offers an option for the user to change the title of Y axis vertical The Y title will be displayed under the Y axis 9 12 6 13 MIN MAX Description This function offers an option for the user to change the range of axis of coordination 9 12 6 14 NEW VALUE Description This function allows the user to modify the y value of selected point Clicking a point on a curve with left mouse a cross is displaying on the selected point and the x and y value of coordinate of the point is displaying on the corresponding text boxes The X text box is inactive and can t be modified The Y text box is active and the user can modify the value on it 9 12 6 15 OPERATION Description This OPERATION allows the user to modify selected curve There are 23 kinds 9 68 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING of operations on curve objects These operations belong to two categories curve data operation such as integration different square root and so on and curve object operations such as Copy Delete and Paste One or more curves must be selected before modify the data of the curve Clicking the Operation button the pop up window will display under the curve window The pop up window is shown in figure 7 14 9 Curve find
277. last node moved to its previous position e f a coincident node is encountered skip to step 3 and then to step 2 2 After selecting a node VPG prompts for a new location for the nodes gt PICK NEW LOCATION ARNAT KEY IH X Z e The user may move to an existing point node by mouse or keyboard entry e DONE or REJECT LAST returns the user to step 1 e ABORT exits this function and returns the user to the NODE OPTIONS menu 3 If multiple or coincident nodes are found near the cursor VPG prompts gt COINCIDENT NODES FOUND SELECT ELEMENT FOR NODE If an ELEMENT center is selected by the CURSOR and it is unconnected to the target node VPG prompts gt SELECTED NODE IS NOT CONNECTED TO DUPL NODE gt SELECT ELEMENT FOR NODE e After this command is completed the user returns to step 1 6 4 13 PART CONNECTION Description This function determines the names and identification numbers PID of all of the parts that share the selected node The message is displayed in the VPG prompt area 6 82 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR of the screen and the nodes are highlighted with small white circles Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODE TO SHOW PART CONNECTION HEY IH MODE HUMBER EXIT Once a node is selected the part connection is listed and the user returns to step 1 If the user selects a node number by KEYBOARD ENTRY that does not exist in the database VPG prompts gt NODE xxxx IS
278. lays the CSYS DEFINITION CARD after the DEFINE COORDINATE CARD LIST allowing the user to key in the exact XYZ coordinates of the system DEFINE CURVE Description This function defines a load curve Usage 1 When CURVE is selected VPG displays the following options CREATE e When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt ENTER DATA TIME amp VALUE FOR POINT 1 OR END e Atleast two points must be defined to create a curve e Once the two points are defined the curve is displayed e Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 9 7 for further description DELETE e Displays DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST and allows user to select and delete curves ERASE UNREF CURVE This function allows the user to DELETE either ALL or SELECTED unreferenced curves in a database 6 192 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR LIST Displays the DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST MODIFY Displays the DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST and the CURVE DEFINITION CARD once a curve has been selected READ CURVE Displays the VPG File Dialog window and allows the user to read in a previously saved curve cur file RENUMBER Renumber the selected load curve or all load curves SHOW CURVE e Displays the DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST with all defined curves By selecting a listed curve and exiting the list the curve will be displayed DEFINE SPRING ORIENTATION Description The definition card in the SPRING ORIENTATION subsection defines orientation vectors for discrete sp
279. le to the printer default or to a file Prior to printing the postscript driver must be initialized to accommodate the eta VPG software Note The user can change the Printing Defaults in the SETUP HARDCOPY DEFAULT menu a ye PART ON OFF Allows the user to turn selected parts on or off The PART TURN ON OFF dialog window is displayed once the icon is selected For a description of the command PART ON OFF refer to PARTS PART ONIOFF in Section 10 3 10 2 2 VIEWING MANIPULATION RI SX SCREEN X ROTATION This shortcut rotates the model about the screen X axis where the X axis is parallel to the horizontal edge of the screen When the user selects this command VPG displays a ruler bar on the right side of the screen Moving the cursor up or down causes the model to rotate tick marks represent 20 degree rotation increments Clicking the left mouse button stops the rotation xb SY SCREEN Y ROTATION This shortcut rotates the model about the screen Y axis where the Y axis is parallel to the vertical edge of the screen When the user selects this command VPG displays a ruler bar on the right side of the screen Moving the cursor up or down causes the model to rotate tick marks represent 20 degree rotation increments Clicking the left mouse button stops the rotation ip SZ SCREEN Z ROTATION This command rotates the model about the screen Z axis where the Z axis is perpendicular to the plane of the screen When the user s
280. lected part set to the second selected part set and the first selected part set was deleted from database eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR NO will exit this function 6 220 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES Chapter CHAPTER 7 VPG MODULES VPG MODULES includes the following sections ROAD MENU SUSPENSION MENU TIRE MENU and SAFETY MENU The functions in these menus allow the user to quickly and easily construct the components required for proving ground simulations and in the case of the SAFETY MENU import tools and set boundary conditions for use in vehicle impact and safety simulations 7 1 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 1 ROAD DEFINITION The ROAD DEFINITION menu allows the user to define and save road surfaces Models may be created using the modeling functions available in eta VPG imported using VPG s IGES translator or selected from VPG s library of road surfaces VPG s library currently consists of 11 models The road surfaces included in this library are digitized models of roads found on the MGA Research proving ground facility in Burlington WI and make up the majority of the 20 000 mile General Durability Test see the eta VPG Applications Manual Section 1 5 By default the road surfaces are defined as rigid bodies with nominal mass At the user s discretion the road surface may be modeled using deformable material definitions The following functions are included in VPG s ROAD DEFINITION menu
281. lected surface Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select surface for remove holes 2 VPG prompts the user to select mode to remove holes on surface THHER HOLES DH OUTER BD 6 23 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 3 When selecting mode INNER HOLES VPG prompts the user to select hole on surface to remove HOLE OA SURFACE REJECT LAST HOLE HOLES HY SIZE ALL HOLES EXIT 4 After selecting the hole click EXIT and the hole on surface is removed 6 2 10 REVERSE NORMAL Description This function reverses the normal direction of the surface The surface normal affects light source shading on some workstations REVERSE NORMAL also controls the normal direction of the plate elements during meshing 6 2 11 RESPACE UV LINE Description This function changes the UV line density of the selected surfaces Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a surface on the screen 2 VPG labels the edge numbers on the surface and prompts the user to enter the number of UV lines along edges 1 and 2 3 VPG creates a set of UV lines along edges 1 and 2 These UV lines are included in the current part Note This operation changes only the appearance of the selected surfaces It does not change the integrity of the surface 6 2 12 SURFACE INTERSECT Description This function creates a line at the intersection between two selected surfaces Usage 1 VPQG prompts the user to choose a surface SELECT THE FIRST
282. lit at the selected point closest to the selected line REJECT LAST ABORT will exit this function 6 1 21 TRANSFORM Description This function allows the user to translate or rotate the selected lines or points to a new location Usage 1 VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN e VPG is asking for a desired coordinate system local or global VPG prompts the user to create a local system A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 15 2 Once the coordinate system is determined VPG prompts MOVE ROTATE ABORT If MOVE is entered gt ENTER U V W INCREMENTS e i e 0 0 1000 This will move the selected line s 1000 units along the W axis If ROTATE is selected the user enters an angle increment Note All rotational commands are about the local W axis or the global Z axis 3 VPG prompts gt SELECT ENTITY FOR TRANSFORM ABORT LINE 6 17 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR POINT 4 f the user selects the point option to transform the following options are available AGAIN e Repeats the previous transformation LINE POINT REVERSE OPERATION Reverses the previous transformations DONE EXIT 5 Ifthe user selects a line option to transform VPG prompts the user to select a line or point 6 After selecting the line point DONE executes the transformation 6 18 eta VPG3 0 Chapter
283. lor Then click APPLY below the control window The program will change the color of the selected part on the screen and the part name in the window Please see the Figure 4 7 1 PART MATERIAL This option allows the user to assign material property to the selected parts when the GRAY SHADE option is turned on The available materials are aluminum steel copper iron Gold silver bronze and rubber Click on the MATERIAL button and select a material type from the draw down list Then the user can select the parts from the part list window or click the parts from the screen The program will mark the part name with an asterisk and highlight the part on the screen Clicks APPLY and the selected parts will be endued with the specified material The changes of part s material can be show only when the SHADE and GRAY option are turned on Please see the Figure 4 7 2 TRANSPARENCY This option allows the user to make the selected parts in transparent when the SHADE option is turned on Click on the TRANSPARENCY button and select the parts from the part list window or click the parts from the screen The program will mark the part name with an asterisk and highlight the part on the screen Clicks APPLY and the transparency slider will be active The user may use the transparency slider to adjust the degree of transparency Slide to the left will make the selected parts more transparent The program will show the selected par
284. lowing sections Note If the analysis code is set to NASTRAN see section 6 11 6 10 1 ADD EROSION Description This function creates and adds the erosion to selected materials and modifies the erosion 6 10 2 ASSIGN MATERIAL Description This function assigns materials to selected parts Usage 6 159 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 1 If no materials are present in the database VPG gives the message NO MATERIALS DEFINED IN DATABASE and returns to the command prompt 2 Otherwise VPG prompts the user to select a material gt SELECT A MATERIAL e Users may select an existing material by entering one by name or by picking an element on the screen that is assigned to the desired material default 3 After the user selects the material VPG prompts gt MATERIAL ID X IS SELECTED gt SELECT PARTS TO ASSIGN MATERIAL gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART 4 The material will be assigned to the selected elements of the parts The selected parts will be shown in the material color after the user exits this command 6 10 3 CHANGE COLOR Description This function changes the color of a selected material Usage 1 The color bar is displayed on the right edge of the graphic area 2 After the user selects the material VPG prompts gt MATERIAL ID X IS SELECTED gt SELECT COLOR FROM COLOR BAR OR EXIT 3 The color of the material changes to the user selected color from the color bar 6 10 4 COPY Description
285. lready exists the prompt will read gt ELEMENT NUMBER yyyy ALREADY EXISTS REQUEST DENIED gt ENTER NEW EL NO FOR xxxx OR CR TO IGNORE Note This function only appears in NASTRAN analysis mode 6 38 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 3 3 COPY Description This function allows the user to generate a set of duplicate elements The user may simultaneously translate rotate or offset in the normal direction the copied elemenis Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select the elements to be copied SELECT ELEMENTS 2 Once the desired elements have been selected DONE continues to the next step where VPG prompts gt ENTER COPY OPTION M R N P A HOVE ROTATE HORMAL OFFSET MAPPING LES ORT 3 Then VPG prompts gt ENTER NUMBER OF COPIES 4 VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN e VPG is asking for a desired coordinate system local or global VPG prompts the user to create a local system A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 15 5 Once the coordinate system is determined VPG prompts the user to select magnitudes for the transformation respective to the selections made in step 4 e f MOVE was selected gt ENTER U V W INCREMENTS e i e 0 0 1000 This will copy the selected element s 1000 units along the Z axis e f ROTATE was selected gt ENTER ANGLE INCREMENT e Enter the angle increme
286. ls This ensures that the generated suspension would fit the specific body model The user then creates weld spiders between the mounts on the vehicle and the rigid body 3 9 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 3 Getting Started beams on the suspension Next the user defines the BODY LOAD DEFINITION CARD to define the gravity After defining the gravity the user pre loads the suspension using the ELEMENT DEFINITION CARD 6 Defining VPG Analysis Control Parameters First the CONTROL ENERGY and CONTROL TERMINATION cards must be defined Next the output control interval data for the ASCII database must be determined Then the BINARY DATABASE cards must be edited to control the output interval of the results and restarts 7 Analysis Submission From the ANALYSIS menu select DYNA INPUT FILE OPTIONS edit the dialogue box and submit the analysis For additional information please see Section 8 11 8 Displaying Results Enter the POST PROCESSING menu and select D3PLOT LS DYNA result file Then select the analysis d3plot from the File Menu Select LS DYNA version 970 Select ALL AVAILABLE STEPS Select ALL COMPONENTS The results from each of the analysis steps will then be read into eta VPG A binary result file will be created at this time named d3plot pp Since the results are not saved to the eta VPG database this binary file should be reread into the post processing menu when the user wishes to view the results again This file is read
287. lt define active window trace node and define node curve Tool Section Cut constrain Motion Mirror Result by XYZ Define Active Window Clear Active Window Define Node Trace Clear Node Trace Define Node Curve Clear Node Cure Define Elem Curve Clear Elem Curve Model Summary Figure 9 28 Tool Menu A detailed description of each function and corresponding submenu is given in the following section 9 9 1 SECTION CUT Description This function displays the section cut of a finite element model with a defined plane intersecting the edges of elements The functions in SECTION CUT control window are shown in Figure 9 29 DEFINE CUT PLANE is the only option available when the SECTION CUT functions starts Section Cut Operation Display Section only z Define Cut Plane Clear section Cut Normal view Section Cut Options Export Cut Section Cut Plane Operation amp Translate Rotate Move Section By Mouse Apply Exit Figure 9 29 Section Cut Operation e DEFINE CUT PLANE The section plane is the U V plane of a user defined local coordinate system The 9 32 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 9 33 POST PROCESSING local coordinate system maybe defined by selecting one two or three nodes from the model The program displays a Control Option window as shown in Figure 9 30 The program also changes the displayed model to gray color Section Cut Operation
288. lude POINT CIRCLE CURVE SURF CONS FACE If CAD data is not available eta VPG has a complete geometry and surface building capability which acts as an integrated CAD data generator This is detailed in Chapter 6 Extensive Model Building Functions eta VPG includes a comprehensive selection of functions for creating and modifying line data 2 2 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features and CAD surfaces In addition to automeshing functions element generation through 2 line 4 line 6 line and 8 line mesh creates beam shell and solid elements Comprehensive Model Modification Functions All aspects of the model may be modified using the pre processing menus All defined material elements nodes contacts and analysis parameters may be modified deleted copied etc as required by the user Full System Assembly The ASSEMBLY menu allows users to create assemblies which may be modified as a group This includes part replacement and connectivity attributes of the model Automeshing eta VPG s automeshing function easily eliminates 90 of the time required to mesh trimmed and standard surfaces The automeshing function creates quadrilateral elements with a minimum of triangular elements Various automeshing algorithms are available including Triangular Meshing Paving Mesh and Topology Automeshing Material Element Properties eta VPG supports all LS DYNA and NASTRAN material and element property cards eta V
289. mation The type of variable selected determines the type of plot component displayed in the CURRENT COMPONENT CURRENT COMPONET The CURRENT COMPONET WINDOW determines the type of component that will be displayed during the plot animation Only one component may be selected per plot animation The component types displayed in the window are determined by the types STRESS STRAIN or DISPALCEMENT If select the STRESS STRAIN the supported components are listed below 9 48 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 9 49 SIGMA XX SIGMA YY SIGMA ZZ SIGMA XY SIGMA YZ SIGMA ZX BEND MONMENT MXX BEND MONMENT MYY BEND MONMENT MZZ SHEAR RES QXX SHEAR RES QYY NORMAL RES NXX NORMAL RES NYY NORMAL RES NXY THICKNESS EPSON XX POST PROCESSING EPSON YY EPSON ZZ EPSON XY EPSON YZ EPSON ZX ENERGY MAX VONMISES MEAN STRESS PRIN STRESS 1 PRIN STRESS2 PRIN STRESSS3 MAX SHEAR STRESS PRIN STRAIN1 PRIN STRAIN2 THINNING NORM STRAIN If select the DISPALCEMENT the supported components are listed below DISPLACEMENT X DISPLACEMENT Y DISPLACEMENT Z DISPLACEMENT TOTAL eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 11 5SELECT A LAYER Description Refer to NIP number of integration point in LS DYNA menu 9 11 6UNDEFORM Description This function allows the resultant contour of the current frame projects on the undeformed original blank surface Please see the Figure 7 2 2 and 7 2 3 to compare the result Figure 9 56 Project on Undeforme
290. may be switched to rigid at the start of a calculation using the DEFORM TO RIGID card Part switching may be specified on a restart or it may be performed automatically using the AUTOMATIC card The INERTIA card sets inertial properties for deformable parts that will be switched to rigid Usage 6 194 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts to select option DEF RHABLE TYPES DEF RM TO RIGID AUTOMATIC IERT i EXIT e The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to LS DYNA User s Manual Section 10 for further description 6 14 9 EQUATION OF STATE Description The definition cards of EQUATION OF STATE specify element properties Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts to select option TER OF Stave twe LIAR POL YHOHIRL Ait SACE TUESDAY CEWHE SEH RATIU PIH UHIHTRLS POLY W EHHGY LEAK IGHITIOM GROWTH T n aTED COMPACT TeAGL RTED PEUFELLAHT DEFLAG PORE COLLAPSE JL E e The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to LS DYNA User s Manual Section 12 for further description 6 14 10 HOURGLASS Description This function allows the user to define hourglass and bulk viscosity properties Usage 6 195 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 13 for further description 6 14 11 INTERFACE CARDS Description This
291. ments into triangular elements All elements that fail may be added to a new part The user may specify warpage criteria for the check function Usage 1 VPG prompts ENTER CRITERIA 5 DEG e Any real number is a valid entry If the warpage of the elements is less than the entered criteria then gt ALL ELEMENTS PASS CHECK The user is returned to the MODEL CHECKER menu If the warpage of the elements is greater than the entered criteria then gt ELEMENTS xxxx FAILED CHECK gt xxxx ELEMENTS FAILED CHECK e Step 3 is not applicable for solid elements Skip to step 4 to enter the definition of the new part 2 The user may replace warped elements gt REPLACE WARPED QUADS WITH TRI ELEMENTS Y N YES 6 98 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR NO see step 4 e YES will replace any warped quadrilateral elements with triangular elements 3 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENT FOR WARPAGE e Atthis point the user may pick individual elements for degree of warpage e DONE or EXIT returns the user to the MODEL CHECKER menu An example of warped elements 4 If some of the elements fail and NO is entered VPG prompts the user to place them into a new part gt INCLUDE FAILED ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N YES The PART DEFINITION window pops up e The plates and or solids will be added to this part and the part will become current NO gt SELECT ELEMENT FOR WARPAGE e At this point the user m
292. model in the u v plane The program will activate other options as shown in Figure 9 32 for the user to change or operate the section cut eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 9 34 POST PROCESSING CLEAR SECTION CUT This function enables the user to erase the section cut from the display window NORMAL VIEW This function enables the user to view from the normal of the cut plane SECTION CUT OPTIONS This function controls the export and display of the section cut Refer to Figure 5 1 4 for the available options CUT PLANE The default number of cut planes is 20 if ALL PLANE option is selected This means there will be 20 cut planes equally spaced in the local W direction If the CUR PLANE is toggled on the current section cut will be exported when select the function EXPORT SECTION CUT If the ALL PLANE option is selected all 20 section cuts will be exported when select the function EXPORT SECTION CUT MAX RADIUS TEST Set the maximum arc radius that can be section Cu m led displayed MIN RADIUS No of Planes 20 Set the minimum arc radius that can be displayed Cur Plane All Plane RADIUS DEV oet the tolerance between two adjacent arcs to merge MIN CHORD Max Radius 35 0000 Set the minimum chord length that can be c displayed Min Radius o 5000 SECTION PLUS CURVE This function is only enabled for the See 0 2000 section cut of contour mode Toggle on the Min Chord 1 0000 check box then press APPLY button the
293. modeled with solid elements as indefinite domains are usually not modeled For geomechanical problems this option is important for limiting the size of the models Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 3 9 for further description BOUNDARY CARDS NON REFLECTING2D Description This function defines a non reflecting boundary The option applies to continuum domains modeled with two dimensional solid elements in the XY plane as 6 130 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR indefinite domains are usually not modeled For geomechanical problems this option is important for limiting the size of the models Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 3 11 for further description BOUNDARY CARDS OUTFLOW CFD Description This function defines outflow CFD boundary conditions Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS PRESCRIBED CFD Description This function defines prescribed CFD boundary conditions Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS PRESCRIBED MOTION Description This function defines an imposed nodal motion velocity acceleration or displacement on a node or a set of nodes Also velocities and displacements can be imposed on rigid bodies If the local option is active the motion is prescribed with respect to the local coordinate system for the rigid body Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 4 for further description BOUNDARY CARDS PR
294. much faster than the d3plot files The results are now ready to be post processed using a variety of features 9 Graph Plotting To graph the results select GRAPH from the Main Menu The user then has the option of reading in a previously saved LS DYNA ASCII graph file When exiting the GRAPH MENU the user has an option to save the graphs in a binary file for future processing This file will be loaded mush faster than the LS DYNA ASCII files 3 10 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 4 Main Menu Chapter Chapter 4 Main Menu This is the first menu bar the user encounters when beginning a session with VPG The initial options unfold into an additional series of submenus These submenus are documented in the following sections File Parts Pre Eoad Suspensiow Tire Safety malysis Fatigue ost Graph Utilities Uiew Help Menus are selected by mouse pick and contain all eta VPG functions Each of these menus may be accessed through the Function Keys 4 1 FILE The FILE menu allows for the import and export of data into and out of the eta VPG database This data may be in the form of finite element data CAD files or a combination of the two The FILE menu also allows users to SAVE databases It is important to know that eta VPG does not automatically save the user s data The user must execute the SAVE command to write the database changes to the file The FILE menu provides functions for RESTART IMPORT and EXPORT functions 4 2 PARTS M
295. n 2 9 KEYBOARD ENTRY To increase speed and efficiency all VPG functions can also be accessed by keyboard entry Entering a one or two letter combination followed by the return key activates each command of the menu that the user presently has on the screen For main menus the letter combination is the first two letters of a one word command or the first letter of each of the first two words of a two or more word command As the user types the keys the matching command will be 2 12 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features highlighted For example the keystroke entry for the command ELEMENT OPTIONS SURFACE MESH in the above menu would be s m followed by the RETURN key For the ELEMENT OPTIONS MODIFY command the keystroke entry would be m o followed by the RETURN key For control keys the user need only type the first letter to access the function 2 10 SPECIFICATIONS The standard version of VPG has the following specifications for model databases LINES 150 000 POINTS 1 500 000 SURFACES 32 000 2 500 000 Edge Points 400 000 Control Points 2 11 LINE DATA VPG s built in translator converts and filters line data from the following programs into a neutral line format IGES lines and surfaces DXF file formats VDA file There are additional external translators to support CAD files generated from the following programs CATIA4 CATIA5 STEP Unigraphics versions 18 and NX 2 12 CONVENTIONS
296. n 6 11 Section 6 12 Contact Interface Dyna Miscellaneous Super Element NASTRAN Mass Menu LS DYNA Assembly LS DYNA Mass Menu NASTRAN Assembly NASTRAN CHAPTER 7 VPG MODULES Road Menu Suspension Menu Tire Model Safety Module CHAPTER 8 ANALYSIS Analysis Control Cards LS DYNA Database Cards Gravity Load Boundary Cards Constraint Cards Load Cards Initial Velocity Define Contacts Define Curve Dyna Input File Options Run Analysis Write Input File CHAPTER 9 POST PROCESSING Introduction General Overview File Manager Icon Bar File Format Configuration File File Menu Edit Menu Section 6 13 Section 6 14 Section 6 15 Section 6 16 Section 6 17 Section 6 18 Section 6 19 Section 7 1 Section 7 2 Section 7 3 Section 7 4 Section 8 1 Section 8 2 Section 8 3 Section 8 4 Section 8 5 Section 8 6 Section 8 7 Section 8 8 Section 8 9 Section 8 10 Section 8 11 Section 8 12 Section 8 13 Section 9 1 Section 9 2 Section 9 3 Section 9 4 Section 9 5 Section 9 6 Section 9 7 Section 9 8 Tool Menu Section 9 9 Option Menu Section 9 10 Post Process Section 9 11 Graph Section 9 12 CHAPTER 10 UTILITY Viewing Options Section 10 1 Icon Bar Section 10 2 Part Control Section 10 3 Utility Section 10 4 Display Options Section 10 5 APPENDICES APPENDIX A VPG Capabilities for F E A Analysis Programs APPENDIX B VPG Hardware and Software Requirements APPENDIX C Supported IGES E
297. n Bar Doaa ag J Depos epe ap TT so crop e E PRT Ee m EL LII mais cri tuck Menu it mum Pam TT FIT ELEME PRETEP Drawing Window ee Pra HITE Hess na EI Fx P I iur I DAIBENIE Fi LIBS EFFIE i EEL A EI Fux TIE matt mea Coe O H piia C mein m 1 enis mus Comi Dialogue Window Display Figure 2 5 1 VPG Window Layout 2 7 ICON BAR The icon bar is designed to give the user easy access to the most commonly used functions in eta Post Some of the functions represented in the icon bar are also located in the different menus The user may simply click these icons to activate the functions instead of clicking through the menus T uc eurem P AL n a mm _ i qT T 3 E a m LAT ZH OPEN Opens a database PRINT Creates a postscript file of the display area and sends the file to the printer default or to a file Prior to printing the postscript driver must be initialized pe PART ON OFF Turns the selected parts on or off The PART TURN ON OFF dialog window is displayed once selected e i i Se VIRTUAL X ROTATION 2 9 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the global X axis when the cursor is moved up or down RC VIRTUAL Y ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the global Y axis when the cursor is moved up or down Em L
298. n Overview of eta VPG Features Imports and exports data to and from VPG Creation display control and manipulation of part entities Contains a menu of preprocessing functions Creates and modifies line surface data Creates and modifies surfaces in VPG Creates and modifies elements Creates copies transforms and manipulates nodes Checks element criteria warpage boundary aspect ratio etc Creates node and element sets for Super element files substructure files etc Creates and verifies constraints and loads on a finite element model Creates and assigns material properties Creates and assigns element properties Creates and modifies sliding rigid wall interfaces for LS DYNA Handles distinct LS DYNA miscellaneous data Handles distinct NASTRAN miscellaneous data Assigns and modifies SUPER ELEMENT ID numbers only for NASTRAN application Creates and modifies MASS Arrange and assemble parts or part sets connections eta VPG3 0 Chapter 2 ROAD MENU SUSPENSION MENU TIRE MODEL SAFETY ANALYSIS FATIGUE POST GRAPH UTILITIES VIEWING OPTIONS 2 5 FUNCTION KEYS An Overview of eta VPG Features Defines road surfaces Defines and auto generates front and rear automotive suspensions Defines and auto generates tire models Analyzes vehicle impact and occupants safety Analyzes proving ground events Analyzes element fatigue Provides options for viewing the results of an analysi
299. n a particular location and in a certain direction In most cases the crash tool model position is given Occasionally users will have to define the location and direction if there is no default standard In occupant safety cases the dummy models are placed on the seat at the H point or a test fixture position The prescribed impact velocity and direction are given as default values according to legislated criteria The user is able to alter these values according to individual case test requirements The simulation results have to be output according to their case requirements Therefore the nodes contact surfaces and sections are defined either automatically or by user defined node set segment set and section during the setup process The output request and the frequency sampling rate are also defined for post processing purposes Legislated criteria such as HIC TTI and Femur Load are calculated in addition to the crash pulse impact force and contact force and can then be post processed All simulations have more than one possible setup process The VPG Safety module offers the user great flexibility in the various utility routines to perform the simulations This manual documents one recommended processing approach for each case to demonstrate the program s capability and to allow less experienced users to adopt a consistent methodology Each Usage contains a documented proven procedure for setting up the case submitting the a
300. n as to inserting an image form clipboard to Microsoft Word is illustrated in figure 7 14 6 39 dic cc NE WE g X force master y 29 Sca 2 24 16 MUS s F i fr 1 d URL R gt 0 M l f i I j i i E B 16 24 D 12 24 36 48 60 Time E 4 Figure 9 69 The demonstration on inserting an image form clipboard to MS Word e EXPORT This function enables the user to export and save the current window curves in a file with the CUR extension The Select File dialog box will display and prompt the user to select the desired name e ATTRIBUTE This function enables the user to change the attribute of the curve Clicking the Attribute button the pop up window will be displayed under the curve window The pop up window is shown in figure 7 14 7 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 3 Curve findow 3 X fnr e al are I Y farca masier 1 i h 1 L Prin Clipboard Export l Atribute Operation Save LJ ao Curve Hames 3 x foec amp slave i F Iprpe sbwae E Force get Cure Style LA IER Alark HOLD Curve Color mi Background Color m Axis LogX T Log Y V Gnd Modify Y Axis x Title Time Min lo Max o 005 vre F Min og Mak 3762 Hew Value Figure 9 70 The Graphing Attribute menu There are many options for the user to change the attribute of the selected curve On the left of the patulous window the names of current curve are listed and the user should to selected an
301. n step 1 VPG prompts gt SET X IS SELECTED e Ifthe user selects EXIT VPG deletes the element set e After again selecting EXIT the user returns to the ELEMENT SET menu 6 7 17 INCLUDE ELEMENTS Description This function adds additional elements to the current element set Usage 6 121 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS FOR ELEMENT SET XXXX gt SELECT ELEMENTS 2 When the user has finished selecting elements and exited the menu VPG prompts gt XXXX ELEMENTS IN SET XXXX The selected elements are added to the set and numbered accordingly 6 7 18 LIST Description This function lists the defined sets in a pop up window 6 7 19 REMOVE ELEMENTS Description This function deletes elements from the current element set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS FROM ELEMENT SET XXXX gt SELECT ELEMENTS 2 When the user has finished selecting elements and has exited the menu VPG prompts gt XXXX ELEMENTS REMOVED FROM SET XXXX 6 7 20 REVIEW LIST Description This function displays the defined sets in the MENU WINDOW When a set is selected the elements of that set are displayed in the CONTENTS OF SET window 6 7 21 SHOW SET ELEMENT Description This function allows the user to display all or some of the defined element sets VPG displays the appropriate ID numbers on the screen next to each defined element Usage ils VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM ELEMENT SET LIST
302. n such as those that are made with the commands SHOW LINE BOUNDARY CHECK ID ELEMENT DEFINE TITLE etc 10 11 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 3 PART CONTROL The functions of the PART CONTROL menu are intended for organizing line surface and element data in a structure A PART is a set of lines surfaces and or elements grouped under a PART NAME The PART NAME is defined as a label of alphanumeric data that consists of no more than eight characters Presently up to 1000 parts may be defined in a database Each part has a unique Part Identification PID The functions in the PART CONTROL menu are organized as in Figure 10 3 1 PART CUHTEUL ADD ELEHS TO PART Abb LIKES T PART AbD SURFS TU PART COHKECTIMG ELEKEHTS COHKECTIMG HINES CHARGE PART COLOR CEERTE HEEP PART LIST MASS CRLCULRTIUN H FF PART COLOR DH DFF PART tu Wnahn SEPARATE PARTS TEAHSPRHEHT MODE VIEW MOTE HE RAPE REMUMBER FID DELETE EMPTY PARTS THI CHHE SS EXIT o Figure10 3 1 Part Control Menu A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 10 3 1 ADD ELEMENTS TO PART Description This function allows the user to copy elements from one part to another part The part to which the elements are added does not have to be current or on Usage 1 VPG prompts SELECT TARGET PART gt PICK ALINE L AN ELEM C OR PART NAME P OF A PART 2 Once the user selects the target part VPG prompts gt ELE
303. nalysis and post processing the results The approach is technically sound and will provide correct simulation results Therefore it is highly recommended that new users run their simulations according to this step by step manual at least once before developing their own procedure using the various utility features and functions 7 4 2 Crash Tool Library ETA has developed and maintained a set of crash tool models for the cases presented in this manual for consulting projects over the last decade This set of crash tool models is included as part of the software license agreement and should not be used with other pre post processors The crash module allows users the flexibility to store their own crash tool models in a 7 32 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES customized library for easy access or to save them in ASCII format for private use ETA can demonstrate First Technology Safety System FTSS dummy models for use with the module including Hybrid III 50 Male 95 Male 5 Female and various Child Dummy models However these dummy models are distributed by FTSS and are not part of the eta VPG license agreement ETA offers a set of generic FEA Flexible Body and or Rigid Body dummy models that are tuned to test simulation results Although the material properties joint rates and construction are not fully validated they are still complete models developed and used in crash simulation studies ETA fully supports and maintain
304. nce point 3 Once the user defines the desired coordinate system VPG displays it and prompts gt ACCEPT Y N A YES e VPG prompts for the next command NO e The user returns to step 1 ABORT The user returns to the menu 2 17 ENTITY SELECTION In certain commands such as COPY DELETE etc VPG prompts the user to select elements nodes lines surfaces etc A list of options will appear in the MENU WIN DOW The default selection option is cursor pick at the entity Other commonly used selection options are described below WINDOW A window drag window is defined by clicking the left mouse button dragging the cursor diagonally across the screen until the desired entities are within the window and releasing the left mouse button to complete the selection If an entity is partially outside the window it will not be selected 2 19 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features MULTI PT REGION A multi point region polygon is defined by clicking the left mouse button in succession to enclose the desired polygon region Click on the right mouse button to reject the last defined point Click on the middle button to complete the region Entities within this region will be selected If part of an entity is outside of the region it will not be selected PART The part names will be listed in the menu area Pick the name from the part list or pick an entity from the screen to select the part Selected parts will
305. nction allows the user to respace the number of points on the selected line equidistantly Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT LINE FOR RESPACING POINTS 2 Once the desired line is selected VPG prompts 6 13 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt ENTER NUMBER OF POINTS ON LINE OR E TO EXIT Enter any integer greater than two VPG includes the endpoints of the line as part of the total count of points on the line 3 EXIT or DONE to exit this function 6 1 16 REVERSE DIRECTION Description Each line has a direction defined from the starting point to the end point of the line This function allows the user to reverse the line direction Arrowheads on the line oresented during SHOW LINE SPLIT etc are identifiable points and also indicate the line direction Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT LINES e Once the line is selected the direction is automatically reversed 6 1 17 SCALE FACTOR Description This function allows the user to scale the selected lines or points with respect to any axis global or local using magnification factors in the X Y or Z U V or W directions Entering a scale factor greater than 1 will magnify the line whereas a scale factor less than 1 will reduce the length of the line Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK LINES TO SCALE gt SELECT LINES RHOH T ESCLUDE DH UFF LIME MUL TI POTHT REGIUM PART Mod Dat S REJECT LAST Def HE Select DONE once the desired lines have b
306. ndow MATERIAM DIEFIHITICH CARD 1 CARD I MATEI TENE DATA CARD DESCRIPTION E 1 MIC MATERIAL Dh L TE TABLES TABLET iL TYPE MONLIMEAR TYPE HLELABTIPLAHTICA I H WORK HARDENING SLOPE CALC et YF MIELO FUNCTION CRITERIONLT a hh HR IHARDENNO RULETT T Poo LIITY INITIAL WELO PONT n nmmmumcsnun LINITZ INTER MAL FRICTION AHILE JD D0000 500 O w em Define Properties 6 11 7 ERASE UNREF MATL Description This function automatically deletes all materials that have no parts assigned to them 6 11 8 LIST MATERIALS Description This function lists the defined materials in the MATERIAL LIST 6 11 9 MATERIAL COLOR ON OFF Description This function toggles the display of parts between the material and part color 6 11 10 ON OFF Description This function toggles the selected material on or off Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select material gt SELECT MATERIAL e The user selects a material by picking an element C or material name M 6 167 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR of a material 2 The selected material and parts are turned on off 6 11 11 RENUMBER ID Description This function renumbers the material ID for the selected material or all materials Usage 1 VPG prompts for the option gt SELECT OPTIONS AUTOMATIC ALL 2 If the user enters AUTOMATIC ALL VPG prompts gt ENTER FIRST MATERIAL ID amp INC TYPE 0 TO EXIT
307. ndow pops up e The duplicate elements will be removed from their original parts and added to the NEW PART e The new part will be ON and CURRENT e NO e The user will exit to the MODEL CHECKER menu 6 5 7 CHECK JACOBIAN Description This function allows the user to check for element distortion against the element s ideal shape which is given a Jacobian value of 1 0 The more an element is warped the closer it approaches a zero Jacobian value Elements that fail the Jacobian check are highlighted and the user has the option of putting them in a separate part Usage 1 2 3 6 94 VPG prompts gt ENTER THE CRITERION FOR JACOBIAN CHECK DEFAULT 0 7 VPG prompts gt XXXX ELEMENTS FAILED CHECK gt INCLUDE FAILED ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N If YES VPG prompts the user to define a new part eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 4 If NO VPG prompts the user to check individual elements for Jacobian value via cursor pick Select EXIT to exit the function 6 5 8 CHECK NORMAL Description This function draws a white boundary line between the opposing normals of the displayed plate elements See the following figure Usage 1 CHECK PLATE NORMAL e VPG will highlight the boundary between the elements that have opposing normal orientations Afterwards VPG echoes the message PLATE NORMAL CHECK COMPLETED e he boundary will highlight when three or more plate elements connect at a common edge e PLATE NORMAL in
308. neutral line data format to communicate with these CAD systems IGES PDGS standard CGS INCA and DES DXF etc Once the user has entered the command the files with the appropriate suffix will be listed in the options area The user can then select the desired file 5 6 1 2 READ ABAQUS FILE VPG reads ABAQUS files directly with its built in translator The VPG ABAQUS file extension is inp 5 6 1 3 READ DYNA FILE This function allows the user to read both keyword and non keyword LS DYNA dyn files directly into VPG VPG supports versions 88 to 970 Keyword Once the user has entered the command the files with the suffix dyn will be listed in the VPG FILE WINDOW The user can then select the desired file 5 5 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 5 File Manager 5 6 1 4 READ GENESIS FILE This function allows users to read GENESIS dat files directly into VPG Once the user has entered the command the files with the suffix dat will be listed in the options area The user can then select the desired file 5 6 1 5 READ MOLDFLOW FILE This function allows users to read MOLDFLOW data directly into VPG 1 VPG prompts gt READING MOLDFLOW INPUT FILE gt ENTER THE ROOT NAME OF THE MOLDFLOW INPUT FILES 2 After entering the root file name assuming that the mfl mod and tri files are available VPG displays the MOLDFLOW model 3 If the user is reading data into an existing model VPG prompts gt OFFSET NODE AND ELEMENT NUMBERS Y N
309. ng lines 6 66 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR for the 2 LINE MESH function as in the COMBINE LINE function in the LINE section The user must select this option before selecting the desired lines for 2 LINE MESH The user may check the line s prior to executing this function by using SHOW LINE in the LINE section 2 Once the user selects the desired lines the prompt will read gt ENTER NO OF ELEMENTS ON EACH SIDE N1 N2 N3 N4 N1 Any positive integer greater than one for the number of elements along the selected lines N2 Any positive integer for the number of elements between the 2 lines N3 optional an integer value for the side opposite N1 where N1 is not greater than 2 N3 and N3 is not greater than 2 N1 N4 optional an integer value for the side opposite N2 where N2 is not greater than 2 N4 and N4 is not greater than 2 N2 e i e 10 10 or 10 10 11 14 ACCEPTABLE e i e 5 5 12 6 NOT ACCEPTABLE 3 Once the desired element N1 N2 N3 N4 is entered VPG prompts gt ACCEPT MESH YES NO REMESH e YES will accept the mesh and prompt for more lines e NO will not accept mesh and prompt for more lines e REMESH rejects the mesh and prompts for new N1 N2 N3 N4 6 3 19 3 LINE MESH Description This function generates elements in an area defined by 3 lines line direction is not important The lines defining the area do not have to intersect an open area is possible Elements are included in the CURRENT PAR
310. ng the above command 10 1 9 VIRTUAL AXES ROTATION Description This function allows the user to rotate an object about the global or virtual X Y and Z axes according to an angle specified via the keyboard Usage 1 VPG prompts 10 4 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY gt ENTER 3 ANGLES TO ROTATE The user enters the desired global X Y Z angles of rotation Note The functions REPEAT ROTATION and REVERSE ROTATION are especially useful after executing the above command 10 1 10 DEFINE TITLE Description This function allows the user to enter a title or a text label on the display screen Usage 1 VPG prompts gt INPUT CHARACTER SIZE 1 0 10 0 2 Once the user selects the text size VPG prompts gt DEFINE TITLE STARTING LOCATION ABORT CURSOR LOCATION DONE EXIT UNDO LAST The user places the text by positioning the cursor at the desired location and clicking the left mouse button 3 VPG prompts gt ENTER TITLE The user types in the text for the title and presses enter The text appears at the previously selected location 10 1 11 CURSOR ZOOM Description This function allows the user to zoom in on any displayed area in the Display Window by dynamically defining a window about a region of the screen Usage 1 VPG prompts gt DEFINE ZOOM WINDOW The user defines the upper left corner of the zoom window by positioning the cursor on the display screen The user then presses the left mouse button and
311. ngies 4 Guad Max interior ange j Quad Win imeri Angie ef B j j Jacotean _ Peo Featurelne Ange a S Fed Boundary Ao Of Neratin s cheek Modifg chase neset e The user may define parameters Upon clicking Check VPG prompts gt XXXX ELEMENTS FAILED XXXXXX CHECK PICK A NODE WILL INITIATE DYNAMIC REPAIR Enter SELECT MESH 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS e After entering DONE the MESH QUALITY PARAMETERS window pops up Enter SET DYNAMIC REPAIR 2 The DYNAMIC REPAIR OPTION menu pops up as following DVHAMIC REPAIR OPTION HINGE MOVE HOTE STEP WALIE 3 If entering NODE MOVE MODE VPG prompts gt PLEASE SELECT NODE MOVE MODE AVERAGE MORAAL PERPENDICULAR PLHE 4 If entering STEP VALUE VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT STEP VALUE DEFAULT 1 0 6 5 25 SUMMARY CHECK Description The SUMMARY CHECK function performs a comprehensive model check 6 106 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR on the current elements in the model database using user specified parameters The results of the SUMMARY CHECK function are displayed as a table of model quality parameters by parts as a percentage of elements passing each modeling criteria value This data may be exported into an ASCIl file for model documentation Usage 1 VPG prompts gt INPUT MESH CHECK CATEGORY Simultaneously the Mesh Check window is displayed as follows ad O WY uU TT o
312. nit System Menu VPG prompts 5 11 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 5 File Manager gt OUTPUT ONLY ACTIVE PARTS Y N e YES will only output the elements displayed on the screen e NOwill output all elements existing in the database 5 VPG prompts gt ENTER TITLE 6 After entering the title VPG displays the CONTROL TERMINATION CARD if a termination time has not been specified yet Once the card is defined and the user selects OK the DYNA deck is written Note If the properties materials are not assigned to the parts in the database VPG prompts the user to define the properties materials by default by global default or by part 5 7 5 WRITE GENESIS FILE This function allows the user to output a GENESIS dat data deck directly from the VPG database 5 7 6 WRITE LINE DATA FILE This function allows the user to output a LINE SURFACE DATA lin data file directly from the VPG database 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER FILE NAME OR STOP TO EXIT e Enter a file name up to 24 characters The lin extension is suggested 2 If the file name already exists the program will prompt the following message gt FILENAME ALREADY EXISTS O K TO OVERWRITE Y N YES NO e YES will overwrite the existing file e NO will prompt for a file name 3 VPG prompts gt WRITE LINES SURFACES ONLY IN ACTIVE PARTS Y N YES NO e YES will only output the lines surfaces displayed on the screen e NO will output all elements lines surfaces
313. nits along the W axis ROTATE gt ENTER ANGLE INCREMENT RIGHT HAND RULE ABOUT LOCAL W OR GLOBAL Z 6 87 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR RADIAL gt ENTER INCREMENTAL RADIUS ABORT 3 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTIONS TO SELECT NODES e After the nodes have been chosen VPG translates them to their new location Selecting again will repeat the translation 4 EXIT ends this command sequence and returns the user to the NODE OPTIONS EL a m a uas ae a PF E Tu 3 r A x U 1 z F x E a n Ss F Am t ria on it i F E37 m i E m Ld HEC a eT r i laos m m zd u Ns a z ma N ier F a e gr F a art Fi i e n E a p P LX A p E mana yt eue gar Note Entering AGAIN will repeat the last translation 6 4 18 ON OFF UNREF NODES Description This function toggles unreferenced nodes ON OFF for viewing purposes 6 88 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 6 5 MODEL CHECKER The functions in the MODEL CHECKER menu validate the VPG models PRE PROCESSOR The values for model validation are set with defaults in VPG but the values may be adjusted to suit the user s needs Element orientation size skew connectivity and interior angles may be compared to the specified criteria Elements can be checked individually or for the entire model After a model check function is performed an interactive inquiry function allows the user to pick individual elements for the calc
314. ns of the MATERIAL PROPERTY MENU See the preceding pages for a complete description of these functions 6 163 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 11 MATERIAL PROPERTY NASTRAN The functions in the MATERIAL PROPERTY MENU are designed to define and modify the material properties in the database Parts are displayed according to the color of their material definition Parts without material definition are displayed in white The functions in this menu are organized as follows HATERIAL PROPERTY ASSIGN MATERI AL CHANGE COLOR cory CRERTE PELETE DEFIHE PROPERTIES ERASE WHREF MATL LIST HaTERIAL COLOR ON OFF REHUMHMBER By switching solver code settings in the ANALYSIS PROGRAM command in the SETUP menu the user can assign and create materials that are solver code specific The user may assign and create materials at the beginning or at the end of a VPG session A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections Note If the analysis code is set to LS DYNA see section 6 10 6 11 1 ASSIGN MATERIAL Description This function assigns materials to selected parts Usage 1 If no materials are present in the database VPG gives the message NO MATERIALS DEFINED IN DATABASE and returns to the command prompt 2 Otherwise VPG prompts the user to select a material gt SELECT A MATERIAL 6 164 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e Users may select an existing mater
315. nstructural components or to modify masses to change the center of the gravity of the whole body The functions in this menu are organized as follows MASS HEHU HEAD FROM FILE WRITE TU FILE CREATE HASS MiDIFV HATS DELETE HASS IDENTIFY MASS CALCULATE HASS EXIT A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 6 16 1 READ FROM FILE Description This option allows the user to add mass elements to the database from a file that stores the mass information Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE FILE NAME gt ENTER DATABASE FILE NAME The files with the suffix xml will be listed in the window The user would select the name of a previously saved file or cancel to exit 2 Ifthe file does not exist the prompt reads gt CANNOT OPEN THE INPUT FILE 3 VPG reads in the file and returns the user to the MASS MENU Note All mass elements appear as small circles 6 16 2 WRITE TO FILE Description This function allows the user to output all mass information to a file Usage 6 201 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 1 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE FILE NAME gt ENTER DATABASE FILE NAME Enter a file name up to 24 characters 2 Ifthe file name is a new one VPG will create it VPG writes all mass information to the file and returns the user to the MASS MENU 3 Ifthe file name is old VPG prompts gt WARNING FILE xml ALREADY EXISTS OVERWRITE Y N
316. nt right hand rule about the W axis e f NORMAL offset was selected gt ENTER THICKNESS IN NORMAL DIRECTION e Thickness is the distance away from the plane of the elements in 6 39 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR the direction of the element s normal 6 VPG prompts gt INCLUDE COPIED ELEMENTS IN ITS ORIGINAL PART Y N YES NO e YES places all copied elements in their original part e NO places all copied elements into the CURRENT PART COPY MAPPING LCS Description Mapping allows the user to copy and move or simply move selected elements from one user defined coordinate system to another user defined coordinate system along the UV plane Usage 1 VPG prompts gt KEEP SELECTED ELEMENTS e YES copies the selected elements and moves the copied elements to the new location e NO removes the selected elements to the new location 2 VPG prompts gt DEFINE FIRST LOCAL COORDINATE e This defines the orientation of the selected elements 3 VPG prompts gt DEFINE SECOND LOCAL COORDINATE e This defines the new orientation for the selected elements e VPG aligns the copied or moved elements according to their UV orientation 6 40 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Coordinate system 1 o Selected elements for 4 mapping function Coordinate system 2 The selected elements have been T copied and moved to their new location 6 3 4 CREATE Description This function creates elements of
317. ntity Types APPENDIX D Converting RADIOSS to LS DYNA APPENDIX E Converting LS DYNA to RADIOSS APPENDIX F Converting NASTRAN to LS DYNA APPENDIX G Converting LS DYNA to NASTRAN APPENDIX H Converting RADIOSS to NASTRAN APPENDIX I Converting NASTRAN to RADIOSS APPENDIX J Converting ADAMS to LS DYNA APPENDIX K VPG Menu INDEX Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 Documentation The eta VPG Documentation consists of Manuals and Tutorials This manual serves as the primary description of all eta VPG functions and provides the user with a description of each of these functions and the necessary mechanics of how to use them The Tutorials demonstrate how to implement the various functions in eta VPG for use in specific finite element modeling applications This documentation was created to complete the following objectives 1 Provide a description of general purpose pre and post processor functions for constructing FEA models and reviewing analysis results 2 Provide descriptions of the usage of utility modules for meeting VPG specific application requirements Examples of this are tire model generation road surface library usage suspension template usage fatigue life prediction calculation and signal processing 3 Describe methods to interface with external data reading and writing files to various MCAE solvers and accepting data from commercial CAD software Accompanying this manual is a set of T
318. o road surfaces together before combining them into one 7 7 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES Usage 1 VPG prompts gt MOVE ROAD SURFACE IN DATABASE gt SELECT A NODE IN THE ROAD SURFACE TO BE MOVED 2 After the first node is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT A CORRESPONDING NODE FOR THE NEW LOCATION After the second node is selected the road surface is moved by aligning the first selected node with the second Finpd Serle HI is i Node 87 Fu m Nadr Ei Road Surface 87 7 1 6 COMBINE Description This option allows the user to combine 2 road surfaces into a single continuous road surface It is used in conjunction with the MOVE ROAD SURFACE function Usage 1 VPQG prompts 7 8 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES gt COMBINE ROAD SURFACES IN DATABASE gt SELECT AN ELEMENT ON THE FIRST ROAD SURFACE e The selected road surface is highlighted in white 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT AN ELEMENT ON THE SECOND ROAD SURFACE e The selected road surface is highlighted in white Note The selected surfaces must be in contact Otherwise VPG will prompt gt BEFORE COMBINING PLEASE MOVE TWO ROADS TOGETHER 3 VPG prompts gt ENTER COMBINED ROAD SURFACE NAME e The combined road surface will have a new name 4 Once the name is entered VPG prompts gt ROAD SURFACES COMBINED SUCCESSFULLY 7 1 7 EXPORT ROAD Description This option allows the user to save a user defined or modified road surface to a user d
319. o the PART SET submenu 6 7 26 INCLUDE PARTS Description This function adds additional parts to the current part set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT PARTS FOR PART SET XXXX gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART 2 Once the user has selected a part VPG prompts gt PART XXXX IS SELECTED e The user is returned to step 1 until EXIT is selected 6 7 27 LIST Description This function lists the defined sets in a pop up window 6 7 28 REMOVE PARTS Description This function deletes parts from the current part set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT PARTS FROM PART SET XXXX gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART 6 125 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 2 When the user has finished selecting parts and has exited the menu VPG removes the selected parts from the set 6 7 29 RENUMBER SET Description This function renumbers the defined sets Usage I VPG prompts gt SELECTED OPTIONS AUTOMATIC ALL OHE HY OHE SELECT OHE ERIT 2 If entering AUTOMATIC ALL VPG prompts gt ENTER FIRST PART ID amp INC TYPE 0 TO EXIT 3 If entering ONE BY ONE VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW PART SET ID OLD X TYPE 0 TO EXIT e This prompt is repeated until all sets are entered new set ID 4 If entering SELECT ONE VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM PART SET LIST e Once setis selected VPG prompts gt SET X IS SELECTED gt ENTER NEW PART SET ID OLD X TYPE 0 TO EXIT 6 7 30 REVIEW LIST Description This function di
320. oceeding with this function Usage 1 VPG prompts 6 22 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt SELECT LINES LINE SEGMENT allows the user to combine a broken line while selecting lines for the 4 LINE SURFACE function as in the COMBINE LINE function in the LINE section The user must select this option before selecting the desired lines for 4 LINE MESH e The user may check the line s prior to executing this function by using SHOW LINE in the LINE section 2 Once the desired element N1 N2 N3 N4 is entered VPG prompts gt ACCEPT SURFACE YES NO ABORT e YES will accept mesh and prompt for more lines e NO will not accept mesh and prompt for more lines e ABORT rejects the surface and exits the command Note Select lines in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction Note The direction of the surface normal dictates the direction of the plate element normals 6 2 8 MIRROR Description Reflects a copy of desired surfaces across a local or global coordinate plane Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a surface on the screen 2 VPG prompts the user to select a coordinate system followed by the plane of the mirror The user may create a local coordinate system using any method available in VPG see section 2 14 for a description of Local Coordinate System creation 3 The user then has the option of putting the surface in a new part 6 2 9 REMOVE HOLES Description This function allows the user to remove holes on the se
321. odal temperatures that thermally load the structure Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 18 33 for further description 6 142 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 9 BOUNDARY CONDITIONS NASTRAN The functions of the BOUNDARY CONDITIONS MENU create and verify constraints and loads on finite element models The functions in the BOUNDARY CONDITIONS MENU are organized as follows BOUNDARY CONDITIONS SUBCASE CONTROL LOAD SPC INITIAL VELOCITY MPC EXIT A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections Note If the selected analysis code is LS DYNA a separate menu with different options will appear See Section 6 8 BOUNDARY CONDITIONS LS DYNA 6 9 1 SUBCASE CONTROL Description This function allows users to create and manipulate NASTRAN subcases Specific descriptions of each of the commands are provided in the following sections Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION CREATE SUBCASE DELETE SUBCASE SHOW SUBCASE MODIFY SUBCASE EXIT SUBCASE CONTROL CREATE SUBCASE Description This function incorporates load sets and SPC sets into a subcase The user may use any combination of load sets and SPC sets in each subcase Usage 1 The NASTRAN SUBCASE DEFINITION window pops up and VPG prompts the user to enter a series of identifiers 6 143 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e he subcase number defaults to the next available set number in sequence The user enters th
322. ode set in step 1 VPG prompts gt SET X IS SELECTED 4 EXIT returns the user to the NODE SET submenu 6 7 5 REMOVE EMPTY SETS NODE Description This function deletes sets with no nodes assigned to them 6 116 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 7 6 REMOVE UNREF SETS NODE Description This function deletes sets that have not been assigned boundary conditions constraints initial conditions or loads 6 7 7 INCLUDE NODES Description This function adds additional nodes to the current node set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES FOR NODE SET XXXX gt SELECT NODES 2 Once the nodes have been selected and the user has exited the INCLUDE submenu VPG displays the nodes with their node set number 6 7 8 LIST Description This function lists the defined sets in a pop up window 6 7 9 REMOVE NODES Description This function deletes selected nodes from the current node set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES FOR NODE SET XXXX gt SELECT NODES 2 Once the nodes have been selected and the user has exited the REMOVE submenu VPG removes the nodes from their node set 6 7 10 RENUMBER SET Description This function allows the user to renumber any of the defined sets This may be performed on a single set or an all sets contained in the database Usage 1 VPG prompts 6 117 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt SELECTED OPTIONS AUTOMATIC ALL DHE B Y OWE SELECT OHE EXIT 2 If
323. odel when rendering the default colour is white Background color Setting the background color of Graphic Display Window the default color is black Xor Plotter Styler Setting the Xor Plotter style the default style is GDI Light Source Type oetting the type of light source the default type is local light source Second Render Setting the second render on off the default type is off NVIDIA Quadro FX series high performance graphic cards require this option set to ON in order to work properly Debug Setting the mode of version debug on off the default mode is off 9 6 2 WINDOW PARAMETER Description The parameter LAYOUT TYPE controls the location LEFT or RIGHT of the CONTROL WINDOW Default setting is on the RIGHT side of the screen The user may change the parameter to LEFT to place the CONTROL WINODW on the left side of the screen 9 6 3 PRODUCT PARAMETER Description The parameters in this group are used to customize the product parameters Product Name Setting the product of Pre Processor of eta There are two kinks of product one is DYNAFORM and another is VPG The content of function icons in the Control Window is different between DYNAFORM and VPG The default is DYNAFORM Extended GUI Setting the extended GUI on off the default setting is on 9 6 4 DIRECTORY Description This parameter records the directory of the latest opened file 9 7 FILE MENU Description The options in this pull down menu are used to
324. odels constructed in eta VPG are organized into PARTS These Parts may contain lines surfaces and or elements Parts may contain only one type of entity or may contain any combination of entity types Parts may be created from the PART menu All data that is created in eta VPG such as elements lines or surfaces is created in the CURRENT PART The current part may be selected or changed from the PART menu Once selected all data created is placed in this part Parts may be turned on and off for display purposes from the PART menu 4 1 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 4 Main Menu 4 3 PRE The PRE menu is the main Preprocessing menu In this menu the user will find all of the necessary modeling functions to create elements nodes materials contacts element properties and boundary conditions 4 4 ROAD The ROAD Menu allows users to select and place a road surface model in their VPG model This menu is only available if the user is in LS DYNA mode see UTILITIES menu SETUP command 4 5 SUSPENSION The SUSPENSION menu allows users to create suspension system models from predefined templates This menu is available only in LS DYNA mode see UTILITIES menu Typical automotive suspension types are predefined and users may input their data into the desired suspension template VPG will then construct an LS DYNA based model using appropriate entities for the various model components 4 6 TIRE VPG contains tools to generate parametric tire
325. oint defines the direction of the local U axis The third reference point defines the local UV plane The local W axis is defined in the UV plane and is perpendicular to the U axis The local W axis is then defined according to the 2 17 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features right hand rule perpendicular to the UV plane For the two point option DONE should be selected after the second reference point is defined The local W axis lies along the vector from the origin to the second reference point the V axis lies in the VW plane and the U axis is defined by the right hand rule Note All rotational commands generating arcs copying with rotation etc are executed about the local W or global Z axis For the one reference point option the user selects a point or node on the screen as the local origin then enters one of the X Y or Z options that are listed to define the local W along one of the global axes 1 When creating a local coordinate system VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN e VPG prompts for a desired coordinate system local or global in the options area ABORT GLOBAL SYSTEM KEY IN X Y Z e his signals the user to key in the origin of the local coordinate system gt ENTER X Y Z COORDINATES e he user enters the values for the X Y and Z coordinates e g 100 0 and O NODE e Default POINT SHOW LAST C S e Once the last coordinate system has been dis
326. on displays a window allowing the user to set the analysis unit for the job the input file name the analysis title and the engineer s name before submitting the analysis lr eure CURREMT svsTEM B ruin _ Actu Pete Oy pa Lh Anis Tie 7 23 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 3 TIRE MENU The tire model is one of the most important components in a VPG analysis Although modern pneumatic tires have very complex structures the VPG tire model concentrates only on the most important global mechanical properties of the tire These properties ensure the proper transfer of forces and displacements from the tire road contact interface to the vehicle chassis suspension and body structure A key advantage of this tire model is its simplicity giving CPU economy The tire has the ability to interact with three dimensional road surfaces in a manner consistent with actual tires This allows for the prediction of lateral and longitudinal force within the vehicle suspension with greater accuracy VPG s tire generator creates tires with the following characteristics and properties The tire s tread and chafer are Mooney Rivlin type rubber materials modeled with eight node solid elements The tire s top ply and sidewall are modeled as shell elements with elastic material The wheel is made of rigid shell elements Tire inflation pressure is defined according to the formula pV T constant where p is pressure V is the volume confined within
327. ons require a minimum number of samples e g Differentiation Integration etc If the user used these operations without respecting these requirements an error message box will be popped up There are four digital filters as discussed earlier in Graph All the filters have default parameters for convenience There are two classes of digital filter non recursive and recursive Butterworth filter is the lowpass recursive filter and the FIR and average filter are non recursive filters The computation requirement for the FIR filters are lower than that for Butterworth However the Butterworth gives more power and less signal loss 9 12 9 NEW GRAPH Description This function allows the user to create the new graph on a new curve window and set as the current window By default the new graph is plot on the current curve window if the user press Apply NOTE Prior to opening multiple graph files the user should open a NEW CURVE WINDOW for each graph This will prevent the graphs from merging into a previously opened graph unless it is needed 9 12 10 SAVE Description This function allows the user to save all the graphs in current curve window This function allows the user to close the pop up window 9 12 11 NEW GRAPH Description This function allows the user to create a new blank graph window and this graph window is defaulted as the current window The user can display the desired graph in this window Furthermore the user can past
328. ontains all duplicate node and element numbers the new part will read in without the presence of elements or nodes 4 VPG reads in the file and returns the user to the FILE MANAGER menu 5 6 1 7 READ PAMCRASH FILE This function allows the user to read a PAMCRASH po file directly into VPG Once the user has entered the command the files with the suffix pc will be listed in the options area The user may then select the desired file 5 6 1 8 READ RADIOSS FILE This function allows the user to read a RADIOSS data file directly into VPG VPG can read fixed format input files from RADIOSS Versions 2 1 2 2 2 3 3 1 and 4 1 VPG can write RADIOSS 4 1 fixed format input files VPG supports all input cards of RADIOSS 4 1 fixed format VPG contains options when reading RADIOSS input and output files These options relate to the translation of rigid bodies to VPG and the loading of model information RADIOSS requires two files to be loaded one is the RADIOSS output file out which contains the rigid body information The second is the RADIOSS input file DOO which contains model information If the user has both files he should click YES at the first prompt to read both the RADIOSS output and input files If the user has only the RADIOSS input file the user should select NO o 1 Begin with reading the RADIOSS output file out This loads the rigid body information VPG will prompt gt ADJUST RIGID BODY PRIMARY NODES FROM R
329. opy of desired elements across a local or global coordinate plane Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS 2 Once the desired elements have been selected VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN e VPG asks for a desired coordinate system local or global VPG prompts the user to create a local system A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 15 3 Once the desired coordinate system is acquired it will be displayed on the screen and the prompt will read gt ACCEPT Y N A e If the user selects NO VPG returns to step 2 4 Ifthe user selects YES VPG prompts ENTER PLANE OF MIRROR XY YZ XZ AV PILAR VZ PLANE 5 VPG prompts whether or not to keep the elements in their original parts gt INCLUDE MIRRORED ELEMENTS IN ITS ORIGINAL PART Y N A YES NO e YES will place all selected elements into their source part e NOwIII place all selected elements into the CURRENT PART 6 3 11 MODIFY Description This function allows the user to simultaneously delete and recreate any displayed elements The displayed elements that are to be modified DO NOT need to be in the CURRENT part VPG will automatically identify the element type of the selected element and prompt the user to recreate it 6 60 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Details are covered in CREATE ELEMENTS earlier in this section In LS DYNA mo
330. orthiness and occupant safety simulations are somewhat standardized and various groups using different pre post processors have established what are known as best practice procedures ETA s consulting group has been performing simulations on vehicle development programs for over a decade and developed the crash tools and simulation technology to meet customer requirements throughout the process The VPG Safety Module is organized into three 3 components 1 Crash Tool Library consists of all necessary crash tool models dummy models barrier models impactors etc 2 Vehicle Crashworthiness Processes includes FMVSS ECE EEC and Industry Standards 3 Occupant Safety Processes includes FMVSS ECE EEC and Industry Standards Details of these components and their capabilities are documented in the following sections Notice to Users While the following sections of this manual have been created using the publicly available information for each of the tests and test simulations described in this manual the user should exercise caution when performing these analyses Current testing methods and governmental regulations should be studied and compared to the testing and analysis methods described here so that a fully accurate study can be performed The writers of this document and the authors of the VPG Safety software strongly recommend that all users take the initiative to study the testing procedure and the related analysis pro
331. our other functions are enabled to use shown as Figure 9 54 9 46 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING ERE ea i ee ED a Bs Frame Number Frames Second 25 SSS Figure 9 54 Pause Status FIRST FRAME M display the first frame PREVIOUS FRAME a display the previous frame NEXT FRAME display the next frame LAST FRAME display the end frame stop Stop the animation WRITE AVI AND E3D This function creates a avi file or a e3d file from current animation An AVI file is a Microsoft multimedia file that provides a means to store a series of images for animation An E3D file is an ETA 3D player file that provides a means to store the file for true 3D demo by eta 3D Player Eta Post outputs AVI or E3D files during the animation process only To output an AVI file first animate the result During Animation click the WRITE AVI icon Eta Post displays the WRITE FILE window for the user to choose a name and location for the AVI file After entering the name and location of the file SAVE button in the WRITE FILE window eta Post displays the SELECT COMPRESSION FORMAT for the user to select the compression type and quality Once the compression type and quality are determined OK accepts and creates the file FRAME NUMBER After pause the animation this function allows the user to drag the slider to the desired frame and the frame will be plotted automatically When play animation the frame number i
332. ow i au Ld rT L i F T EAS SAE r Fy Im liri Print Cupboard Export Attmbute Operation save mmc mum mam m ee Curve Options cec veces sp ron eur vod uo Piters average eai Computation ef xd cf bx Resuitant Curve Copy Paste Delete Figure 9 72 The Curve Operation Window There is a curve list box on the left of the Operation window The curve names are list on this list box The user can select one or several curve name s through press the left mouse and move it CURVE OBJECT OPERATION e COPY This function allows the user to copy the selected curve s e PASTE This function allows the user to paste the copied curve s to the current curve window NOTE we can t paste the curve to other software such as MS Word since the format that copy from curve is the inner format of eta Post Processor If the user wants to paste to 9 69 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING other software using the Clipboard function is available way e DELETE This function allows the user to delete the selected curve s from the current curve window 9 12 6 16 CURVE DATA OPERATION CURVE OPTION The Curve Options includes 9 kinds of operation for the curve data NEGATIVE This function allows the user to change the Y axis value of selected curves through multiplying 1 xx SCALE This function allows the user superimposes the scale curve that
333. owing the user to define the load curve ENTER LOAD CURVE NUMBER xxxx OR 1 TO EXIT ENTER CURVE NAME UP TO 8 CHARACTERS VPG recommends using the extension Icr for this command 2 VPG prompts ENTER DATA TIME amp VALUE FOR POINT XXXX OR END Where XXXX is the point number and the input format is TIME VALUE 9 VPG displays the curve operations 10 27 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY CURVES CURVE OPERATIONS CLEAR SCREEH DELETE HARDCOPY PT EUR QUERY HANGE SLE EXIT Figure 10 4 8 2 Curves Operations Menu These options are explained in GRAPH Section 8 4 DELETE Description This function allows the user to delete load curves Usage 1 VPG displays the DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST and prompts gt SELECT CARD TO DELETE 2 EXIT deletes the selected load curves from the database LIST Description This function lists the available load curves in the DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST MODIFY Description This function allows the user to quickly modify points on a defined curve Usage 1 VPG lists the curves in the DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST and prompts gt SELECT CURVE FROM CURVE LIST 2 After selecting the curve the CURVE DEFINITION CARD appears allowing the user to edit the curve data READ CURVE Description This function imports existing curve data into the VPG database Usage 10 28 1 VPG displays the VPG FILE MENU allowing the user to enter the curve cur file 2 Once the curv
334. ows the user to generate an FMVSS214b Static Side Door Intrusion impact ram and position it within the current VPG database Usage 1 VPG prompts ENTER STATIC SIDE DOOR INTRUSION INFORMATION STATIC SIDE DOOR DATA TEMS _ DATA FAMIDDOR CLEARANCE imm r anneau am Fan Bu AE vELDOTY man Femur ai X FAM FRONT BOTTOM EDGE imm itt REI E RAM FRAT BOTTOM EDGE mm Fe a cancel m Input values and press OK 2 VPG prompts gt PICK THE FRONT EDGE IN THE LOWER SURFACE OF THE RAM gt PICK ANODE OR INPUT THE Y VALUE OF THE RAM CONTROL KEYS ARNAT CURSOR AT ELEMENT WEY IH X Vo 2 UH UFF PRET KEEP PART UHO LAST 3 Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the door outer panel as target position The rigid ram will be positioned to desired location Proper contact and velocity will also be defined in the model Figure 1 An Example of a Generated Side Door Intrusion Model 7 35 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 4 5 2 FMVSS214 DYNAMIC SIDE IMPACT Description This function allows the user to import the FMVSS214 US Moving Deformable Barrier MDB and dummies and position these according to the requirements of FMVSS 214 Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER FMVSS 214 SIDE IMPACT INFORMATION FMVSS HUE IMPACT DATA DATA VEHICLEIBARRIEB Y DANCE m EMIT a BARRIER VELOCITY mest tno T RANE d X OF
335. perature fields The fields may be used in the subcase definition Usage 1 VPG prompts to select option as following LOAD TEMPERATURE FIELD CREATE Description This function defines a new load set The load set may be used in the subcase definition Usage 1 When entering CREATE VPG prompts to select option as following TEMP TEMP F 1 TEHPRB ERIT e The functions DELETE LIST and MODIFY refer to STATIC LOAD 6 9 3 SPC Description This function allows the user to create and or modify the SPC single point constraint options that constrain nodes in six degrees of freedom Usage 1 VPG displays a list of additional commands in the options area 6 151 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 2 Each of these commands is described in the following pages SPC CREATE Description This function creates a new SPC set The SPC set may be used later for subcase definition Usage 1 When the user enters CREATE SPC VPG prompts gt ENTER SPC SET NUMBER XXXX OR 1 TO EXIT e The user must enter an integer before proceeding 2 After the user enters SPC set number VPG prompts gt DEFINE D O F FOR SPC Simultaneously the SPC DEGREE OF FREEDOM box pops up and as following 6 152 eta VPG3 0 ad o WY WY TT aa TY ae a Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR The options in the top and bottom of the SPC DEGREE OF FREEDOM box represent alternate method
336. perty name 3 After the user selects a section the prompt reads gt SECTION ID X IS SELECTED gt SELECT COLOR FROM COLOR BAR OR EXIT 4 The new color is assigned to the selected section 6 12 3 COPY NASTRAN Description This function copies the properties from one element to another Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a property gt SELECT SECTION TO COPY e The user may select a property by picking an element on the screen that contains a desired property default or by selecting a property name 2 After the user selects the desired property to copy VPG prompts gt SECTION ID X IS SELECTED 6 170 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt SECTION ID XX DUPLICATED FROM SECTION ID X e The user exits the function COPY and returns to the ELEMENT PROPERTY menu 6 12 4 COPY LS DYNA Description This function copies the properties from one element to another Usage 1 VPG displays the SECTION CARD LIST and prompts the user to select a section gt SELECT SECTION TO COPY 2 After the user selects the desired section to copy VPG prompts gt SECTION ID XX DUPLICATED FROM SECTION ID X 6 12 5 CREATE NASTRAN Description This function allows the user to create define a property Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select property type gt SELECT OPTION e The SELECT PROPERTY TYPE menu is as shown on the right 2 Once a property type is selected VPG displays a definition card in
337. played see step 3 e The user may select a node or a point enter a coordinate by keyboard or use any combination of these options to create a local coordinate system 2 Once a reference point has been selected VPG prompts gt PICK NEXT POINT OR NODE ABORT DONE e After the user selects 2 reference points VPG displays the coordinate system and continues to step 3 KEY IN XYZ e The user may enter up to 3 reference points globally to define a local coordinate system INCREMENTAL XYZ e The user may enter DX DY and DZ from the previous reference 2 18 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features point to define a local coordinate system NODE e The user may select up to 3 nodes to define a coordinate system POINT e he user may select up to 3 points to define a coordinate system REJECT LAST e This allows the user to deselect the last reference point during the selection process X AS LOCAL W AXIS e This defines a local coordinate system that is parallel to the global axis with the local W along the global X axis and the local origin at the first reference point Y AS LOCAL W AXIS e This defines a local coordinate system that is parallel to the global axis with the local W along the global Y axis and the local origin at the first reference point Z AS LOCAL W AXIS e his defines a local coordinate system parallel to the global axis with the local W along the global Z axis and the local origin at the first refere
338. points The element will be created e EXIT or ABORT terminates this function CREATE SPRING ELEMENT CELAS 1 NASTRAN Description This section covers the options for the general SPRING ELEMENT subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER SPRING DIRECTION 1 to 6 AT EACH END e Two entries are required one for each end of the spring e g 1 1 for the x direction e Any number of spring elements may be created for the same connectivity depending upon the number of directions required 6 45 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 1 translational along the global X axis 2 translational along the global Y axis 3 translational along the global Z axis 4 rotational along the global X axis 5 rotational along the global Y axis 6 rotational along the global Z axis e Once the desired direction has been entered for the spring VPG prompts the user to enter a property If no properties exist in the database at the current time VPG prompts to create one 2 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR CELAS1 ELEMENT e To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three e Select 2 nodes points The element will be created e EXIT or ABORT will exit this function CREATE RIGID BAR RBAR NASTRAN Description This section covers the options for the RIGID BAR section of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER D O F CNA CNB C
339. pothole event A tire model was developed to include a control volume technique to simulate the tire air pressure behavior under an impact condition The simulation of the frictional contact of the tire model with the rigid road surface was extremely realistic and correlated with existing tire data To complete the system level simulation the need for dynamic test based boundary conditions 1 2 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 1 Introduction was necessary ETA therefore formed an agreement with MGA Research Corporation to model the company s vehicle proving ground facility located in Burlington Wisconsin ETA created road surface profiles that could be digitized from the proving ground construction drawings ina CAD surface format FEA mesh could be generated from the CAD surface data and produced a selection of specific road profiles representing the characteristics of the proving ground testing conditions After years of development and evaluation it has been confirmed that VPG technology produces repeatable reliable and correlated analysis results The level of confidence from users and correlation results has lead to aggressive simulation use and a broad application scope Dr John Hallquist at Livermore Software Technology Corporation LSTC has been instrumental in the development of the VPG application technology by implementing various features and functions of LS DYNA to meet VPG requirements This partnership with LSTC has allowed the VPG met
340. process to set up the simulation model A total of 21 different governmental or insurance institute test procedures are contained within VPG Safety 1 5 eta VPG Special Features eta VPG was initially designed with unique features specifically for virtual proving ground simulations These features are not found in competing general purpose pre and post processors The development of these features and functions was necessary to satisfy the following VPG requirements 1 Generation of complicated full vehicle full system models and retention of complex non linear material properties contact definitions etc 2 Generation and retention of user defined libraries and modules such as a tire library proving ground road surface libraries etc 3 Post processing of potentially large amounts of analysis data displacement forces acceleration stress and strain derived from time domain solution of multiple events and the conversion from time domain results into frequency domain results frequency mode shape and PSD etc 4 Post processing of stress and strain results of multiple events and conducting the fatigue life prediction 5 Modeling and set up of vehicle impact analyses using FMVSS ECE and Insurance Institute standard testing procedures The key features are briefly described below A more detailed explanation of these features is found in Chapter 7 LS DYNA 970 Interface Module eta VPG incorporates a complete direct LS DYNA ve
341. pts gt ENTER NEW CONTACT ID OLD X TYPE 0 TO EXIT 6 13 7 REVERSE NORMAL Description This function allows the user to reverse the contact orientation normal for all contacts Usage 1 The CONTACT CARD LIST pops up and simultaneously VPG prompts gt PICK CONTACT TO REVERSE NORMAL e Once the user selects one contact card VPG prompts gt PICK CONTACT PORTION TO REVERSE NORMAL 2 After the user selects MASTER or SLAVE VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS 6 13 8 SHOW Description This function allows the user to highlight defined interfaces Upon selection of the SHOW command the CONTACT CARD LIST is displayed When the desired interface is selected it will be highlighted in the DRAWING WINDOW Usage VPG prompts gt THIS CONTACT TYPE CANNOT BE SHOWN e The CONTACT CARD LIST is as following 6 179 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Note The displayed contact may be erased by clicking the CLEAR button in the DISPLAY PARAMETER OPTIONS WINDOW ad O v uU TT o ad TY ad a 6 180 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 14 DYNA MISCELLANEOUS The DYNA MISCELLANEOUS MENU contains distinct LS DYNA specific functions VPG defines these functions in two ways graphically when defining such things such as a box or vector and with cards based on the definition cards found in the LS DYNA Keyword User s Manual An example of a definition card can be found in Section 2 13 TNA MISC AIRBAGS
342. pts gt SELECT SET FROM type SET LIST List of all sets CURSOR AT element node part EXIT 2 Once the set s is selected VPG prompts gt SET X FLAGGED AS CURRENT SET The selected set is current 6 6 4 DELETE Description This function allows the user to remove sets by ID number Selecting the set name also indicates where the set has been used such as in boundary conditions VPG is specifically configured to recognize sets for this procedure Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM type SET LIST e List of all sets CURSOR AT element node part ALL type SETS EXIT 2 Ifthe user selects ALL type SETS in step 2 the sets are highlighted in red in the VPG MENU WINDOW gt OK TO DELETE ALL type SETS Y N YES NO e If YES VPG issues the following message gt ALL type SETS DELETED FROM DATABASE e If NO VPG returns the user to the set submenu 3 Ifthe user selects an individual set in step 1 the set will be highlighted in red When the user exits the submenu all highlighted sets will be deleted 6 6 5 REMOVE EMPTY SETS NODE Description This function deletes sets with no nodes assigned to them 6 110 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 6 6 REMOVE UNREF SETS NODE Description This function deletes sets that have not been assigned boundary conditions constraints initial conditions loads or contacts 6 6 7 INCLUDE Description This function adds additional elements nod
343. r material thickness using the appropriate modeling parameter 10 3 29 SHOW STRAIN Description This function allows the user to visualize the calculated residual strain values via color fringe plots The strain value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of the display area 10 3 30 REMOVE STRAIN Description This function allows the user to remove previously defined thickness values obtained from a thickness calculation 10 4 UTILITY MENU The commands in the UTILITY menu make up VPG s tool kit Many of these commands are also located in other menus as well 10 21 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY UTILITIES MEHU WAEL E CIORI HATE SYSTEM DRAW ARROW DIS TAHCE DEFIHE TITLE IBEHTIFY H bE POTIHT IDENTIFY ELEHEHT LOAD CURVE SHOW LINES STATISTICS HARDCOPY DEFRULTS SETUP ERIT Figure 10 4 Utilities Menu A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 10 4 1 ANGLE Description The ANGLE command measures the angle between three selected points and or nodes VPG calculates the measurements of four angles for this command The first is the true angle the angle in the plane of the selected points The remaining three angles are measured from the TOP SIDE and REAR views of the model Usage 1 VPG prompts SELECT VERTEX 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT 2 POINTS NODES 3 VPG displays angle information gt ANGLE
344. r to add notes to a selected set 6 108 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM type SET LIST List of all sets CURSOR AT element node part EXIT 2 After selecting a set VPG prompts gt SETXIS SELECTED gt ENTER CARD DESCRIPTION 70 CHAR MAX e Once the note is entered the user is returned to step 1 6 6 2 CREATE Description This function allows the user to generate sets with unique ID numbers The respective element node part may be included in multiple sets Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW type SET NUMBER X OR E TO EXIT e Any integer greater than zero 0 is valid If the user enters a set ID number already assigned VPG returns the prompt gt type SET xxxx ALREADY EXISTS zs VPG prompts gt SELECT element node part e The user may press the left most mouse button or N to select the element nearest to the cursor If the user selects the same element node part twice while creating a the set VPG returns the prompt gt type xxxx ALREADY PICKED e If the user selects DONE EXIT VPG saves the set and prompts gt X type INCLUDED IN type SET X e If the user selects ABORT VPG deletes the node set and returns the user to the SET submenu 6 6 3 CURRENT Description This function allows the user to select the current set from a list of previously defined sets 6 109 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG prom
345. r to select necessary nodes in the first rigid body to define the orientation of the joint The requirements for each type of joint are listed in the following table NUMBER OF JOINT NODES ORIENTATION IDENTIFIER TYPE SYMBOL Axis of Cylinder Translational 3 N1 N3 N5 Direction amp Plane of Translation 3 N1 N3 N5 Axis amp Plane Universal 3 N1 N3 N4 Center UJ miii EN Perpendicular Axes The program then prompts the user to select the second part rigid body with material type 20 for the joint All the required coincident nodes on the second part will be created and added to the second rigid body as CONSTRAINED EXTRA NODES NODES 6 52 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR CREATE PLOTEL ELEMENT LS DYNA Description This section covers the options for the PLOTEL ELEMENT subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT This step is repeated until user enters ABORT or EXIT CREATE INERTIA LS DYNA Description This section covers the options for the INERTIA subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts to define local coordinates 2 After local coordinates are defined VPG prompts gt ENTER MASS INERTIA Ixx Ixy Ixz lyy lyz amp Izz 3 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT CREATE CONST NODE SET LS DYNA Description This section covers the options for the CONST NODE SET subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1
346. rate and post process fatigue result files from within the VPG Interface 2 4 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features ANIMATE CONTOUR This function is used to map the stresses strains and strain energy of the model across time Animations can be edited to even odd or specified frames ANIMATE DEFORMATION This command allows the user to animate displacements within the model in real time Animations can be edited to even odd or specified frames CONTOUR FILL This function maps stresses strains and strain energy in the model for a single step It allows the user to view the contour values by superimposing a fill color contour image onto the model The values are displayed in a color legend in the upper right hand corner of the screen CONTOUR LINES This function similar to the CONTOUR FILL function allows the user to check the model s contour values for a single step A color wire frame contour line plot of the component result is superimposed onto the current model DEFORMED SHAPE This command displays the displacement results of the model for a single step The undeformed model shape is displayed in white The model can be animated to show the transition between the undeformed and deformed model Element Stress This function displays the stress results of each individual element as opposed to the contour plot functions which display the stress results in terms of the average stress at each node A color le
347. regarding the displacement of the node it will be stationary in the constrained direction during the animation The rest of the model will be displaced relative to the reference point in the un constrained direction s 9 36 eta VPG 3 0 The user Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Control Option Constrain x Axis Constrain Y Axis Constrain Axis Select Reference Mode Show Reference Mode Clear Constrain Motion Exit Figure 9 36 Constraint Motion Dialog Window Note When Axis is selected as the constraint axis the function will be labeled with asterisk When toggle on Show Reference Node the function will be labeled with asterisk and when animate the reference node will be labeled with highlighted circle Please see the Figure 9 36 9 9 3 MIRROR RESULT BY XYZ Description This function allows the user to select a mirror plane to mirror the analysis result There are three mirror planes XY PLANE YZ PLANE and ZX PLANE as shown in Figure 9 37 Control Option Mirror Result By y Plane Mirror Result By v Plane Mirrar Result By A8 Plane Clean Mirror Result Figure 9 37 Mirror Result Control Option Window The following example is to mirror a quarter of the model and result as shown in Figure 9 38 When select MIRROR RESULT BY YZ PLANE the program mirrors the model and result as shown in Figure 9 39 9 37 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING LETHA aen impii 15 fh Tics sd HIISIE NI TAI n CD
348. ress Apply to display the filter result 9 12 7 COMPUTATION Description This function allows the user to create a new curve through the algebraic operation of several selected curves including Add Subtract Multiply Divide and so on ADD This function enables two or more curves are selected and added to each other SUBTRACT This function enables two or more curves are selected and subtracted form each other x MULTIPLY This function enables two or more curves are selected and multiplied E DIVIDE This function enables two or more curves are selected and the values are divided to from a quotient curve 9 74 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 2 BRACKET This function enables the user to change the priority level of an expression vs TRANSLATE This function enables the user to create a new curve with two selected curves The new X axis value is equal to the Y axis value of the first selected curve and the new Y axis value is equal to the Y axis value of the second curve 9 12 8 RESULT CURVE Description This function can display the expression dynamically during the operation For example if the user want to square a curve and integrate it The user can click the curve name on the name list window the name of the curve will display on the Result Curve text box Then click the SQUARE button and the INTEGRATE button respectively The content of the Result curve text box will change to such expression
349. rfaces Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO DELETE VPG displays the defined interfaces in the CONTACT CARD LIST with the options gt SELECT ALL ABORT UNDO EXIT e Cursor pick marks the selected interfaces with an asterisk Exiting the CONTACT CARD LIST will delete all asterisked interfaces 6 13 4 MODIFY Description This function allows the user to redefine interface properties Upon selection of the MODIFY command the CONTACT CARD LIST is displayed with a list of the interfaces An interface is selected by cursor pick and its definition card is then displayed for the user to modify 6 13 5 LIST Description This function lists the defined interfaces in the CONTACT CARD LIST 6 13 6 RENUMBER Description This function renumbers the ID for a selected contact or for all contacts Usage 1 VPG prompts for the option gt SELECT OPTIONS BUTOMATIC ALL BHE BY DHE SELECT 0HE EXIT 6 178 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 2 Ifthe user enters AUTOMATIC ALL VPG prompts gt ENTER FIRST CONTACT ID amp INC TYPE 0 TO EXIT 3 Ifthe user selects ONE BY ONE VPG prompts for a new ID for each contact The following prompt will be repeated for each contact in the database gt ENTER NEW CONTACT ID OLD X TYPE 0 TO EXIT e If the user enters nothing VPG defaults to the original values 4 lf the user enters SELECT ONE VPG prompts gt SELECT ONE CONTACT e Once the user selects one contact card VPG prom
350. rings and dampers Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW VECTOR ID X OR E TO EXIT 2 Once the vector ID has been established VPG prompts gt SELECT SPRING ORIENTATION OPTION ALGAE VECTOR VECTOR HORMAL PLAHE ALENG 72 HODES HODE H RHAL PLAHE EXIT After defining the vector it is displayed with its vector number in the display window Note Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 9 12 for further description DEFINE TABLE Description The definition card in the TABLE subsection defines a table Usage 6 193 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 1 When CREATE is selected the TERMINATION DEFINITION window appears Note Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description DEFINE VECTOR Description This function defines a vector using the coordinates of two nodes or points Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW VECTOR ID X OR E TO EXIT 2 Once the vector ID has been established VPG prompts DEFINE TAIL OF VECTOR BERT KEV IH X V Z 3 VPG prompts gt DEFINE HEAD OF VECTOR HORT REJECT VECTOR TRAIL e After defining the vector head the vector is displayed with its vector number in the display window Note Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 9 16 for further description 6 14 8 DEFORMABLE TO RIGID Description The definition cards of DEFORMABLE TO RIGID specify properties of deformable parts Deformable parts
351. rint out 9 7 5 5 NUMBER OF COPIES Description This function allows the user to print multiple copies to the printer It has no effect on the PRINT TO FILE option 9 7 5 6 PRINT Description This function will send the model to a selected printer or prompt the user to enter a file name to save the file 9 7 5 7 CANCEL Description This function allows user to exit the function and reject any selections made 9 7 6 QUIT ALT Q Description Selection of this option ends the current eta Post session and returns back to eta VPG pre processing environment If the user is executing eta Post from a stand alone mode this option terminates the eta Post software 9 23 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 8 EDIT MENU The functions in the Edit menu allow the user to modify the setting of the model display Figure 9 13 shows the drop down list of the Edit functions Edit Create Line Delete Line Label Arrow Rotate Light Light Praperty Color Map Part Attributes User View Background Color Figure 9 13 Edit menu A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 9 8 1 CREATE LINE Description This function enables the user to create a line by selecting a set of nodes In eta Post a line is formed by a sequence of points The program displays the line by a set of straight line segments between adjacent points in sequence The generated lines are included in a new part The progr
352. rocessor Those file formats including 9 56 ABSTAT BNDOUT DEFGEO DEFORC ELOUT GCEOUT GLSTAT JNTFORC MATSUM NCFORC NODFOR NODOUT RBDOUT RCFORC RWFORC Airbag statistics Boundary nodal forces Deformed geometry Discrete elements Element data Contact element resultants Global data Joint force file Material energies Contact interface forces Nodal force Nodal point data Rigid body data Resultant interface forces Wall forces eta VPG3 0 Chapter 9 SBTOUT SECFORC SLEOUT SPCFORC SSSTAT SWFORC TPRINT POST PROCESSING Seatbelt output Cross section forces Sliding interface energy Single point constraint SPC reaction forces Subsystem statistics Spotweld rivet forces Temperature output AIRBAG STATISTICS ABSTAT Description The user can plot airbag statistic data from the abstat file The following types are available VOLUME PRESSURE INTERNAL ENERGY DM DT IN GENSITY DM DT OUT TOTAL MASS GAS TEMPERATURE BOUNDARY NODAL FORCES BNDOUT Description The user can plot boundary nodal force time history data from the bndout file The following types are available XFORCE YFORCE ZFORCE ENERGY DEFORMED GEOMETRY DEFGEO Description The user can plot the deformed geometry data from the defgeo file DISCRETE ELEMENTS DEFORC Description This user can plot the discrete element time history data from the deforc file The 9 57 eta VPG3 0 Chapter
353. rompts gt ACCEPT DRAG MESH Y N DRAG MESH NORMAL DRAG Description This section covers the options for the NORMAL DRAG subsection of DRAG MESH The normal drag function extrudes the selected plate elements in the normal direction to create solid elements Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS 2 Then VPG prompts gt ENTER THICKNESS OF NORMAL DRAG e This is the total thickness of the drag operation gt ENTER NUMBER OF LAYERS THRU THICKNESS DEFAULT 1 e This is the thickness of each layer of elements gt ACCEPT EXTRUDE MESH Y N Note Plate element normals should be consistent prior to the execution of NORMAL DRAG DRAG MESH ROTATIONAL DRAG Description This section covers the options for the ROTATIONAL DRAG subsection of DRAG MESH This function extrudes the selected elements along the axis of rotation to form the higher order elements i e 1D elements lt PLOTEL beams gt are extruded to form plates and plate elements are extruded to form solid elements Usage 1 VPG prompts to select elements 2 VPG prompts to define the axis of rotation 6 56 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 3 VPG prompts gt ENTER ROTATION ANGLE ABOUT W AXIS OR 0 TO EXIT 4 VPG prompts gt ENTER NUMBER OF LAYERS ABOUT W AXIS OR 0 TO EXIT 5 Once the number of layers is entered the mesh is created VPG prompts gt ACCEPT MESH YES NO REMESH DRAG MESH TRANSLATIONAL DRAG Description This section cov
354. rror the lines VPG prompts the user to create a local system A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 15 2 Once the desired coordinate system is acquired it will be displayed on the screen and the prompt will read gt ACCEPT Y N A 3 Ifthe user selects YES then VPG prompts gt PICK LINES TO MIRROR gt SELECT LINES BBURT EXCLUDE ON OFF LIHE HULTI PDIHT REGIOH PART LT Hi hy REJECT LAST DME 4 Once desired lines have been selected DONE takes the user to the next step 5 VPG prompts gt ENTER PLANE OF MIRROR XY YZ XZ e The user may now select a local plane of symmetry in which to mirror lines 6 VPG prompts gt INCLUDE MIRRORED LINES IN ORIGINAL PART Y N YES NO e YES will place all selected lines into the ORIGINAL PART e NO will place all selected lines into the current part 6 1 13 OFFSET Description This function allows the user to copy and offset a selected line The new line 6 11 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR is generated in the UV plane according to a user specified distance and direction Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT LINE TO OFFSET 2 Once the desired lines have been selected VPG prompts gt DEFINE PLANE FOR LINE OFFSET gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN e The user enters a coordinate system to define the plane in which the line lies If the line does not lie in the global XY XZ or YZ plane
355. rrow that is at the centroid of the element and that is perpendicular to the surface of the element Fora solid element the arrow points toward the bottom surface of the element 10 34 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 COLOR ELEM ORIEN Note SHADE RESET UTILITY The FILLCOLOR option fills the displayed elements with a designated part color The ELEM option turns elements on off This function displays element orientation Beam element orientation is shown by drawing a vector at the first node of the beam toward the element local Y axis Shell orientation is shown by drawing an arrow from the first node of an element toward the second node of an element oolid element orientation is shown by drawing an arrow from the bottom surface toward the top surface This display is useful for picturing the beam orientation and the normal direction of the shell elements the normal of the shell follows the right hand rule from the first node to the second node The clarity of the element orientation display improves when the SHRINK ELEM ON OFF command is activated This command displays the elements as if they were illuminated by a light source Elements that are not directly exposed to the light source are appropriately shaded to imitate actual shading Returns the DISPLAY PARAMETER OPTIONS WINDOW to its default settings CURRENT PART 10 35 The current part name window not only lists the current part but it also serves as
356. rs in a pop up window MODIFY Allows the user to modify a selected box with new point node or xyz coordinates This command also displays the UL coordinates representing the two corners of the box in global coordinates RENUMBER e Renumber the selected box ID numbers or all boxes SHOW e Displays the nodes and elements of a box in white The box may be selected by cursor pick or by box ID VIEW e Sends the user to the VIEWING OPTIONS MENU EXIT 2 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW BOX ID X OR E TO EXIT 3 After entering new box ID VPG prompts gt DEFINE FIRST CORNER OF THE BOX ABORT KEY IM 4 9 2 H DE POTHT 4 After selecting the first corner VPG prompts DEFINE SECOND CORNER OF THE BOX RHBRT INCREHEHTAL XY EEF IH x Y 7 REJECT VECTOR TAIL eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 9 2 for further description DEFINE COORDINATE SYSTEM Description This function allows the user to define a local coordinate system using nodes points or vectors Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts SELECT LOCAL SYSTEM TYPE NODES Defines a local coordinate system using three nodes SYSTEM e Defines a local coordinate system from a previously defined coordinate system or key entry VECTOR e Uses a vector to define the coordinate system e When using the MODIFY function to modify a coordinate system VPG disp
357. rsion 970 interface eta VPG reads and writes all LS DYNA 970 cards eliminating the need for text editing of the input deck It creates and retains all material nonlinear properties contact definitions and loading conditions Tire Model Generator eta VPG s tire model generator allows for easy construction of tire models The tire model generation tool employs specific tire geometry and inflation pressure to automatically construct a three dimensional finite element model Tire models are used for both vehicle durability and 1 5 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 1 Introduction NVH applications Specialized tire models are available for users requiring detailed models of tires These models are suitable for use in detailed tire focused analyses and require detailed material information Suspension Model Generator eta VPG s sophisticated suspension model generator automates the FEA modeling of the most popular suspension types Suspensions may be modeled using flexible finite element representations or rigid members Material properties of the Suspension component can be specified using the nonlinear stress strain characteristics of the material Included in eta VPG s suspension libraries are these suspension types e MCPHERSON H ARM e TRAILING ARM e MCPHERSON A ARM e HOTCHKISS e SOLIDAXLE e TWIST BEAM e FIVE LINK e HONDA 5 LINK e QUADRA LINK e SHORT LONG ARM Road Surface Library eta VPG S road surfaces form a full vehicle durabilit
358. rties assigned to it VPG returns to step 1 6 172 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 12 8 DELETE LS DYNA Description This function deletes selected element sections from the database Sections are displayed in the section card list Selecting a section places an asterisk by its name When the user exits the menu all asterisked sections will be deleted The following menu options allow the user to select the desired sections SECTION NAME select section by name also displays section Information in dialogue window CURSOR AT ELEMENT select section by element default WINDOW select part by drag window MULTI PT REGION select part by user defined multi point region SELECT ALL UNDO ALL UNDO rejects last 6 12 9 DEFINE PROPERTIES NASTRAN Description This function allows the user to define or modify the selected property Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a property e Select a property by picking an element or property name of a property 2 After the user selects a property VPG displays a definition card for editing the element property and prompts gt SECTION ID X IS SELECTED 3 VPG displays the user defined properties in a table The user may manually modify the properties and or their values in the definition card 6 12 10 DEFINE SECTION LS DYNA Description This function allows the user to define or modify the selected property Usage 1 VPG displays the section card list with all defined prop
359. ry Specifications Line Data Conventions VPG File Menu Recommended Naming Convention LS DYNA Cards Local Coordinate System Entity Selection CHAPTER 3 GETTING STARTED Opening Creating an eta VPG Database File Setting Up a VPG Model CHAPTER 4 MAIN MENU File Section 2 1 Section 2 2 Section 2 3 Section 2 4 Section 2 5 Section 2 6 Section 2 7 Section 2 8 Section 2 9 Section 2 10 Section 2 11 Section 2 12 Section 2 13 Section 2 14 Section 2 15 Section 2 16 Section 2 17 Section 3 1 Section 3 2 Section 4 1 Parts Pre Road Suspension Tire Safety Analysis Fatigue Post Graph Utilities View Help CHAPTER 5 FILE MANAGER New Open Restart Save Save As Import Export Print Print Setup Exit CHAPTER 6 PRE PROCESSOR Line Surface Options Element Options Node Options Model Checker Set Menu LS DYNA Set Menu NASTRAN Boundary Conditions LS DYNA Boundary Conditions NASTRAN Material Property LS DYNA Material Property NASTRAN Element Property Section 4 2 Section 4 3 Section 4 4 Section 4 5 Section 4 6 Section 4 7 Section 4 8 Section 4 9 Section 4 10 Section 4 11 Section 4 12 Section 4 13 Section 4 14 Section 5 1 Section 5 2 Section 5 3 Section 5 4 Section 5 5 Section 5 6 Section 5 7 Section 5 8 Section 5 9 Section 5 10 Section 6 1 Section 6 2 Section 6 3 Section 6 4 Section 6 5 Section 6 6 Section 6 7 Section 6 8 Section 6 9 Section 6 10 Sectio
360. ry functions for completing a DYNA input file The toggle button at the bottom of the window RUN ANALYSIS writes an input file and submits the job for analysis when the user selects OK The WRITE INPUT FILE toggle writes an input file without submitting an analysis SES DYHA CUHFRUL Control Card Database ASC Database inary Gravity Lead LOAL amp BOUNDARY CONDITION Boundary Cards Comstraint Cards Load Cards Initial Uelocity CUHTRCT IHTERFALE Define Contact L RD CURVE BpFine Curve Pyna Inpst File ptiens F Run Analysis Write Input File OK Cancel Figure 8 1 Analysis Submission Menu The DYNA INPUT FILE OPTIONS button displays a window see Figure 8 2 allowing the user to set the analysis unit for the job the input file name the analysis title the engineer s identification the project name and the parts to be included 8 2 CONTROL CARDS LS DYNA Description Control Cards define simulation control parameters for various entities in the model The values of these parameters are initially defined using the LS DYNA default values The user may modify any of these parameters to acceptable values All Control Cards defined in LS DYNA version 970 are accessible through this menu The use of 8 2 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 8 ANALYSIS EXECUTION the Control Card Menu is described in Section 6 14 4 DYNA MISCELLANEOUS MENU 8 3 DATABASE CARDS Description LS DYNA models may prod
361. s Plots dynamic characteristics of the structure vs time velocity etc Provides a series of VPG tool kit functions Manipulates the display position and perspective of the model Function keys 1 through 8 act as shortcuts the most frequently used menus The F1 Function key 1 is reserved for the Main Menu F1 Main Menu F5 Model Checker F2 Element Options F6 Node Options F3 File Open F7 Surface Options F4 Line F8 Pre Processor 2 6 DISPLAY WINDOW VPG breaks the screen into six distinct regions The regions are used to receive input or display messages for the user Figure 2 5 1 The six regions are illustrated on the following page See 1 DRAWING WINDOW Models and definition cards are displayed in this area MENU BAR The groups of menus containing all eta VPG modules 3 ICON BAR This group of commands dynamically manipulates the display position and perspective of a model 4 MENU Commands and the Command s Options are displayed in this area They can be accessed via the keyboard mouse 5 DIALOGUE WINDOW VPG displays comments and messages to the user and accepts keyboard entry commands in the dialogue window 6 DISPLAY PARAMETER OPTIONS WINDOW These commands set the plot options for the current model 2 8 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features 1 LLMALCI ILILILELOOM aee Menu Bar Ta EA lire Babeig Ameignis Fatigar rap AHi View Hel Ico
362. s gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT Tocreate the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three e An element will be created after two nodes points are selected e EXIT or ABORT will exit this function 6 43 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Note PLOTEL elements may be output to a NASTRAN bulk data file They are ignored for other analysis programs CREATE PLATE ELEMENT NASTRAN Description This section covers the options for the PLATE ELEMENT quadrilateral and triangular subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT e To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three e ACQUADA ELEMENT requires 4 nodes or points to be selected e ACTHIA3 requires 3 nodes or points to be selected then an entry of DONE e EXIT or ABORT will exit this function CREATE SOLID ELEMENT NASTRAN Description This section covers the options for the SOLID ELEMENT cube wedge tetrahedron subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage Note A solid element cannot be created in a part that has plate properties The user must either create a new part and assign it solid properties or make a part current that contains solid properties 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR SOLID ELEMENT e Tocreate the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the
363. s EXIT VPG prompts gt X PARTS INCLUDED IN PART SET X e VPG returns to the PART SET menu 6 7 24 CURRENT PART Description This function lists the defined part sets in a pop up window The user can then select the current set from those listed Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM PART SET LIST List of all part sets CURSOR AT ELEMENT EXIT 2 Once the set is selected VPG prompts gt SET X IS SELECTED gt CURRENT PART SET IS X 6 7 25 DELETE PART Description This function allows the user to remove part sets by ID number VPG is specifically configured to recognize part sets for this procedure For deleting part nodes refer to the command DELETE NODE earlier in this section Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM PART SET LIST List of all PART sets CURSOR AT ELEMENT ALL PART SETS EXIT 2 If the user selects ALL PART SETS in step 1 VPG prompts gt OKTO DELETE ALL PART SETS Y N YES 6 124 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR NO e If YES VPG issues the following message gt ALL PART SETS DELETED FROM DATABASE If NO VPG returns the user to the PART SET submenu 3 Ifthe user selects an individual part set in step 1 VPG prompts gt OK TO DELETE PART SET xxxx YES NO If the user selects YES VPG deletes the part set and returns the user to step 1s If the user selects NO VPG retains the part set and returns the user to step 1 4 EXIT returns the user t
364. s along the direction of the second selected line etc For a transition mesh it is possible to enter N3 and N4 parameters for the mesh each side has a different number of elements e g 10 5 8 7 The nodes in the direction of N2 are generated by linear interpretation between the opposing nodes on the two lines A row of N2 quadrilateral elements is generated from the starting end of line 1 to the starting end of line 2 This pattern is repeated N1 times along line 1 The node sequence starts at the beginning of line 1 and follows the direction of line 1 with the right hand rule The created elements are included in the CURRENT PART The CURRENT PART should be verified before proceeding with this function Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT LINES LINE SEGMENT allows the user to combine a broken line while selecting lines for the 4 LINE MESH function as in the COMBINE LINE function in the LINE section The user must select this option before selecting the desired lines for 4 LINE MESH e The user may check the line s prior to executing this function by using SHOW LINE in the LINE section 2 Once the user selects the desired lines the prompt will read gt ENTER NO OF ELEMENTS N1 N2 N3 N4 N1 Any positive integer greater than one for the number of elements 6 68 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR along the selected lines N2 Any positive integer for the number of elements between the 2 lines N3 optional an integer v
365. s changed automatically according with the animation FRAMES SECOND This function allows user to adjust the speed at which the animation is running by altering the number of frames per second The number of frames is dragged to the desired position To reduce the animation speed the user must select a value lower than the current frame rate Once the frame rate is selected eta Post will continue to use that rate until it is reset or the eta Post session is ended A CONTOUR The functions in this menu animate the transient analysis results in real time and are used to 9 47 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING display the results of individual steps The color bar located on screen displays the corresponding contour values The location of the highest contour value on the model is labeled with an asterisk and the lowest is labeled with a zero 0 The options are shown in Figure 7 2 1 Coninur Operation xiCurment Componente SIGMA X Current Layers ino Undafam Elermerit Resul Contour Setting Export Caniour Line List Value Frames Single Frame Reset 1 0 000000 da 2 O 00sd16 J 1 DEIBB 3 4 WOU es 5 0 013683 hal Frami a il H dl L H Frame Hurnber 1 E ED FramesiSeacond M Figure 9 55 Animate Contour control window 9 11 4 SELECT COMPONENT Description There are STRESS STRAIN and DISPLACEMENT They determine the type of contour variable displayed during the plot ani
366. s displayed in white over the deformed shape e SCALE FACTOR This command adjusts the default scale factor of the deformed shape plot The default is 1 It scales plot components to a user defined value allowing the user to magnify or minimize their visual display For example if the plot state is set to deformation the user could magnify the deformation by a factor of ten to see small deformation not readily visible during animation FRAME OPERATIONS Description This function allows user to select desired frame s to plot single frame or animate more than one frame deformation shown as Figure 9 50 There are 6 options shown as Figure 9 51 9 45 Frames Single Frame v R Rese Tm m des ee From 1 0 000000 single Frame 1 0 000000 0 000779 All Frames 2 0 000779 0 002338 ut 4 0 002338 0 003117 my Cet Frames 5 0 003117 Select Frames Range Jo 16 Inr 1 From 1 Ta 1B Inr 1 Figure 9 50 Frames Operations Figure 9 51 Frames Options Figure 9 52 Frame Range FRAMES The FRAMES window allows the user to select individual frame s for the plot or animation The frames selected are highlighted in blue When frames are selected in other options the corresponding frames are highlighted in the FRAME window SINGLE FRAME This function allows user to pick single one frame and eta Post plots the deformation simultaneously ALL FRAMES Once All Frames is picked all frames in the list window are s
367. s for defining the degree of freedom Only the top or the bottom can be selected not both X Y SYMMETRY e Assigns symmetric boundary conditions to the XY plane Y Z SYMMETRY e Assigns symmetric boundary conditions to the YZ plane X Z SYMMETRY Assigns symmetric boundary conditions to the XZ plane X Y ANTI SYMMETRY Assigns asymmetric boundary conditions to the XY plane Y Z ANTI SYMMETRY Assigns asymmetric boundary conditions to the YZ plane X Z ANTI SYMMETRY Assigns asymmetric boundary conditions to the XZ plane X TRANSLATION X translation will be constrained Y TRANSLATION Y translation will be constrained Z TRANSLATION Z translation will be constrained X ROTATION e X rotation will be constrained Y ROTATION e Y rotation will be constrained Z ROTATION e Z rotation will be constrained 2 Once the DOF is determined in the dialogue box VPG prompts gt D O F xxxx IS FIXED gt ENTER ENFORCED DISPLACEMENT DEFAULT IS 0 0 3 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES e Nodes may be selected one at a time with the left mouse button e DONE will exit the user to the ENTER SPC SET NUMBER prompt step 1 e ABORT will exit the user to the SPC OPTIONS menu without constraining any of the selected grids SPC DELETE Description This function deletes the selected SPC set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK SPC TO DELETE e All available SPC sets are displayed for selection in the BOUNDARY SPC SET box
368. s function allows the user to create an arc through 3 points nodes that are not collinear The created arc will be included in the current part Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NEXT POINT OR NODE e This command will be prompted 3 times e When 3 points or nodes are selected an arc will automatically be drawn 2 EXIT will terminate this function 6 5 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR The asterisks represent the points through which the arc is drawn 6 1 5 COPY Description This function allows the user to generate a set of duplicate lines The user may then simultaneously translate and or rotate the copied lines Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK LINE TO COPY gt SELECT LINES e Select DONE once the desired lines have been selected 2 VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN VPG is asking for a desired coordinate system local or global VPG prompts the user to create a local system A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 15 e Once the desired coordinate system is acquired it will be displayed on the screen 3 VPG prompts gt ACCEPT Y N A 6 6 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR YES NO e f YES then go to step 4 f NO then go to step 2 ABORT e if ABORT is selected then the function is terminated 4 VPG prompts gt ENTER NUMBER OF COPIES positive integer 5 VPG prompts
369. s function generates a new set of unreferenced nodes at a user specified location from either referenced or unreferenced nodes 6 78 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES e Once the nodes have been selected DONE concludes this step 2 VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN e VPG prompts the user to create a local coordinate system A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 15 3 Once the desired coordinate system is acquired it will be displayed on the screen and the prompt will read gt ACCEPT Y N A e f YES the user goes to step 4 If NO the user returns to step 2 If ABORT the user exits the function COPY and returns to the NODE OPTIONS menu 4 Ifthe user selects YES VPG prompts for the number of copies and the type of transformation gt ENTER NUMBER OF COPIES positive integer gt MOVE OR ROTATE M R HOWE ROTATE HOH T MOVE gt ENTER U V W INCREMENTS e e g 0 0 1000 This entry will copy the selected node s 1000 units along the W axis ROTATE gt ENTER ANGLE INCREMENT e Enter the angle increment right hand rule for local W or global Z ABORT 6 4 7 CREATE NODE Description This function generates UNREFERENCED NODES on points or by entering the coordinates Usage 1 VPG prompts 6 79 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt SELECT ME
370. s of eta VPG Detailed descriptions of the use of these features are provided in subsequent chapters 2 1 GENERAL The eta VPG Processor has a complete graphical user interface that is operated on Windows Windows NT and above and UNIX Linux based workstations including IBM HP SUN and SGI operating systems The model generation input file preparation and results processing activities are all performed in an identical environment The solution can be executed on both local and or remote server systems 2 2 PRE PROCESSOR eta VPG s extensive Preprocessing capabilities contain all of the functions necessary for expedient high quality finite element modeling Users can read in data with VPG s CAD interface build their model from scratch read in an existing model or a combination of the approaches CAD Interface eta VPG enables users to read in CAD geometry data from the following CAD systems Catia Version 4 Catia Version 5 Unigraphics version 18 Unigraphics NX Parasolid STEP IGES The IGES interface reads files generated from any CAD system Supported IGES entity types include 2 1 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features Name Te Nuen ooo 00 O 104 106 108 110 Parametric Soline Surface Entitv 114 116 149 141 143 Associativitv Instance Entitv Propertv Entitv Singular Subfigure Instance Entity For the German automotive industry VDA file format is supported Supported VDA entity types inc
371. s the FTSS if properly licensed and generic dummy models as part of the VPG Safety licensing agreement A set of barrier models is included These are also generic models developed by ETA and tuned to test results The Crash Tool Library is in ASCII format so that the LS DYNA input file of each model is stored and can be modified and updated in the library per user criteria The user can also display models in the library to see a general description of the models and examine their characteristics using the VPG Safety module The crash tool models material properties contact definitions node sets segment sets section sets and other default definitions are automatically loaded as part of the input file and monitored throughout the crash safety simulation procedure Pictures and a brief description of the crash tool models included in the VPG Safety modules are documented in the following sections and are also included in the Step by Step simulation procedure when applicable The details development process and validation data are available upon request 7 33 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 4 3 VPG Safety Menu The following functions are included in the VPG SAFETY menu A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 7 4 4 Crashworthiness Menu 7 34 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 4 5 FMVSS REGULATIONS 7 4 5 1 FMVSS214b SIDE DOOR INTRUSION Description This function all
372. scales the Y axis value of selected curves through multiplying a given Y scale factor d INTEGRATIE This function allows the user to superimpose the integral of the curve on the graph which the Y axis value is equal to the area under the selected curve from start point to the current X point EJ DIFFERENTIAL This function allows the user to superimpose the derivation of the curve on the graph which the Y axis value is equal to the slope of the curve s tangent on corresponding X point x SQUARE This function allows the user to superimpose the square of the curve on the graph which the Y axis value is equal to the original Y axis value multiplying by itself Fal ROOT The function allows the user to superimpose the root of the curve on the graph which the Y axis value is equal to the root of the absolute value of the original Y axis value Uy RECIPROCAL This function allows the user to superimpose the reciprocal value of the curve on the graph which the Y axis value is equal to the reciprocal value of the original Y axis value Log LOGARITHM This function allows the user to superimpose the logarithm of the curve on the graph which the Y axis value is equal to the logarithm value of the original Y axis value 9 70 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING NAPIERIAN LOGARITHM This function allows the user to superimpose the Napierian logarithm of the curve on the graph which the Y axis value is equal to the Napierian logar
373. ser accepts the coordinate system VPG prompts gt DISTANCE FROM PLANE W e Users may now input a distance along the W axis from origin of the selected coordinate system e Any real value is a valid response The section line will be created at the distance W in the UV plane A section line is defined at a specific distance from the user defined local coordinate system 6 15 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 4 VPG prompts gt SELECT LINES e ABORT exits the function without creating a section line DONE will complete the section line and return the user to step 4 EXIT completes the section line and exits this function 6 1 19 SHOW Description The user may identify any existing line or line direction using this function The selected line is highlighted the starting point is labeled with a circle and subsequent points are represented with arrowheads oriented in the direction of the line The arrows indicate point locations on the line and line direction 6 1 20 SPLIT LINE Description The user may split a line at a desired cursor location at the nearest point or at an intersection with another line Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK LINE TO SPLIT 6 16 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 2 VPG prompts gt PICK SPLIT LOCATION ABORT CURSOR LOCATION anywhere the user clicks the mouse LINE The line will split at the location closest to the intersection of the selected line POINT The line will sp
374. ser to define a graphic region by using a drawing window Only the graphics within the region will be written to the graphics file If the option is off default the complete graphics region will be saved to the output file Note The user will be prompted to define the region drag window after PRINT is selected 5 9 15 NO OF COPIES This function allows the user to print multiple copies 5 9 16 SETUP SAVE LOAD Default page settings may be used saved and selected by the user All parameters are defined in the HARDCOPYDEFAULT file in the VPG installation directory 5 9 16 1 LOAD SYSTEM DEFAULT This function will load the system defaults that are saved in a VPG Hardcopy Default file located in the VPG executable directory 5 9 16 2 LOAD USER DEFAULT This function will load the user defined defaults that have been saved in a HardcopyDefault file located in the user s home directory 5 9 16 3 SAVE AS DEFAULT This function saves user modified hardcopy options to a HardcopyDefault file located in the user s Home directory 5 10 EXIT This function allows the user to exit the program VPG will prompt to save current database 5 20 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Chapter CHAPTER 6 PRE PROCESSOR The Pre Processor menu contains a series of submenus with the ability to create and edit lines surfaces elements material properties and element properties LINE SURFACE ELEMENT HORE MODEL CHECKER SET HEHU
375. splays the defined sets in the MENU WINDOW When a set is selected the parts of that set are displayed in the CONTENTS OF SET window 6 7 31 SHOW SET PARTS Description This function allows the user to display all or some of the defined part sets VPG displays the appropriate ID numbers on the screen next to each defined part Usage 1 VPG prompts 6 126 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt SELECT SET FROM PART SET LIST List of all part sets CURSOR AT ELEMENT EXIT e VPG displays the selected part sets and returns the user to the PART SET submenu Note Because more than one ID number may be assigned to each part viewing all of the ID numbers at once may be confusing The user may clarify the screen by displaying one specific part set at a time 6 7 32 SET ON OFF PART Description This function allows the user to turn on and off parts included in a selected part set It allows for convenient organization of parts in a complicated model and manipulation of large numbers of parts in a sub assembly level 6 127 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 8 BOUNDARY CONDITIONS LS DYNA The functions of the BOUNDARY CONDITIONS MENU create and verify constraints and loads on finite element models The functions in the BOUNDARY CONDITIONS MENU are organized as follows BOUNDARY CONDITIONS BOUNDARY CARDS CONSTRAINT CARDS INIT COND CARDS LOAD CARDS ERIT A detailed description of each function is given in th
376. sualization purposes These temporary surfaces are deleted upon exiting this function The user may change the suspension component colors by selecting CHANGE PART COLOR from the menu The user then selects the part to modify from a screen selection or from the part listing The new color is then selected from the color bar displayed in the Display Window This function is terminated by selecting the EXIT command Usage 1 VPG prompts 7 21 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES SUSPENSION CHLOR REPLACE COLOR CHAHCE PART COLOR EXIT 7 2 10 LOADING ANALYSIS Description This option allows the user to write out an LS DYNA file to analyze suspension motion This analysis will execute automatically if the VPG Solver is installed on the local computer In Phase or Out of Phase Motions may be selected The user then inputs the amplitude and frequency of the inputs A sinusoidal input using these parameters will be created and applied to the wheel center locations as a displacement load curve Users may also specify a testing based data file for time based motions This is accessed by selecting the RSP option Usage 1 VPG prompts SELECTIOM DPTIUH TH PHASE H TIOH OWT PHASE MOTIOH ASP FILE EXIT e Choose an analysis motion method 2 VPG prompts ENTER MOTION PERIOD AND AMPLITUDE OR E TO EXIT e For example type 1 30 enter 7 22 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 3 The DYNAINPUT FILE OPTIONS butt
377. ta and has selected OK VPG prompts gt ACCEPT DAMPING COEFFICIENT DATA Y N e YES forwards the user to the next suspension table step 7 e NO returns the user to the SPRING INITIAL OFFSET table r ITEWE 4 DATA e B aa DIPEC TION a TEA name CAMPI VALUE ee ee StH T DARTH vw UE I a i ihe re DEI am E BUHI GPS LE ee sam umm imm BUSH d LANDS 24 UE oss ws mea ox Sin DAMPE SALE w 57 zmeama ird mut n DAMPRES VALUP oe m aume EIER T Carat vig LE awm a pa sim DEEE mem ww em mem DAMPER LOAD CURVE iz _ mion ceni 7 VPG displays a pop up window with bush axial data VPG prompts MODIFY EXTRA NODE COORDINATES SELECT AN ITEM TO EDIT e When the user has finished altering the data and has selected OK VPG prompts ACCEPT EXTRA NODE COORDINATES Y N e NO returns the user to the bush axial data table e f YES is entered VPG prompts 7 13 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES SLY 22a OPS gt USE DEFAULT MASS CG amp INERTIA MOMENT Y N e YES completes the suspension 8 If NO is entered VPG prompts the user to select the parts to modify gt PICK PARTS TO MODIFY i Pd i 5 alLi wj S H 1 UPARH i LIAR E TIERDD amp BRHEL amp HANEUA amp UP TRU F LETRI E AACK STAHL 124 TTE gm IFARA TI 1 LLEHDD d Once the parts are s
378. te the currently defined crash models Any tool available in the Crash Tool Library may be deleted In the case where a dummy model and barrier model have been created using the same process the DELETE function will delete both the dummy model and the barrier Usage 1 VPG prompts gt DELETE 2 Once the crash model is selected it is highlighted VPG prompts gt DO YOU WANT TO DELETE CRASH MODEL Y N e f YES is selected the model will be deleted 7 71 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 8 ANALYSIS EXECUTION Chapter CHAPTER 8 ANALYSIS EXECUTION VPG allows the user to submit an analysis for execution directly from the VPG interface using the functions found in the ANALYSIS menu The ANALYSIS Menu also contains functions which create the necessary Control Cards and Analysis Parameters to specify a complete analysis model file The ANALYSIS Menu allows users to define what type of analysis results will be generated from the analysis through the definition of DATABASE cards VPG provides a command to write and execute the analysis model from the ANALYSIS menu or alternately the option to export a file for later execution 8 1 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 8 ANALYSIS EXECUTION 8 1 ANALYSIS The ANALYSIS menu allows the user to interactively run the VPG solver LS DYNA from the Graphical User Interface window The option buttons in the ANALYSIS SUBMISSION window CONTROL CARD BOUNDARY CARDS CONSTRAINT CARDS etc provide access to the necessa
379. ter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 17 ASSEMBLY LS DYNA The functions of the ASSEMBLY AUTO menu are designed to add and modify connections in the database It also includes functions for replacing parts and part sets The functions in this menu are organized as follows ASSEMBLY AUTO BREAD FREH FILE WRITE TG FILE CREATE COMMECTION HODIFY CONNECTION DELETE CUNHEETIUM REPLACE PART REPLACE PART SET DELETEREP FART BELETEREP PART SET ERIT A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 6 17 1 READ FROM FILE Description This option allows the user to add connections to the database from a file that stores the connection information Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE FILE NAME gt ENTER DATABASE FILE NAME The files with the suffix xml will be listed in the window The user would select the name of a previously saved file or cancel to exit 2 If the file does not exist the prompt reads gt CANNOT OPEN THE INPUT FILE 3 VPG reads in the file and returns the user to the ASSEMBLY AUTO menu 6 17 2 WRITE TO FILE Description The function allows the user to output connection information to a file The output format is a simple xml file which contains the mass location and properties This file may be generated outside VPG and imported to create the necessary masses within VPG 6 205 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR The functions in this menu are or
380. ters for master and slave may be turned OFF by setting the control button SEGMENT SYMBOL in the SETUP dialog box A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections Note Contact interface definition is implemented for a LS DYNA RADIOSS or PAM CRASH analysis only 6 13 1 COPY Description This function allows the user to copy previously defined interfaces Usage 1 VPG displays the CONTACT CARD LIST which lists the defined interfaces and prompts gt SELECT CARD TO COPY 2 Upon selecting an interface card from the menu VPG prompts gt CONTACT ID XX DUPLICATED FROM CONTACT ID X 6 176 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 13 2 CREATE Description This function allows the user to define new interfaces Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CONTACT OPTION ad o v uU TT aa TY ae a e VPG supports all contact types in LS DYNA If general 3D contact type is selected the program will display all six cards required to define contact The following notes apply to card 2 e Unnecessary data fields are in gray and unselectable e Default Slave and Master segment type is Segment Set 0 The user needs to define the segment type before defining the Slave and Master Set ID 6 177 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e If the Segment Type is modified the corresponding Segment Set ID needs to be redefined 6 13 3 DELETE Description This function deletes previously defined inte
381. the SETUP MENU will display the element normals 6 5 9 CHECK RIGID LINK Description This function checks the connectivity and length of all rigid elements RBE2 and RBAR Rigid bodies that exceed the length criteria of the user or that are loose zero length double dependent cyclic or redundant are highlighted Usage 1 VPG prompts gt FIND RIGID LINKS LONGER THAN CERTAIN LENGTH Y N YES gt ENTER LENGTH CRITERIA e Any real number greater than zero NO 2 The user has the option to place failed elements into new parts If the user opts 6 95 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR to place the failed elements into a new part VPG will generate the following part names r xlong e Checks for RBE2s that fail length check r duplic Checks for degenerate RBE2s r cyclic Checks for two RBE2s sharing the same two nodes in an independent dependent node loop r double Checks for RBE2s with double dependent nodes r loose Checks for loose connections The user returns to the MODEL CHECKER menu 6 5 10 CHECK ELEM SIZE Description This function checks the minimum length of the edges of plate solid or beam elements VPG highlights any elements with dimensions that are shorter than the user defined length criteria Usage 1 VPG prompts ENTER MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM LENGTH CRITERIA e A valid response is any real number greater than zero e Ifthe length of the of the edges of the elements is greater than the user
382. the center of the graphics display window L FREE ROTATION This function is a combination of Screen X and Screen Y rotation Moving the mouse up down manipulates Screen X rotation Moving the mouse left right manipulates Screen Y rotation Moving 9 11 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING the mouse diagonally combines the rotations of both directions Click the left mouse button to stop the rotation The user may activate this function by pressing Control and left mouse button while moving the mouse Release the mouse bution to stop the rotation v PAN This command enables the user to translate the model on the screen by following the movement of the cursor If the cursor is moved off the graphics display window the cursor reappears at the opposite edge of the window to continue the operation Click the left mouse button to stop the pan operation The user may activate this function by pressing Control and Middle mouse button while moving the mouse Release the mouse button to exit the function A CURSOR ZOOM The user picks a point about which to zoom The model is centered about this point and the user may move the cursor up to zoom in or down to zoom out The user may activate this function by pressing Control and right mouse button while moving the mouse Release the mouse button to exit the function Note If the cursor is moved off the graphics display window in functions ROTATE PAN or CURSOR ROOM the cursor re appears at
383. they will be shaded in the material color Note The GRAY COLOR option is only available when the SHADE option is on 9 4 2 4 FILL COLOR toggle Description This function toggles on off the model in FILL COLOR mode FILL COLOR fills the displayed elements with their designated part color 9 4 2 5 ELEMENT EDGE toggle Description This function can only be used in FILL COLOR mode The outline of the elements 9 15 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING is plotted in white when the options is toggled on The model can be displayed without the outline by toggling off the option Note The ELEMENT EDGE is only available when the FILL COLOR or SHADE option is on 9 4 2 6 SHRINK toggle Description SHRINK creates a plot with elements reduced in size by 20 percent This option allows the user to toggle the function on off 9 4 2 7 HIDDEN SURFACE Description This function toggles on off the model in HIDDEN SURFACE mode HIDDEN SURFACE hides the elements behind the elements viewed from the user s point of view 9 4 2 8 PLATE NORMAL toggle Description This function toggles plate normal on and off The plate normal is shown with a vector drawn at the center of element and along the element s normal direction 9 4 2 9 BACKGROUND toggle Description If this function is toggled on the background color is set to white Otherwise default background color is black 9 4 3 PRIORITY OF FUNCTIONS Description The functions
384. three CTETRA Pick 4 nodes points and type DONE CPENTA Pick 6 nodes points pick the second set of 3 nodes points in the same order as the first set of 3 nodes points and type DONE CHEXA Pick 8 nodes points pick the second set of 4 nodes points in the same order as the first set of 4 nodes points The element will be created e EXIT or ABORT terminates this function 6 44 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR CREATE SPRING ELEMENT CELAS2 NASTRAN Description This section covers the options for the SPRING ELEMENT NASTRAN CELAS2 sub section of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER SPRING DIRECTION 1 to 6 AT EACH END Twoentries are required one for each end of the spring e g 1 1 for the x direction e Any number of spring elements may be created for the same connectivity depending upon the number of directions required 1 translational along the global X axis 2 translational along the global Y axis 3 translational along the global Z axis 4 rotational along the global X axis 5 rotational along the global Y axis 6 rotational along the global Z axis 2 Once the desired direction has been entered for the spring VPG prompts gt ENTER SPRING RATE e Any positive real number may be entered for the spring rate 3 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT Tocreate the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three e Select 2 nodes
385. tion This function allows the user to select a new part to replace an old part and move the connections from the old part to the new part Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART oelect a part to be replaced by choosing its name or an element of it 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT THIS PART AS TARGET Y N YES The selected part will be replaced 3 VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART Select a new part by choosing its name or an element of it to replace the part that has been selected 6 207 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR VPG prompts gt Select the replace connection type gt SELECT OPTION Select a kind of connection type or all types to be replaced VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE TOLERANCE VALUE mm Key in a tolerance value between the old part and the new part VPG prompts gt REPLACE TARGET PART BY THIS PICKED PART Y N YES The selected connection type was moved from the first selected part to the second selected part NO will exit this function 6 17 7 REPLACE PART SET Description This function allows the user to select a part set to replace an old part set and move the connections from the old part set to the new part set Usage VPG prompts gt REPLACE PART SET gt SELECTED THE PART SET AS TARGET gt SELECT SET FROM PART SET LIST Select a part set to be replaced from the part set list VPG prompts gt SELECT THIS PART SET A
386. ts transparent when the SHADE option is turned on Please see the Figure 4 7 3 WIREFRAME This option allows the user to display the selected parts in wire frame when the SHADE option is turned on Click on the WIREFRAME button and select the parts from the part list window or click the parts from the screen The program will mark the part name with an asterisk and highlight the part on the screen The program will not shade the selected parts when the SHADE option is turned on Please see the Figure Part attributes Option Far Material Copper Selected By Figure 4 7 2 Part Attribute Control Window Part Material Part attributes Figure 4 7 3 Part Attributes control window Transparency Part attributes Option wireframe od Selected By Figure 4 7 4 Part Attributes control window Wire Frame Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 4 7 4 e NO CONTOUR Part attributes The user may choose not to show contour j result in select parts Click on the NO Option No Contour CONTOUR option and select the parts from Sea Es the part list window or click the part from the screen The program will mark the part name with an asterisk and highlight the parts on the screen Clicks APPLY and the program will not display contour of the selected part during CONTOUR ANIMATION Instead the selects parts will be plotted in gray color Please see the Figure 4 7 5 Figure 4 7 5 Part Attr
387. uce various results data used for the study of the simulation and to assess the quality of the analysis VPG allows users to define both the ASCII and BINARY databases that may be output from LS DYNA This is described in Section 6 14 6 DYNA MISCELLANEOUS MENU of this manual 8 4 GRAVITY LOAD Description By selecting the GRAVITY LOAD option VPG will automatically create a GRAVITY card with the appropriate acceleration of gravity for the unit system selected for the model 8 5 BOUNDARY CARDS Description Boundary Cards allow the user to define boundary conditions on the model Selecting BOUNDARY CARDS on the ANALYSIS menu directs the user to the BOUNDARY CARDS menu in the pre processing BOUNDARY CONDITIONS menu See Section 6 8 of this manual 8 6 CONSTRAINT CARDS Description Constraint Cards allow the user to define constraint conditions on the model Selecting CONSTRAINT CARDS on the ANALYSIS menu directs the user to the CONSTRAINT CARDS menu in the pre processing BOUNDARY CONDITIONS menu See Section 6 8 of this manual 8 7 LOAD CARDS Description Load Cards allow the user to define loading conditions on the model Selecting LOAD CARDS on the ANALYSIS menu directs the user to the LOAD CARDS menu in the pre processing BOUNDARY CONDITIONS menu See Section 6 8 of this manual 8 8 INITIAL VELOCITY Description Selecting INITIAL VELOCITY allows the user to define initial conditions on the model Selecting INITIAL VELOCITY on the
388. ulated quality HODEL CHECKER AUT HORHAL AUTO ORIENT SOLID ASPECT RATIO BOUKDARY DISPLAY CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK EHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK AHELE FUERL BP JACOB TAH HORE RIGID LIHK ELEM SIZE SKEW TAPER Untg HE SKEW HARF ARE FEATURE LIME DISPLAY SECTION CUT CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK FREE SRF ACE SPR EHE JU TT Hass THERTIA PERE T RAT EUH UHCOHHECTED AERIAL Al TAME AT SUMMARY CHECK WIEW EXIT A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 6 5 1 AUTO NORMAL Description This function sets the direction of the displayed plate element normals to a selected reference plate element The element normal is calculated by using a right hand rule as applied to the element numbering node 1 node 2 node 3 etc to establish the direction of the normal 6 89 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT PART FOR AUTO NORMAL ALE ACTIVE PARTS CURSOR PICK PART 2 User will be prompted to select a part or an element for a reference normal The selected elements will display their current normal direction VPG prompts gt IS NORMAL DIRECTION ACCEPTABLE Y N YES e All selected element normals will be made consistent with a referenced element normal If normals are reversed for some elements VPG displays gt NORMAL REVERSED FOR XXXX ELEMENTS NO e All
389. ur line when the CONTOUR LEVEL is not CONTINUE into VPG Line Data format file eta Post prompts the user to enter the file name After determining the file name and clicking SAVE button the contour lines will be saved in the given file 9 11 10 LIST VALUE Description This function lists the contour value of selected nodes or selected element if ELEMENT RESULT is toggled on For example list node value as below step 1 Activate the LIST VALUE function in the CONTOUR CONTROL WINDOW 2 The Control Option window is displayed with Select Node Option shown as Figure 7 2 8 9 51 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Control Option Select by Cursor Select by rindo Select by Polygon Select by Freehand Select hy Displayed Reject Last Selected Figure 9 61 Select Node Control Option 3 Select the desired node to be listed The default setting is by mouse pick The user can also select nodes by dragging window polygon or free hand region 4 Once the node is selected the highest three nodes are listed at the down left corner of the GRAPHICS DISPLAY WINDOW shown as Figure 7 2 9 LS DP AFL biii ingul 2 Terr Te 516490705 STEP 20 TE ameni 2 05 ine 1 r ae 1c TS aye Tdi CDOMPUMENT Y sirass ING 1p S Li Im nl TIRAR AE fate 131224111 fs EH 7573 IN Ae a P Sipps ERR ATE E LJ 182240490 145 fo 5 san waai H CEU ra LA 5 E a s HP cameo ini be dS wand pu 20 7567216 H5 n
390. urther description LOAD CARDS NODE Description This card defines a concentrated nodal force to a node or a set of nodes Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 18 15 for further description LOAD CARDS RIGID BODY Description This card applies a concentrated nodal force to a rigid body The force is applied at the center of mass or a moment is applied around a global axis Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 18 18 for further description 6 141 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR LOAD CARDS SEGMENT PRESSURE Description This card defines a distributed pressure load over one triangular or quadrilateral segment defined by four nodes Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 18 20 for further description LOAD CARDS PLATE PRESSURE Description This card defines a distributed pressure load over one shell element or shell element set Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 18 24 for further description LOAD CARDS SUPERPLASTIC FORM Description This card is used to perform superplastic forming analyses This option can be applied to both solid and shell elements Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 18 30 for further description LOAD CARDS SUB SEA Description This card defines the effects of the primary explosion and the subsequent bubble oscillations Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual Section 18 26 for further description LOAD CARDS THERMAL Description This card defines n
391. use button and exits by releasing Middle mouse button A CURSOR ZOOM The user picks a point about which to zoom The model is centered about this point and the user may move the cursor up or down to zoom in or out This function can also be activated by pressing Control and Right mouse button and exits by releasing Right mouse button Note If the cursor is moved off the screen in functions ROTATE PAN or CURSOR ROOM the cursor re appears the opposite of the screen automatically WINDOW ZOOM The user defines the corners of the zoom window by positioning the cursor on the display screen The user presses the left mouse button and drags the cursor diagonally down until the desired window size is reached After releasing the left button the section included in the window is displayed in full screen f FREE HAND ZOOM The user defines a free region by pressing the left mouse button and dragging the cursor on the display screen Release the left button and the section included the region is displayed in full Screen E CD FILL Rescales the model to include all entities belonging to parts that are currently turned on FILL automatically zooms in or out until the model fits the viewing area of the screen p G TOP VIEW Automatically displays the model from the TOP or in the XY plane ML SIDE VIEW Automatically displays the model from the SIDE or in the XZ plane REAR VIEW Automatically displays the model from the RE
392. user can rotate the 7 46 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES dummy or leg to adjust their position The default rotation angle increment is 1 degree You can select CHANGE ANGLE to change it 7 Select EXIT to finish Dummy Position Figure 9 An Example of a Generated ECE95 Dynamic Side Impact Model 7 4 7 OTHER STANDARDS 7 4 7 1 FRONT RIGID POLE Description This function will create a rigid pole at the front of the vehicle Usage 1 VPG prompts ENTER RIGID POLE CRASH INFORMATION 2 HEGID POLE DATA aL xj tees F DATA RAMS TRUCTURE CLEARANCE mmi p22 Sanne am WEHICLE VELOCITY jams 2 73194AE H3 Z OF VEHCLE GROUND mm z smmmper nur z cancel Hu 2 VPG prompts PICK A CRASH TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE FRONT POLE 7 47 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES eS CUNTUR AT ELEMENT WEY IH K Y Z M FF PART HEEP PANT wog LAST Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as target position 3 VPG prompts gt DEFINE CONTACT NORMAIL DIRECTION AGAINST POLE VEMPLARTE DIHECTIGM 4 VPG prompts ALL NODES ARE SLAVE TO RIGID WALL INFINITE SIZE PLANE IS DEFINED Figure 10 An Example of a Generated Front Rigid Pole Impact Model 7 4 7 2 SIDE POLE IMPACT Description This function will create a rigid pole at the side of the vehicle Usage 1 VPG prompts ENTER SIDE POLE CRASH INFOR
393. user selects a target part as follows A Placing the cursor on a displayed part line and typing the letter L B Placing the cursor on a displayed element and pressing the left mouse button MULTI POINT REGION REJECT LAST WINDOW SELECT 6 Selecting DONE copies the selected lines along the XY plane in true view 10 1 13 HIDDEN SURFACE REMOVAL toggle Description This function improves the integrity of the 3D simulation of a model The user may toggle the hidden lines on and off while using the SHADING and FILL HIDE PLOT commands This effect creates opaque elements that prevent objects in the background from showing through objects in the foreground Usage 1 VPG prompts gt HIDDEN SURFACE REMOVAL ON or gt HIDDEN SURFACE REMOVAL OFF note When checking for penetration make sure the flag HIDDEN SURFACE REMOVAL ON appears along the bottom of the display area 10 1 14 TRANSPARENCY MODE ON OFF toggle 10 6 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY Description This function toggles the transparency mode on or off during shading Transparency factors are defined in the SETUP menu Usage 1 VPG prompts gt TRANSPARENCY MODE ON or gt TRANSPARENCY MODE OFF 10 1 15 MOVE LIGHT SOURCE Description VPG uses two types of light sources ambient light and directional light Ambient light comes from all directions and illuminates objects regardless of their position or orientation with the same intensity Directional light comes
394. user to change the color of a part Usage 1 VPG prompts SELECT PART TO CHANGE COLOR gt PICK ALINE L AN ELEM C OR PART NAME P OF A PART 2 Once the user selects the target part VPG prompts PART xxxx part name IS SELECTED SELECT COLOR FROM COLOR BAR OR EXIT The user selects the desired color from the color bar 10 14 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 3 7 CREATE Description This function creates a new part inthe VPG database The user must name the new part with any combination of up to eight alohanumeric characters Usage 1 VPG displays the PART DEFINITION window as below See figure 10 3 2 PACT OOF STDs ET E slm FART DEF IETION CARO 1 ITENGE DATA CARD DESC RTO INE FI PART Eri SECID PART SECTIG NOD MID ALTER Di L EC EGN GF ETATE wh L HOIID DHOLIIDLAESS T L ORAM IDRAVITY LOAD FETIALLZATION FLAN L AOPOPT ADAE TIVITY FLAG TAD THERMAL MATERIAL Ej im tanci Figure 10 3 2 Part Definition Window 2 The user edits the window to create the part If SECID MID EOSID HGID or TMID is selected the user is prompted to edit another window for these properties before retuning to the PART DEFINITION window OK completes the part and returns the user to the PART CONTROL menu Note The new part is displayed as current Note The materials and properties of a new part do not have to be defined at the time the part is created The user may enter OK to bypass step 2 and
395. utorials specifically designed to introduce modeling and application topics to the user The Tutorials provide examples to demonstrate the different techniques used in creating a VPG simulation and how to use various modeling functions The Tutorials also serve as a training guide for new users to gain experience with VPG techniques methodology and software In addition to the eta VPG Manuals and Tutorials the solver related features pertaining to eta VPG s dynamic simulations can be found in the LS DYNA User s Manual The LS DYNA Users Manual is the documentation for the LS DYNA software developed by Livermore Software Technology Corporation www lstc com 1 1 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 2 The History of eta VPG The eta VPG software has its origins in the automotive CAE community where the need for efficient finite element modeling tools emerged in the mid to late 1980 s These tools were needed to address the drive for shortened vehicle development schedules and the desire to implement CAE simulations in the design process ETA had been an early innovator in the area of finite element pre amp post processing developing and commercializing the eta FEMB software in the mid 80 s This software met the needs of the automotive CAE engineers and was quickly adopted to help the transformation of the automotive CAE community As the need for more complex simulations arose there was a simultaneous increase in low cost high spee
396. wa o mnnn Eas F Psi Walde D 24060 EE N NEN WL TRH Pe Gee PF Tee LTREAD GRDE E ON F OF BOLID MATEFIAL TIPE 7 BHELL aimee rij 2 When the user has exited the tire parameter window VPG displays the tire cross section along with mass and pressure values and prompts gt PROCESSING ELEMENT AND NODAL DATA gt DO YOU ACCEPT THIS TIRE PROFILE Y N ABORT e YES returns the user to the tire parameter window 7 28 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES iN LE REL EET Baku 1h Ph 4 Dis 34 8 Lk Tie Per d oa Dam isi a a uT ETa 3 If the user accepts the tire profile VPG prompts DEFINE WHEEL CENTER LOCATION FOR TIRES COMTROL KEYS ABORT KEY IH XVZ MAPP IAG WIDE POINT SFIHBLE 4 Once the tire location is defined VPG displays the tire material density and tire model THE MATERIAL XXXXXXX DENSITY IS XXXXXXXX 7 29 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES Note For tire tuning procedures see the eta VPG applications manual sections 1 6 and 2 4 7 30 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 4 Introduction to VPG Safety The automotive industry is legally required to design vehicles to meet the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS or ECE EEC Homogenous Regulations and or Corporate Industry Standards Various experimental and simulation approaches have been adopied to achieve these requiremenis The most commonly performed vehicle crashw
397. will be positioned in the desired locations Proper contacts and velocities will also be defined in the model a a Figure 8 An Example of a Generated ECE33 34 Rear Impact Model 7 4 6 3 ECE 95 EURO SIDE IMPACT Description This function will generate a Moving Deformable Barrier and a rigid road surface to simulate an ECE95 Side Impact Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER ECE95 SIDE IMPACT INFORMATION 7 45 eta VPG 3 0 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES ECE SIDE IMPACT DATA ITEME DATA VEHICLE ARREP Y CLEARANCE m fa paani dd RARER VELOCITY mma 1 5EEEHUE HUR KOF VEHLLE WHEELBASE CENTER Bull dir OF vVEHCLE GROLIN mm Cancel 2 VPG prompts for the crash target for MDB PICK A NODE TO CALCULATE BARRIER VEHICLE CLEARANCE COHTROL HEVS 5 500 abe T CURSOR AT ELEHEHT KEY IN X V Z BH OFF PART KEEP PART UNDG LAST 3 Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as target position The MDB and a rigid road surface will be positioned in the desired locations Proper contacts and velocities will also be defined in the model 4 VPG prompts for the location of the driver dummy gt PICK TEST POINT H POINT FOR ECE95 DUMMY 5 Select KEY IN X Y Z and type in 1408 370 277 The EUROPEAN SIDE IMPACT DUMMY is imported from the library and put on the specified location 6 A ROTATION menu appears in the VPG Menu Window The
398. with any element definition and geometric entities All nodes will remain as UNREFERENCED NODES PARTS NODES will delete the UNREFERENCED NODES in addition to element and geometry data ABORT will return the user to the PART MENU 2 Once the user selects the option VPG prompts gt XXXX LINES XXXX SURFACES AND XXXX ELEMENTS IN PART YYYY O K TO DELETE PART YYYY YES NO YES deletes the selected part and its lines surfaces and elements NO deselects the part 10 3 10 KEEP PART Description This function retains the ON status of the selected part s and turns OFF the deselected parts The program automatically re scales the selected part s to fill the screen Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT PART TO KEEP gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART The user selects a target part VPG highlights the selected line s or element s 2 Once the user selects the desired part s VPG prompts gt PART xxxx part name IS SELECTED 3 EXIT terminates this function after replotting and rescaling the selected parts 10 3 11 LIST Description This function lists the part names with the corresponding PID numbers and 10 16 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 10 UTILITY ON OFF status Parts that are currently ON are listed in their part color Parts that are currently OFF are listed in white 10 3 12 MASS CALCULATION Description This function determines the mass of a part a group of parts or the entire model Usage 1 VPG prompts
399. y evaluation platform ready for kinematics and stress analyses of component subsystem and vehicular models Road surfaces are generated using any 3D data or selected from the VPG library The Library contains digitized models of the following MGA Proving Ground road surfaces POTHOLE TRACKS RIPPLE TRACKS ALTERNATE ROLL SURFACE WASHBOARDS COBBLESTONE TRACKS CHATTERSTRIP BODY TWIST LANE PAVE SURFACE Fatigue Analysis Program Module eta VPG s built in fatigue post processor automatically performs a fatigue life analysis prediction to identify the key damage events and stress amplitudes This data is then used to 1 6 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 7 calculate the percentage of fatigue life remaining at the completion of the durability cycle eta VPG displays these results in easily read combined fatigue life contour plots Signal Processing Module eta VPG performs full vehicle NVH studies on simulated proving ground surfaces eta VPG automatically converts time domain analysis results into frequency domain via FFT Fast Fourier Transform eta VPG determines both low and mid range frequencies up to 250Hz for operating mode shapes frequencies structural and airborne noise and frequency responses such as idle shake rough road power train and wheel imbalance eta VPG3 0 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features Chapter Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features This chapter provides an overview of the main feature
400. ystem Section 2 15 6 86 eta VPG3 0 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 2 Once the desired coordinate system is acquired it will be displayed on the screen and the prompt will read gt ENTER X Y Z SCALE FACTORS All real numbers are valid ZEROS or BLANKS will default to 1 EXAMPLES 1 1 1 will reflect the selected nodes across the XZ plane Y direction All Y components will be multiplied by 1 e 2 1 0 5will magnify the X components by two times their size and reflect the nodes across the YZ plane X direction These coordinates will not affect the Y components but they will shrink the Z components by half their size and reflect the nodes on the original side of the XY plane DONE returns the user to the NODE OPTIONS menu 6 4 17 TRANSFORM Description This function translates or rotates the selected nodes to new locations Usage 1 VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN e VPG prompts the user to create a local coordinate system A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 15 e Once the desired coordinate system is acquired it will be displayed on the screen and the prompt will read gt ACCEPT Y N A 2 If NO the user returns to step 1 If YES VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION M R L MOVE gt ENTER U V W INCREMENTS e e g 0 0 1000 This will move transform the selected node s 1000 u

eta/VPG version 3.0 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents